* GB786044 (A)

Description: GB786044 (A)

No title available

Description of GB786044 (A)

PATENT SPECIFICATION 786,044 Date of Application and filing Complete Specification: June 23, 1950. y No 37226154. Application made In Germany on Oct 1, 1948. (Divided out of No 786,021) Complete Specification Published: Nov 13, 1957. Index at acceptance:-Class 106 ( 1), A( 1 X: 2 A: 2 B: 2 C: 2 F 1: 5 A: SB: 6 C: 8 B: 9 X: 10 B). International Classification:-GO 6 f. COMPLETE SPECIFICATION Improvements in or relating to Electric Calculators I, GE RHARD DIRKS, of Moerfelder Landstrasse 44, Frankfurt on Main, Germany, of German Nationality, do hereby declare the invention, for which I pray that a patent may be granted to me, and the method by which it is to be performed, to be particularly described in and by the following statement:- The invention relates to automatic calculators, which are controllable by means of electrical or magnetic signals. The invention provides an electrical calculating apparatus including a rotatable signal storage member with a magnetisable signal storage surface, which is notionally divided into a plurality of sectors, each sector being allocated to the storage of a particular denominational order, a multi-denominational number storage device, means for repeatedly reading out in a plurality of cycles a value stored on said device and means operating in synchronism with the rotation of the storage member and adapted to time said repeated read outs in relation to the passage of said sectors past recording means associated therewith such that in each cycle the digits of the value are read out a selected number of times coincidentally with the passage of a

pre-determined group of sectors past the recording means, each digit coinciding with a different sector on each cycle. The calculating apparatus described in this specification is also described wholly or in part in Specifications Nos 15773/50, 37227/54, 37229/54, 37230/54, 37231/54 and 37232/54 (Serial Nos 786,021, 786,045, 786,047, 786,048, 786,049 and 786,050), but the scope of the claims differs in each case. The invention is illustrated by the accompanying drawings, wherein: Fig 1 is a diagrammatic perspective view of a machine incorporating the invention and constructed as a book-keeping machine and embodying a magnetizable disc record means. Fig 2 is a fragmental sectional elevation, looking to the left of Fig 1. Fig 3 is a view in axial direction of one half of the said disc, formed as a magnetizable lPrice 3 s 6 d l signal carrier, the markings shown being purely imaginary for the purpose of explanation. Fig 4 a is a perspective view of one example of a magnetic signal head, for example a sensing head on a magnetizable carrier. Fig 4 b is a perspective view of an example of a set of heads consisting of two magnetic heads for the forwarding of a signal with change of digit value by "one " Fig 4 c is a perspective view of an example of a set of signal heads consisting of 11 magnetic heads for transfer of computing signals in dependence on the operation of numerical value switches or the like. Fig 4 d is a perspective view illustrating a set of signal heads according to Fig 4 c in association with a disc according to Fig 3. Fig 4 e is a like view to Fig 4 d showing another example of a set of heads consisting of 11 magnetic heads, which in this case embrace the disc at its edge. Figs 4 f-4 t illustrate various forms of signals recorded on the record carrier, the resultant shapes being modified because of the various alternative recording arrangements which may be used in the carrying out of the invention; and in said Figures: Fig 4 f is a diagram in which the digit value 6 is marked by recording A C in sine wave form in the digit value fields 0-6. Fig 4 g is a complementary recording of the digit value, by recording A C in the digit value fields 7-9. Fig 4 h shows how the digit value 6 is marked by recording impulses in all the fields 0-6. Fig 4 i indicates that only the beginning of the row of digit value fields is marked by an impulse as a "start" signal, the digit value field 6 contains the digit value signal and the end is indicated by a "stop" impulse.

Fig 4 k is similar to Fig 4 i but with the "start" and "stop" signals being of inverted polarity, one side of the impulses being flat because it is effected by the discharge of a condenser. Fig 41 shows that only the digit value field " 6 " is indicated by an impulse. Fig 4 m illustrates how "start" and "stop" signals are given by the sides of an elongated rectangular signal, the digit value fields being indicated by an additional impulse. Fig 4 N is similar to Fig 4 m, but with the "start" and "stop" signals indicated by an impulse in inverted direction. Fig 4 o is also similar to Fig 4 m, wherein the inversion point of the "start" and "stop" signals indicates the digit-value field. Fig 4 p is a diagram wherein "start," "stop" and digit value signals are represented by wave periods. Fig 4 q is a diagram wherein "start" and "stop" signals are given at the beginning and the end of the sequence of periods and the digit value signal by the interruption between them. Fig 4 r is similar to Fig 4 q, but with the interruption filled by a wave of another frequency. Fig 4 S is a diagram wherein the digit value field is marked by a signal formed by Z 5 using different frequencies. Fig 4 t illustrates how the recording can be effected by a constant A C, the start signal and the digit value signal being represented by short interruptions. Fig 5 is a perspective view of a part of the disc according to Fig 3, as a rotor, with magnetic signal heads, arranged as a stator. Fig 6 a is a representation in rectangular form of the rotatable record means, which in Fig 3 are shown as sections of the disc, and showing representations of definite signals for the number " 28 " Fig 6 b is a similar view to Fig 6 a, showing the disposition of the various transmission means, e g signal heads in a stator in relation to the various parts of the record means. Fig 7 a is a diagram of a part or track on the disc of Fig 3, with the signals representing the number " 28 " Fig 7 b shows two tracks according to Fig. 7 a, with signal transmission means for the transfer of a signal from track to track without change of value (" 8 + O = 8 "). Fig 7 c shows likewise two such tracks with signal heads displaced relatively to each other, which are used for a transfer from track to track with a change of value (" 8 + 1 = 9 "). Fig 8 a is a diagram showing two tracks of a record mean, a full keyboard, a selector switch for the several denominational positions (columns) and with the circuit in condition for a signal transfer from

track a to track b, for the problem (" O + 8 = 8 ") recorded in sector I. Fig 8 b is a like view but with the circuit in condition for the problem " 00 + 20 = 20 " recorded in sector II. Fig 8 c is a like view but with the circuit in condition for the problem " 000 + 000 = 000 " recorded in sector III. Fig 9 a shows likewise the circuit in condition for the problem " 8 + 1 = 9 " recorded in sector I. Fig 9 b shows the same parts in condition for the problem " 2 + 9 = 11 " recorded in sector II 70 Fig 9 c shows the same for the problem " 0 + 0 = O " recorded in sector III. Fig l Oa is a diagram showing three tracks which allow a transfer of signals from one track to a second or a third track, so that the 75 signal is recorded on the second track if below or equal to the limiting value or on the third track if it is greater than the limiting value. In this case (Fig l Oa) the transferred signal is below the limiting value in sector I 80 Fig l Ob illustrates the same process as Fig. l Oa, but with the transferred signal greater than the limiting value in sector II. Fig l Oc shows the transfer of signal " O " from the second track to the third track, with 85 the forwarding of a digit value "one" as carryover in sector III. Fig 11 a shows three tracks of a magnetizable carrier with signal transfer means for the sensing of computing signal from a track for 90 signals for digit values equal to or lower than the limiting value, without any diminishing of value, in sector I. Fig I 1 lb shows the same operation for digit values higher than the limiting value with a 95 diminishing of value in sector II. Fig 1 c shows the same process as in Fig. 1 la, but in sector III. Fig 12 a is a view corresponding to Fig. 8 a, but illustrating means for adding and sub 100 tracting digit values, the case shown being the addition problem " 1 + 8 = 9 " Fig 12 b is a view corresponding to Fig. 12 a, but showing a subtraction problem by complementary addition " 1 + 1 = 2 " 105 Fig 13 shows in a perspective view similar to Fig 5 rotatable signal carrier and stationary signal heads arranged above it with a schematic representation of co-ordinated amplifier circuits A, B, C, D and E 110 Fig 14 a-e show diagrammatically a discshaped rotatable record means with the corresponding stationary signal heads shown in a semi-circular ring, the separate figures showing successive phases of the problem " 00 + 28 = 115 28." Fig 15 a-e show the same parts as Figs.

14 a-e, but in the successive phases of another addition problem " 28 + 91 = 119 " Fig 16 a-h illustrates correspondingly the 120 successive phases of the subtraction problem " 119 84 = 35 " Fig 17 a shows in symbolic form the digit value processing means comprising a sensing head, amplifier, group of numerical value 125 switches and numerical value coils associated with recording heads (amplifier circuit "A"). Fig 17 b shows in more detail a simple embodiment of the amplifier circuit "A" of Fig 17 a 130 786,044 an inductive distributor, similar to that of Fig. 17 f. Fig 23 b is an edge view of the rotor used in the distributor of Fig 23 a. Fig 23 c is a cross-section of the stator 70 shown in Fig 23 a, on the line "A"-"B " Fig 23 d shows a wiring diagram for the control of gas-discharge tubes by an inductive distributor according to Figs 23 a-c. Fig 23 e shows the combination of an induc 75 tive distributor similar to that of Fig 23 a with two contact switches of commutator type. Fig 24 a is a diagram indicating the multiplication by repeated addition from a full keyboard or punched card or like selection device, 80 with controlled electronic sector switches. Fig 24 b shows in principle an alternative control device for use in multiplication and division. Fig 25 a is a front view of a register shifting 85 device for factors having up to 8 denominations. Fig 25 b is a side elevation of the device of Fig 25 a. Fig 25 c is a part plan of machine of Fig 90 1, showing the register shifting device and the record means and signal heads. Fig 26 shows the basic principle of the calculator for addition, subtraction, multiplication and division with electronically con 95 trolled register shifting device and cycle counter. Fig 27 a illustrates an alternative arrangement of record means, sensing, transferring, separating and diminishing means 100 Fig 27 b shows a further alternative combining the digit value processing and carryover means. Fig 27 c is a view corresponding to Fig 17 a showing the amplifier circuits "A" and "B" 105 as applied to the alternative arrangement 6 f Fig 27 a. Fig 27 d shows the amplifier circuits "C" and "D" also as applied to Fig 27 a. Fig 27 e is a part of amplifier circuit "D," 110 as applied to Fig 27 a and showing the premark switch for carry-over. Figs 27 f and 27 g show how a discrimination is made between the two sensing heads of Fig 27 a by electronic relay means 115 Fig 28 is a

diagram showing the positions of the signal heads relatively to the record means (shown as side-by-side rectangular panels) but with displacement on sensing instead of on recording as in Fig 6 b 120 Fig 29 is the wiring diagram of a calculator with full keyboard when using the arrangement of Fig 28. Fig 30 shows the wiring diagram of a multicounter book-keeping machine in which the 125 input of digits is effected by a ten's keyboard, and the processing of the signals is effected during the sensing using the arrangement of Figs 28 and 29. Fig 31 a shows the main shaft, and the 130 Fig 17 c shows in still more detail the amplifier circuit "A" of Figs 17 a and 17 b. Fig 17 d is a side view of an inductively actuating distribution arm serving as an alter3 native to the contact sector switches of Figs. 17 b and 17 c. Fig 17 e shows an edge view of the same. Fig 17 f shows a section through an inductively actuated distributor including the arm of Figs 17 d and 17 e. Fig 17 g is the wiring diagram of the amplifier circuit "A" with an electronic sector switch controlled by the distributor of Fig. 17 f. Fig 17 h is the wiring diagram of the amplifier circuit "A" with electronic digit value switches also controlled by a distributor. Fig 18 a shows in symbolic form the digit value separating and forwarding means comprising a sensing head, amplifier, pre-mark switch and two pairs of recording heads (amplifier circuit "B"). Fig 18 b shows in more detail a simple embodiment of the amplifier circuit "B" using z 5 an electro-mechanical relay as a carry-over pre-mark switch. Fig 18 c shows in still more detail the amplifier circuit "B" of Figs 18 a and 18 b but with a carry-over pre-mark switch in the form of an electronic relay. Fig 18 d shows an alternative arrangement of an amplifier circuit "B" with an electronic relay comprising exclusively high vacuum tubes. Fig 19 a shows in symbolic form the means for signal transfer diminishing of value (amplifier circuit "C"). Fig 19 b shows in more detail a simple embodiment of the amplifier circuit "C" controlling an electro-mechanical relay as carryover pre-mark switch. Fig 19 c shows in still more detail the amplifier circuit "C" but without carry-over pre-mark switch. Fig 20 a shows in symbolic form the signal transfer means with diminishing of value (amplifier circuit "D"). Fig 20 b shows in more detail a simple embodiment of amplifier circuit "D" using an electro-mechanical relay as carry-over premark switch.

Fig 20 c is a like view to Fig 20 b but controlling an electronic relay as carryover premark switch. Fig 21 a shows in symbolic form the means for the carry-over for the "fugitive one" in subtraction problems (amplifier circuit "E"). Fig 21 b shows in more detail an embodiment of the amplifier circuit "E" with electronic relay. Fig 22 shows a complete wiring diagram embodying the amplifier circuits "A" to "E" shown in Figs 17 g, 18 c, 19 c, 20 c, (as twostage amplifiers) and 21 b. 6 S Fig 23 a is a view in the axial direction of 786,044 parts rotating therewith, of the calculator illustrated in Fig 26 but without shift register. Fig 3 lb is a view in axial direction of a magnetizable disc used as a record means for the signals separated as below and equal to or above the limiting value. Fig 31 c is an edge view of the disc in Fig. 3 lb. Fig 31 d is a view in axial direction of a toothed disc used in the one case as signal generator for zero signals, and in another case as a distributor rotor. Fig 31 e is an edge of the disc in Fig 31 d. Fig 32 a shows diagrammatically one -5 method of computing by distributive means. Fig 32 b is a delay means for delaying the pre-mark switch in Fig 32 a. Fig 33 shows another method of computing by distributive means and including a full keyboard. In the drawings only so much of the mechanical parts of the calculator have been included as is necessary for the understanding of the invention, whilst for reason of clarity the electrical wiring diagrams and the arithmetical problems dealt with have purposely been simplified. COMPUTING BY DISPLACING SIGNALS ON THE RECORD MEANS. This may be done in two ways, namely by displacing the signals during the recording of them on the record means, or by displacing them during the sensing of them from the record means The former method will be described first. In the drawing, Fig 1 shows an electric calculator provided with a full keyboard 1 as input means and a printing unit 2 as output means This Figure also shows a further keyboard 3 for letters and punctuation marks, and there are still further keys 4 for arithmetical functions, e g plus, minus, multiply and divide, as well as command keys, e g. print Printing is effected by the printing unit 2 and the carriage

roller 5 which holds the paper 6 and moves it linewise Fig 1 also shows a disc which is contained within the interior of the machine frame This Figure shows only a specific example of a calculator. It is evident that there are many other possible ways of combining one or more computers with input and output means There can, for instance, be an input means in the form of a tens keyboard, or employing punched cards, tapes, magnetic or optical storages or the like, other than the computing record means Output means may be printing units, visual indicating means and magnetic or optical storages, or the like, other than the computing record means. I SURVEY OF THE MECHANICAL PARTS. The full keyboard 1 contains ten vertical rows 81-81 ' of keys (see Fig 1), these keys also being in ten horizontal rows 9 -99 Of these ten vertical rows, the rows 81-8 ' represent different denominations, namely, from right to left, units to ten millions, while the vertical rows 8 ' and 810 serve for selecting the number areas of the record means within which to operate The horizontal rows 9 '-9 ' 70 represent in each denomination digit values from 0 to 9 The keys in this keyboard can be pressed down, and when pressed down are arrested mechanically by means of projections (see Fig 2) provided on each key and 75 engaging below latches 11 on bars 12, one for each vertical row of keys, these bars being urged longitudinally by springs 13 Each key is urged upwardly by a spring 14 so that when any key in one of the vertical rows is depressed 80 movement of the latch bar 12 releases any previously depressed key in that row Each key, when depressed, closes contacts 15, 16 arranged below its lower end One of these contacts in each pair is connected horizontally 85 with the corresponding contacts of all the other pairs in the same horizontal row The key at the extreme right hand in Fig 2 and which is in the fifth vertical row 8 ' (Fig 1) is adapted to make contact between spring contacts 155 90 and 16 The contact 160 is, as already stated, connected horizontally to all other keyboard contacts 160 for the keys having the same digit value " O " The second horizontal line of keys 91 repre 95 sent the digit value 1 in all the denominations. The contact 161 is therefore connected in parallel horizontally with the contacts 161 of all the other keys representing the digit value 491,, 100 On the other hand there are vertical connections between the other spring contacts 15 of the several pairs below the keys For instance, spring contacts 15 ' shown in Fig 2 are connected to each other vertically in the row 8 '105 (Fig 1). By means of the horizontal digit-wise connection of the respective contacts 16, and the vertical denomination-wise connection of the spring contacts 15, the full keyboard is enabled 110 to indicate, by depressing the appropriate key and closing the corresponding contacts,

any digit value in any denomination within the capacity of the machine For any addition or subtraction operation, and comparable with 115 mechanically operating calculators, the keys of the keyboard will be arrested only for one such operation, whereas for multiplying or dividing operations the keys remain arrested until the operation has been completed 120 The calculator contains within the casing 17 a computing arrangement which performs the operations of adding, subtracting and so on The mechanical parts in the example now being described comprise a shaft 18, which is 125 rotated by the motor 19 either intermittently or continuously as is described below On the said shaft 18 is mounted the disc 7, comprising the computing record means (computing signal carrier) The surface of the disc has a 130 786,044 mediate recordings and the fields 20-39 to allow for processing time. The number 28 therefore, would be recorded in track a as shown in Fig 3 in such a way that there is an " 8 " digit-value signal recorded 70 within the field " 8 " in track a of sector I, whereas a digit-value signal " 2 " is recorded in the field " 2 " track a of sector II, and digit-value " O " is recorded within field " O " track a of sector III, and further digit-values 15 " O " are recorded within the fields " 0 " of all the remaining sectors of the said track a. It is further to be seen from Fig 3, that the magnetizable layer may be regarded as divided into side-by-side concentric tracks 80 a-e; fl-fl O-fi; m and n, the said digitvalue signals corresponding to " 28 " being shown in track a During relative movement between the disc 7 and signal heads, the said different tracks are traversed by these heads, 85 which have recording, sensing and erasing means, the respective heads being fixed within the stator in appropriate positions. Whereas the tracks a, c, d and e are represented generally as single tracks in the example 90 now being described, the tracks b and t,-f I are shown as a plurality of sub-tracks, each being traversable by a recording, sensing and erasing head, these heads being either movable from track to track or more usually there being 95 signal heads for each track which can be switched on and off as required The subdividing of track b is illustrated fully in Figs. 6 a and 6 b. Within the tracks c and d there are inter 100 ruptions in the magnetizable layer Within each sector a magnetizable layer is present within track c only within the fields 0-9, whereas it is present within track d only within the fields 10-19 The non-magnetiz 105 able portions of these tracks are shown cross hatched. In addition to the tracks a-e, which are used for the processing of digit-value signals there are two further tracks m and N which 110

contain permanent signals In track a in each sector there is such a signal in field 0, and in track m in each sector there are permanent signals in the fields 0-9 These permanent signals are sensed by a sensing head, whereby 115 from track N in each sector a zero signal can be put into the field " 0 " of for example track a, and track m provides registering signals for use during computation proceedings as described below 120 III THE STATOR. The recording, sensing and erasing of the magnetic signals on to and from the disc can be carried out in any manner known from magnetic tape sound technology and the like 125 Examples of signal heads and their manner of use are illustrated in Figs 4 a-4 e. Fig 4 a shows a usual magnet head in diagrammatic representation In particular, the iron core 25 is shown with a slot 26 and a 130 magnetizable layer, enabling the recording, sensing and erasing of signals inductively The recording of such signals is effected during a movement of this disc 7 relatively to a stator indicated generally as 20 and comprising a set of signal heads for recording, sensing and erasing respectively The stator parts are mounted on the frame or chassis 21. Also within the casing 17 is a sector-switch 22, mounted on the shaft 18 and serving to establish a co-operation between the vertical rows of keys 81-8 ' and corresponding sectors on said magnetizable layer, for a purpose described below Also carried by the frame 21 is the stator 23 of a distributor, the rotor 24 of which is mounted on the said shaft 18 The stator 23 includes primary coils 23 a and secondary coils 23 b, whereby certain signals recorded on the disc can, when transmitted to these coils, control output-mechanisms, for instance the printing unit 2, and the carriageroller 5. The printing unit 2 is operable either by signals on the disc 7, or by the contacts 1516 of the keyboard 1. II THE ROTOR. Instead of the disc 7, a drum or other recordmeans can be used The disc may be regarded as divided into 13 equal-sized sectors or denomination areas I-XIII, that is to say, one more than the maximum number ( 12) of denominations which are to be processed by the calculator. As Fig 3 shows, the disc must be thought to be sub-divided not only into the said different sectors I-XIII corresponding to the different denominations of a given number, but also in such a way, that each sector is subdivided into digit areas or fields representing different digit values The denominational area of sector I is for the recording of the digit values in the last denomination of a number; sector II is for the recording of digit values in the penultimate denomination of that number; sector III is for the recording of digit values in the

ante-penultimate denomination of the number, and so on. Fig 3 shows also that, within each denomination area or sector there are different groups of digit-areas or fields, these being indicated in sector I as fields 0-9; 10-19; 20-39. To illustrate the way in which signals of different digit-values in any denomination in a number are recorded on the magnetizable disc 7, one must understand that, in each sector the digit-value " O " will always be in field " O;" digit-value " 1 " will always be in field " 1;" digit-value " 2 " will always be in field " 2;" digit-value " 3 " will always be in field " 3;" digit-value " 4 " will always be in field " 4;" digit-value " S " will always be in field " 5;" and so on, and digit-value " 9 " will always be in field " 9 " The fields 10-19 are provided for inter- 786,044 6 786,044 winding 27, the head overlying the magnetic layer 28 of the disc 7 A magnetic flux in the head induced by an electric current within the winding 27 flows through the arms of the iron core 25 and partly through the magnetic layer 28 and thereby brings about an increased magnetic saturation of this layer, and the remanent magnetizing-effect within the magnetizable layer 28 constitutes a signal which may be of any of the known recordable types. For recording, the signal carrier or recordmeans need not be in every case the movable part The signal heads may themselves move without altering the principle of the process, since only the relative movement between signal heads and record means is required. The sensing of such magnetically recorded signals takes place in the reverse manner, by means of sensing heads or sensing windings in the same heads as the recording windings A magnetic signal which passes the slot 26 of a sensing head brings about a change of voltage within the winding of that head, which constitutes a signal and which when amplified can be used for computation or control functions or the like. Erasing takes place mainly by means of energizing an erasing head by a highfrequency current Alternatively, the erasing could take place by a suitable direct current erasing head, which would saturate the magnetic layer and again de-magnetize it to bring about the original condition of such layer The sensing and recording heads may, as shown in Figs 4 b-4 e, be mechanically united into a set of two or more heads In this case the sensing can take place with the aid of a sensing head and the subsequent recording with the aid of a recording head if they are connected to each other over signal transmission means, for example, an amplifier If the sensing and the recording slots 26 and 261 of this combination of heads are in alignment radially of the disc then a magnetic signal passing the sensing head is transmitted from the sensed track to the corresponding field in the

track under the recording head 30 and therefore with the same digit value, since the slots 26 and 261 are not displaced angularly relative to each other as shown later on in Fig 7 b If the slots 26 and 26 ' are mutuallydisplaced angularly then with such a transfer of a signal from the sensed track to the track under the recording head 30 a change of position angularly of the disc will take place in the same sector, and therefore with a change of digit value of the signal (see Fig 7 c). Fig 4 b shows two signal heads 29-30 positioned side-by-side in such a way that the slot 26 of the sensing head 29 is distant from the slot 261 of the recording head 30 by one field in the direction of the relative movement between the heads and the magnetizable layer. Fig 4 c shows a combined set of one sensing head 31 with slot 31 ' and ten recording heads 32 with slots 32 -329 by means of which the transfer of signals from one track to other tracks can be effected in such manner that any pre-determined changing of the position of 70 the signal on the signal-carrier, e g, the magnetizable disc 7 can take place The slot 310 of the sensing head 31 is in the same angular position as the slot 320 of the first of the recording heads 32, the slots 321, 32 ' 32 ' 75 of the other recording heads being progressively advanced angularly with respect to that of the previous recording heads by the extent of one digit value field. Fig 4 d represents the same set of heads as 80 shown in Fig 4 c but in the working position relatively to a magnetizable signal carrier or record means in the form of a disc, namely disc 7, this set of heads being able to change the position of signals in dependence on 85 switches (not shown) and operating with one sensed track a and a track b divided into ten sub-tracks arranged side-by-side. Fig 4 e shows an alternative arrangement in which such a set of heads operates with only 90 two tracks a and b, track b not being subdivided The disc lies in the slots of the heads, these being in line and signals are sensed in track a and recorded in track b The arrangement shown in Fig 4 d has the advantage that 95 the several slots can be arranged much closer to each other, whereas the arrangement shown in Fig 4 e is that it requires no more space for track b than for track a. As shown in Fig 5 the signal heads are 100 arranged as a stator over the rotating disc 7. There are different sets of signal heads to be seen The signal head 31 is for the sensing of signals within track a, from whence these signals are picked up and are transferred by 105 signal-transmission means, which are switchable, to the recording heads 32 -329 over the respective sub-tracks in track b These elements for transferring signals from track a to track b are the digit-value-processing means

110 The sets of signal heads 33-38 are the signal heads of carry-over means Of these the signal heads 33-34 are for separating or distinguishing between signals on track b which are equal to or lower than a denominational 115 limit value, for example, digit value 9, and those on track b which exceed that limiting value, the former being recorded on track c and the latter on track d Signals heads 35 are for the performance of the carry-over of 120 the digit value " 1 " from the preceding denomination. The transfer from the tracks c and d to the track e is effected by the signal heads 36-38. When transferring from track c to track e 125 there is no change of digit-value, whereas when transferring from track d to track e value diminishing means are provided comprising signal heads 37-38 There are provided also means which determine whether, within the 130 786,044 of this number 028, and within field 2 of sector II, being the signal for the penultimate denomination 2 of such number; both such signals being indicated in the diagram Fig. 6 a by hatched fields in the track a In the following sectors III-XII there would be signals only in the fields 0 of track a, and the complete recording would therefore represent the number 000000000028 Corresponding in position to the ten recording heads 32 of the digit value displacement arrangement the track b is made up into ten sub-tracks, this as above stated allowing of an easier construction and arrangement of the sets of signal heads with their slots in a small angular distance. Within the fields 0-9 of the tracks c and d there is a magnetizable layer in track c only, whereas in track d the said fields are not magnetizable, the layer being absent The cross-wise hatched lines indicate that there is no possibility for recording within the fields as indicated, as in these the layer is removed in order to separate signals having a digit value equal to and lower than 9 and which are recorded on track c, from those whose digit value is higher than 9 and are recorded on track d For the same reason there is no magnetizable layer within the fields 10-19 in track c, whereas the same fields in track d can be magnetized Finally track e constitutes the result track, whereas the track " f " (not shown in this Fig) allows of the recording of as many digit numbers in the different tracks as there are multi-column computers within the calculator. Fig 6 b shows diagrammatically an example of the arrangement of the signal heads within the stator For indicating the different types of signal head the following symbols are used: next denomination, the recording heads 34 or shall operate, dependent upon whether or not there are signals in track d for transfer to track e Only one arrangement of these sets of signal heads is provided

irrespective of the number of sectors on the rotating disc such one arrangement processing different denominations in succession. The tracks f -f of Fig 3 are for the recording of the results of 12 numbers, that is to say, for example, the calculator with twelve tracks f,-f,, is a twelve-number calculator. By enlarging the size of the disc or by arranging a second or more discs moving together in synchronism it is possible to have as many signal-tracks as are required for any number of numbers. As there is high-speed relative movement between the record means and the signal heads, there is an air gap between the relatively moving parts preventing friction, but determining a recording and/or sensing of signals in the required frequency and intensity. Fig 6 a shows diagrammatically the different fields on the rotating disc in which signals can be recorded, whereas Fig 6 b shows in which different fields of the stator the sensing, recording and erasing heads are provided Both these diagrams show the different sectors as rectangles in order to have enough room to show exactly the different fields in which the signals are to be recorded, and in which the different signal heads are arranged. For convenience the tracks f,-f are omitted from Figs 6 a and 6 b their purpose being similar to that of track e. Fig 6 a also shows diagrammatically the different sectors, fields and tracks of the magnetizable disc 7, used as a signal carrier or record means Four sectors of a thirteensector disc are shown, placed next to one another as rectangles, the third from the left representing the identical sectors III-XII. The complete signal carrier comprises the thirteen sectors, of which the sectors I-XII are used as record means, for processing up to twelve denominations The diagram shows sector II at the right of sector I, but it is to be understood that on the disc sector II is arranged in sequence to sector I, so that the fields 0-40 of the sector I have their continuation in the fields 0-40 of the sector II, which lead again in continuation to the 40 fields of sector III, and so on and finally to the fields of the sector XII and then to the switching sector XIII. The permanent signals for " zero" in track n and for registering purposes in the fields 0-9 of track m, which are used as signal generators in combination with sensing heads, are indicated by stroke markings within the fields of the track m and n Within track a is shown the recording of the number 028 by means of signals within the field 8 of sector I, being the signal for the last denomination 8 and + a recording head o a sensing head a non-switchable erasing head a switchable erasing head. This diagram makes it possible to describe 110 by means of symbols the

exact position of the signal heads within the stator, and the different kinds of signal heads. To facilitate the description, the following symbols will be used A signal head of the 115 stator within sector I, track a, field 9, is symbolized e g in all the following diagrams by: I a 9; a signal head of the stator within sector I, track b, field 9 is symbolized e g in all the following diagrams by I b 9 etc 120 In order to simplify the description of the position of the signal heads arranged within the stator, their position is indicated by a combined symbolism of letters and figures. The Roman figure indicates the sector of the 125 stator, in which the signal head is to be found, the small following letter indicates the track in which the signal head is situated, and the figure finally indicates the field within the 786,044 8 786,044 sector of the track in which the slot of the signal head is situated. "I a 9 " indicates, therefore, that the slo, of this signal head is in sector I, track a and field 9 of the stator. In the stator there are provided sensing and recording heads for the following processes: DIGIT VALUE PROCESSING. This process effects the change of the digit value of a signal in dependence of another digit value The means for this process comprise sensing heads 32 -9 in the stator fields I b 0 to I b 9 for the signal transfer from track a to track b, see A in Fig 6 b. CARRY-OVER PROCESSES. Within this process is effected the statement, whether the resulting sum of the digit values of the respective denomination exceeds the limiting value, and further on the carry-over forwarding by a correction of the resulting digit value by " 1 " in dependence on a carryover pre-mark signal of the preceding denomination. The means for this computing process comprise sensing head 33 in stator position I b 19, recording heads 34 ' and 342 in stator positions I c 19 and I d 19 and the recording heads 35 ' and 352 in stator positions I c 18 and I d 18 for the signal transfer from track b to track c or d (B of Fig 6 b). If the sum of the digit values does not exceed the limiting value, the digit value signals are transferred unchanged, the means for this process 3 comprising sensing head 36 in stator position II c 5 and recording head 38 in stator position II e 5, for the signal transfer from track c to track e (C of Fig 6 b). COMPUTING PROCESS ( 4): The digit value diminishing within the same denomination and the pre-marking of a carryover as correction of a resulting digit value in

the following denomination is effected if the resulting sum of the digit value exceeds the limiting value as a result of an addition. The means of this process comprise sensing head 37 in stator position I d 35 and recording head 38 in stator position II e 5 for the signal transfer from track d to track e (D of Fig 6 b). The addition of the " fugitive one " in subtraction and the re-transfer to track a, and effected by the sensing head 58 in stator position XIII e 19 and the recording heads 59 and 60 in stator positions XIII a 19 and XIII a 18 for the signal transfer from track e to track a (E of Fig 6 b). Erasing heads are provided in the stator positions II a-d 19 and XIII e 39 The erasing heads in the tracks b-e are uncontrolled. They automatically erase the signals from these tracks after they have been processed. The erasing head in track a is effective only during addition or subtraction processes It is provided with a compensation winding, by which the erasing effect can be removed if no further addition or subtraction is to be effected, for several rotations may run through without processing, for instance, in multiplication or division. During a co-operation with the selective storage it is likewise necessary to make use of controlled erasing heads in tracks which are to receive signals from the selective storage or are to deliver signals for the result and the like into the storage. IV COMPUTING PROCESSES FOR ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION. 1 DIGIT VALUE PROCESSING IN ADDITION. Computing by means of such a signal carrier or record means and signal heads depends on the changing of the position of signals on the signal carrier, in this case the magnetizable disc 7 The description of the computing processes therefore requires first an explanation as to how the signals representing the digit values in a number are recorded A part of the track a of the signal carrier is therefore shown enlarged and elongated in the various diagrams of Figs 7 a-7 c. Fig 7 a shows two sectors of the track a (sectors I and II for the recording of the last and penultimate denominations of the number 028, and the subdivision of these two sectors into four times ten fields The sectors are noted with Roman figures I and II, starting with the last denomination of a number which is to be represented Thus, for example, for the recording of the number 028 sector I is provided for the recording of the signal of the last denomination, which is in this case the l digit value 8, whereas the signal which represents the digit value 2 of the penultimate denomination of this number is recorded within the sector II The next sectors III/IV etc. record only signals in the fields for the digit 1 value 0. The recording of a signal representing the digit value 8 takes place

within the field 8 of the first quarter of the sector I by means of an increased or otherwise altered remanence of the magnetizable layer or in any other suitable known manner (e g a change of amplitude, frequency, phase, etc) The recording of the digit value 2 (penultimate digit) takes place in a corresponding manner by means of 1 a magnetic signal within the field 2 of the first quarter of the sector II With numbers which contain more than two denominations signals for the corresponding digit values are recorded in the remaining sectors; in this example 1 (" 028 ") the digit value 0 is recorded in the remaining sectors. For the transfer of signals in a sector from one track to another, for instance from track a to track b a sensing head is located within 1: the track a and a recording head is located within the track b In Fig 7 B two such signal heads are connected over an amplifier, being symbolized by the amplifier shown symbolically If the slot of the sensing head 29 and of 13 786,044 152 Therefore within the full keyboard, the number 28 is introduced into the calculator. As there are no keys pressed down in the preceding vertical rows of contacts 15 Y-15 ' there is indicated an " O " because contacts 70 below row 16 ' are normally connected but are separated when and so long as another key in the same vertical row is pressed down Also, Fig 8 a shows the sector switch 22 (see Fig. 2) with peripheral contacts 391-39 ' and a 75 centre contact 40 This contact 40 is connected to the anode circuit of the amplifier 41 which amplifies signals from the sensing head 31 which, as shown, is sensing a signal in track a at slot 31 The peripheral contacts 391-39 ' 80 are connected to the respective vertical contact rows 15 '-15 ' as shown and are wiped by the contact 42 which rotates with the sector switch. In Fig 8 a the arm 42 is wiping the peripheral contact 39 ' and at that instant only 85 digit values in the vertical row 151 can be processed Fig 8 a also shows that the sensing head 31 over track a of the rotating disc 7 is sensing the signal " O " in the digit value field " O " of sector I, which signal is trans 90 ferred over the amplifier 41 to the centre contact 40 of the sector switch 22 and wiping arm 42 to the peripheral contact 391 thence to the vertically connected contacts in row 151 and through the closed contact below the de 95 pressed key " 8 " via the horizontal connection 168 to one side of the winding of the recording head having the slot 32 ', see also Fig 4 c-4 d There is thus recorded in track b a signal in field 8 of sector I representing the computation 100 " Q+ 8 = 8," effected by the digit value processing means. The other side of the winding of the recording head is connected back to the amplifier 41 again Instead of zero signals being sensed from 105 track a they may be, in certain cases, sensed on track N and

conveyed to the amplifier 41, the alternatives being determined by the switch 43. Fig 8 b shows the same processing means for 110 dealing with the digit values " O + 2 = 2 " or " 00 + 20 = 20 " of the penultimate denomination of the number 028 There is again shown the keyboard 1 with pressed down keys " 20 " and " 8 " so that, within the penultimate 115 vertical contact row 152 the key " 2 " is pressed down to close the contacts below it By this means there is a connection between the vertical contact row 152 and the horizontal contact row 16 Within the sector II the sens 120 ing head 31, after passing over the area of sector I, senses a signal 0 in the track a (or n) which, through the amplifier 41, the sector switch 22 and the contacts 39 of the depressed key is transmitted to the recording head with 125 slot 32 ', whereby a signal is recorded in track b in field 2 representing the computation " 00 + 20 = 20 " In the same manner, sectors III, IV and V and so on in track b receive a zero signal transmitted through an amplifier 130 the recording head 30, as shown in this example, are in the tracks Ma and b respectively but in the same line of stator fields and within the same sector, signals recorded in track a with the record means rotating in the direction of the arrow, are sensed from track a, and transferred to track b without a change of their digit value position In Fig 7 b the signal 8 is being sensed within the track a in exactly the same moment when the field 8 of track b passes below the slot of the recording head 30 as the two slots of the sensing and recording heads are in the same line of fields, whereby the sensed signal for 8 on track a is recorded again as a signal for 8 on track b With further movement of the signal carrier to the extent of one sector, the digit value 2 in the track a in the sector II, that is the penultimate denomination of the number 028 is likewise transferred unchanged in value on to track b as a magnetic signal in field 2 of the sector II, since sector II, field 2, track a of the rotor passes below the slot of the sensing head 29 just at the moment when sector II field 2 of the track b is below the slot of the recording head 30. If, however, as demonstrated in Fig 7 c the slot of the sensing head 29 is displaced from the slot of the recording head 30 by one field, for example, if the slot of this recording head is just over the field 9 of the sector I, then the magnetic signal of track a in field 8 induces a voltage in the sensing head, and the recording head produces a magnetic signal in the magnetizable layer, of track b and in a position altered by one field compared with the original signal in track a. By means of this displacement of the heads by one field, the signals when being transferred from track a to track b are changed in position

so that the digit value of the signal sensed on track a is increased by one " on transfer to track b. Figs 8 a-8 c shows the computing process of " 000 " + " 028 " = " 028 " The Fig 8 a shows the keyboard 1 with the different vertical and horizontal rows of contacts The horizontally connected contacts 16 -169 (see also Fig. 2) indicate the different digit-values 0-9, whereas the vertical rows of contacts 15 '-15 ' indicate the different denominations, for example, 151 is the row of contacts for the last or unit denomination of a number, 152 is the row for the penultimate or tens denomination of the number, 15 ' is the row for the hundreds denomination, and so on In Figs 8 a-8 c the full keyboard 1 shows that in the last denomination there is pressed down the key " 8," which has made a contact between the horizontal contact line 168 and the vertical contact line 151, such contact being maintained so long as this key is kept down In the contact row for the penultimate denomination, there is pressed down the key " 2 " which connects the horizontal contact line 16 ' for the digit value 2, with the vertical contact line 786,044 786,044 41, sector switch 22 and the normally closed contacts in rows 153-15 ', representing the computations " 000 Q+ 000 = 000 " according to Fig 8 c. Figs 9 a-9 c show the digit-value processing (without subsequent carry-over) for the addition of the numbers: 0: 2: 8 + 0: 9: 1 = O:11: 9 " within the sectors III, II, I for the three last denominations of numbers 028 and 091. Fig 9 a shows sector I of the tracks a and b during that instant of the relative movement between signal carrier and signal heads, when sector I field 8 of track a is below the slot 31 of the sensing head which is in the position I a 9 in the stator (see Fig 6 b). Over the track b there is again shown the set of the ten recording heads with their slots 32 '-32 ' each displaced by one field from the next within the stator positions I b 9 to I b 0. These recording heads receive electric signals induced in the sensing head 31 and transmitted via the amplifier 41, the sector switch 22 and the contacts of key " 1," (representing the last denomination of the number 91) and the horizontal connection 161 to recording head with slot 32 ' representing the computation " 8 + 1 = 9 " As the slot 32 ' of the energized recording head is displaced from the slot 310 of the sensing head by one field, the magnetic signal of the recorded digit value on to track b will in this case be " 9," instead of the sensed digit value " 8 " The displacement by one field effects an addition of " 1 " by these processing means These processing means are referred to in the following description as " amplifying circuit A " With the

further relative movement of the rotor with respect to the signal heads, a magnetic signal in the sector II, field 2, of track a (digit value of the penultimate digit of the number " 28 ") passes under the slot 31 ' of the sensing head This moment is shown in Fig 9 b As 20 and 90 are now to be added the recording head 32 ' is switched in within the sector II of the disc 7 so that the magnetic signal " 2 " in sector II track a is changed in position by 9 fields when transferred from track a to track b and is recorded as " 11 " in sector II of track b. As on the further relative movement of the rotor by one sector, the recording head becomes effective in sector III, in dependence on the connection of the horizontal line 160 to the vertical row 15 ' for the third-last denomination of the number, and the sensing head 31 in the position I a 9 of the stator is connected with the recording head 320 in position I b 9 via the amplifier 41, sector switch 22 and the zero contacts in row 16 of the keyboard 1, so that there is no changing of digit value position during the signal transfer from track a to track b. The means for changing the digit value position of signals during transfer from track to track are called in the following description value-processing means (processing means). They operate within the example so far 70 described during a transfer from track a to track b The result received on track b by an addition of " 0: 2: 8 to 0: 9: 1 " by means of the set of signal heads 31-32 in. combination with the digit value switches in lines 16 -169 and the amplifier 41 will be " O: 11: 9 " These signals are recorded in track b as an intermediate result of the computing processes effected by the processing means as shown in Figs 9 a-9 c In order to 80 transform this intermediate result " O: 11: 9 " into the final result " 1: 1: 9 " a carryover is still essential and is effected by carryover means operating in this example during signal transfer from track b to tracks c and d 85 and from those tracks to track e. The several phases of these processes may be brought together by corresponding switch means and the like As it is possible, however, to demonstrate in this example the 90 different operations in different phases, the following description will explain this. 2 CARRY-OVER. The carry-over means which is illustrated diagrammatically in Figs 10 a-10 c and 1 la 95 lic consists of signal-separating means, valuediminishing means, and signal-forwarding means. a CASES EXCEEDING THE LIMITING VALUE AND FORWARDING THE CARRY-OVER INTO 100 THE NEXT DENOMINATION.

The separating means are for separating signals representing resulting digit values equal to or lower than a pre-determined digit value (e.g " 9 ") from signals representing resulting 105 digit values which are higher than such predetermined digit value They comprise in the example now described, means for a signal transfer from track b to tracks c and d; usually sensing head 33, the recording heads 34 '-342, 110 the amplifier 44, non-magnetizable areas 45 in the fields " 10-19 " of track c and nonmagnetizable area 46 in the fields " 0-9 " of track d, and also two recording heads 35 '-352 being distant from the recording heads 341 115 34 ' by one field in each case and being effective as forwarding means, if a carry-over of " 1 into the next sector has to be effected. The transfer of signals from track b to the track c or d takes place via "the amplifier 120 circuit B " which consists of the amplifier 44, the forwarding switch 47 having two ways 48 and 49, a sensing head 33 in the position I b 19 in the stator, two recording heads 34 '-342 in the positions I c 19 and I d 19 within the 125 stator for the separating of signals and two further recording heads 35 '-35 ', being distant 786,044 786,044 11 from the recording heads 341-342 by one field in each case and being effective as means for forwarding the value " 1 " if a carryover into the next sector has to be effected The recording heads 341-342 are connected in parallel and connected to switch way 48 whilst 35 '352 are in parallel and connected to switch way 49 of the forwarding switch 47 All the signal heads are suitable mounted fixedly on the frame 21. By means of the chequered arrangement of magnetizable and non-magnetizable areas 4546 of the tracks c and d, the recording of any one signal can only take place either in the track c or in the track d since at any one instant there is only one of the slots in each pair of the recording heads 341-342 and 351. 352 over a magnetizable layer Within the tracks c and d signals of digit values lower than or equal to 9, are therefore always recordable only on the track c, whereas digit value signals exceeding " 9 " are always recordable only on the track d. In Fig 10 a, the separating of the signal " 9 " sensed from the track b in sector I is effective during the transfer of that signal from track b to tracks c and d only in track c, notwithstanding that it is presented to both tracks, and the effect is that the signal " 9 " of track b is now recorded in the field position " 9 " on the track c whilst on track d no recording can take place. If the forwarding switch 47 were in switch position 49, it would connect the amplifier 44 with the second pair of recording heads 351352 In such event a forwarding of the signal " 9 " from track b would take place, so that there would be a change of digit value

position by " 1 " and a signal " 10 " in track d would result This forwarding switch 47 as is described later with reference to Figs 18 a18 d, may consist of a plurality of electronic tubes but alternatively could consist of relays or other suitable switch means. Fig 10 b shows the separating of the magnetic signal " 11 " sensed from track b in sector II, after a rotation of the disc 7 by one sector As a magnetizable layer in field " 11 " is provided in the track d only, a transfer of a signal " 11 " from the track b to the tracks c and d can only be effective on track d, in field " 11 " in sector II of that track. With the procedure described hitherto in the example " 028 + 091 = 119," the first sum 028 is still in track a During the transfer from track a to track b, namely, during thevalue changing by the processing means, there has taken place a changing of the digit value position by one field because of the pressed down key " 1 " in the last denomination row 151 of the keyboard 1 having been effective within sector I of the magnetizable disc, as controlled by the sector switch 22 (see Fig 9 a). After a relative movement by one sector there has taken place within sector II a changing of the digit value position of the signal 2 in a by "nine " fields because of the pressed down key " 9 " in the penultimate denomination row 152 of the keyboard 1, " 028,+ 091 = 0: 11: 9 " having been effected within the sector II as controlled by the sector switch 22 (Fig 9 b). Within Sector III no change of signal position has taken place during this transfer from track a to track b as the sector switch 22 has made only zero contacts effective (see Fig. 4 c). After the separating means has been effective in the three different sectors, according to Fig. a 10 c during a transfer from track b to tracks c and d, the signals are now to be found in the tracks a, b, c and d as follows: Track Sector III Sector II Sector I a b c d 0 0 2 111 8 9 b NON-DIMINISHING OR DIMINISHING THE DIGIT VALUE IN THE SAME DENOMINATION 90 To complete the processing a diminishing means is required Such means is operated during a transfer of the signals from the tracks c and d to the result track e, as shown in Figs lla-11 c This transfer is effected in 95 such a way that two sensing heads 36-37 are connected respectively via the amplifiers 50 and 51 to the windings of the recording head 38. The sensing head 36 is in position II c 5 over track c, whereas the recording head is in 100 the stator position II e 5 over the track e. Therefore, signals on the track c are transferred to the track e with the same digit value.

For example, in Fig 1 la, the transferring of the signal " 9 " in sector I from track c to 105 track e is shown. The diminishing means consists of two amplifier circuits, the amplifier circuit C, by which those signals are transferred from track c to track e when no diminishing is to take 110 place, and the amplifier circuit " D " for transferring signals from track d to track e, whilst at the same time diminishing them in digit value by a corresponding change of digit value position The extent by which diminishing 115 takes place (diminishing value) depends upon the limiting value For example, in decimal notation it would be by 10 fields, and in converting pence to shillings it would be by 12 fields, and so on 120 The amplifier circuit C consists of a winding of the recording head 38 in the stator position II e 5, the amplifier 50 and the sensing head 36 over the track c in position II c 5 The amplifier circuit D consists of another or the 125 same winding on sensing head 38 in the stator position II e 5, the amplifier 51 and the 786,044 12 786,044 sensing head 37 which is distant by 10 fields from the recording head 38 over track d in the stator position I d 35 The amplifier circuit D controls the carry-over forwarding switch 47 of circuit B and which moves over from position 48 to position 49, dependent upon whether signals are being sensed from track c or track d. As with the further rotation of the disc 7 the magnetic signal " 11 " runs below the slot of the sensing head 37 of the amplifier circuit D, there takes place, on the transfer from track d to track e, a field displacement (change of digit value position) of the signal by ten fields so that the magnetic signal " 11 " on track d is recorded in track e diminished to the value " 1," in field 1 of track e (Fig. llb) This transfer effects also the ignition of the gas discharge tube 52 of the forwarding switch 47 and by energizing the relay winding 53 effects a switching over from the way 48 to the way 49 so that on the transfer from track b to track c or track d the signal is forwarded into the next sector III. The transfer from tracks c and d to track e within sector III is shown in Fig llc In Fig. 9 c there has been shown the operating of the processing means with the amplifier circuit A during a signal transfer from track a to track b according to the computation: " 0 + O = O " On the transfer from track b to tracks c and d shown in Fig 10 c the forwarding of the carry-over signal " 1 " was controlled by a tens carry-over signal from the previous denomination in sector II, via the switch way 49 of the forwarding switch 47. Now the transfer of the signal " 1 " in sector III from track c to track e, takes place by means of the amplifier circuit C without any

change of digit value position, and therefore the signal " 1 " is recorded in track e. On the further rotation of the disc 7 the eraser heads 61-64 (see Figs 5 and 6 b stator positions II a-d 19) of the tracks a, b, c and d respectively which are permanently effective, operate to remove the signals in those tracks, so that only in the track e are signals to be found, as follows: Track Sector III Sector II Sector I so a b c d e These result signals may either be transferred back to trace a for further processing, or transferred to one of 'the tracks f,-f, which are the record means for further computers, or transferred to output means. As the processing means operates successfully in the several sectors, independent of the number of sectors, that is independent of the number of denominations of the numbers to be processed and independent of the number of tracks f 1-'ff of a multi-computor calculator, 65 only one set of signal heads is required Otherwise there is the possibility of processing by more than one sets of signal heads, e g, in parallel or in series There could if desired be more than one processing means 70 A further great advantage rests 'in the fact that the value processing may rake place digitwise Thus, the value processing means are immediately free for further processing, operating during the value processing of a complete 75 number This results in particular from the fact that the arrangement of the signal heads in the stator is such that with every cycle of relative movement all the fields of every sector have passed the signal heads and all the value 80 processing operations for the denominations concerned are completed. This means in practice that the value processing during the next denomination area of the signal carrier (that is during the rotation 85 of the next sector past the signal heads for processing the next denomination of the same number) can include a forwarding of a signal from the previous denomination area As now the record means may be within certain limits 90 of such dimensions as desired, with only one value processing means, with very low inertia, a very large number of denomination areas can be provided on the record means and when such a calculation is used in conjunction 95 with or within a book-keeping machine, the work of a plurality of mechanical computers can be done by only one value-processing means which need have only the capacity for processing signals of digit values in a single 100 denomination, and including only one carryover means By means of the digit-wise terminating of the value-processing, by running through of the digit values of a denomination it is also possible to use the resulting digit 105 values on the signal carrier for further operations, for example, in further computing or in printing, indicating, sorting,

checking and so on. *3 DIGIT VALUE PROCESSING DURING 110 SUBTRACTION Subtraction with the machine according to this invention is carried out preferably by the addition of complementary digit values, and is illustrated in Figs 12 a-12 b For this purpose 115 the recording heads 32 -32 ' used as part of the processing means during the transfer of signals from track a to track b are each provided with an additional winding, and whereas the one end of the normal winding on each 120 head is connected to the key contacts having the digit value which that head represents, the corresponding end of the additional windings is connected to the key contacts having the complementary digit value For example, in 125 head 328, one end of the normal winding goes to key contacts 168 in row 9 ' and the corres786,044 by means of the example " 119 -84 = 35 " This is done by way of addition of the complementary to nine in each denomination of the number 84 to the number 119, e g, " 00000119 + 99999915 = 00000035 " Fig 12 b shows the processing for that part of this operation which concerns sector II. The change-over switch 55 is now in position 57 and therefore puts only the additional windings in circuit, as shown by the thickened lines. In this example a "fugitive one" well known in mechanical calculators results 'in sector XIII and is to be added in sector I, this may be done as a separate addition operation by the carry-over means as described above, and as is usual in mechanical computers, or can be done by change of digit value position during transfer from track e to track a over amplifier circuit E. ponding end of the additional winding goes to key contacts 161 in row 9 ' For the purpose of addition the change-over switch 55 is in the position 56 and for the purpose of subtraction it is in the position 57, under the control of the appropriate function keys 4 (Fig 1). For the purpose of comparison, Fig 12 U illustrates an addition of 10 to 80 in sector II, as a part of rthe operation of adding 119 to 84 The sensing head slot 310 is connected over the amplifier 41 and the sector switch 22 and vertical contact line 152 and horizontal line 16 ' to the normal winding of the recording head 328, and the additional winding of the complementary recording head 321 As the change-over switch 55 is in position 56, only the normal windings are 'in circuit, as shown by the thickened line in Fig 12 a. On the other hand, subtraction is illustrated Example: 119 = 35 XIII XII XI X IX VIII VII VI V IV III II I 0 O O O O O O O 0 1 '1 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 11 5 1 O O O O 0 0 0 O O O 34 = _ 000 O O 00 3 1 _ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 5 The amplifier circuit E by means of which this procedure is carried out is shown in Fig. 21, and the above example of subtraction in all its phases is shown in

Figs 16 a-16 h. The Figs 7 a-12 b serving by way of explanation, give only sections of the tracks a-e used with single calculation procedures, and show them in extended form Fig 13 shows the components of the amplifier circuits A-E and especially the arrangement of their signal heads on a disc as a magnetizable carrier (being the disc 7 of Fig 5). 4 COMPUTING IN SUCCESSIVE PHASES. The following diagrammatic representations, Figs 14 a-16 h show, for a better understanding of the working procedure of the computing arrangement, the solution of a simple addition " 28 + 91 = 119 " and of a subtraction problem " 119 84 = 35," the operation being shown in its successive phases For clarity's sake only a three-place mechanism (sectors I-III as computing sectors and sector IV as a time-lag sector) is illustrated, and these sectors are imagined as having digital fields according to the decadic figure system (compare Fig 3). The sector IV of the computing signal carrier is an empty sector. In the Figs 14 a-16 h the stator is illustrated as a section of a circle which surrounds the computing signal carrier The surfaces corresponding to the rotor tracks are also characterized here as tracks, merely to show the relative positions of the signal heads in the stator. The marking of the sectors in the stator extends from zero in the running direction of the rotor, whilst the marking of the sectors in the rotor extends from zero in the opposite direction. The position of the zero line of the rotor is made clear in each figure by the extended radius line. a ADDITION Task: 28 + 91 = 119. The Figures 14 a-14 e show the phases of the first part problem, namely, the entering of the first summand " 028 " Phase of rotation in Fig 14 a. During the first rotation "zero-signals" will be recorded in the record means by the recording head in position VI a 19 The arrangement of the signal heads with regard to the single tracks and sectors of the stator has been made in full accordance with the diagram in Fig 6 b, to gain a better understanding (compare Fig 14-16 with Fig 6 b) Likewise the division of the drum in Fig 14-16 corresponds to the view of the disc in Fig 6 a. The signal generator for the zero-signal is e.g a permanent zero-signal within the " O " fields of track N of the signal carrier in association with a signal head (compare Fig 6 a) or a mechanical tooth or the like passing the core of coils shown in Fig 31 a, 31 d and 31 c (compare II, page 33) Such a zero-signal is shown s O 786,044 in Fig 14 a in field " O " on track a of sector I of the rotor It is indicated by a vertical dash As with all other

digit value signals of these Figs, the zero signal is indicated additionally inside the drum-circle by a numeral in the first part of sector I of the rotor. Furthermore in the full keyboard the key " 8 " of the unit column is pressed down and switched on (see above), so that the recordinghead 328 (the last denomination of the number " 28 " to be added) is prepared for action by the contact below the depressed key of this denomination, which has the effect that this head records a signal in track b at that instant at which it receives via the amplifier a signal from the sensing head 31 in position I a 9 The other recording heads 32 -327 and 329 I b 9-2 and I b 0 remain inactive, as they are not switched on or not prepared respectively. The indication that the signal-head " 8 " is prepared, is shown by the numeral " 8 " on the circumference of sector I of the stator in Fig 14 a. Phase of rotation in Fig 14 b. After a rotation of the drum by 10 fields it will arrive at the position shown in Fig 14 b. The signal " O " on track a has moved accordingly, being just below the sensing head, in position I a 9 of track a At this instant the already switched-on recording head I b 1 of the stator has become active via "amplifying circuit A" and at field " 8 " of track b of the drum a signal has been recorded, representing the sum of " O + 8 = 8 " (see Figs 8 a and 17 a, process ( 1), the computing process). In the meantime, another " O " signal had been introduced by the recording head 59 in position IV a 19 of the stator. Phase of rotation in Fig 14 c. On rotation through a further 20 fields the rotor will arrive at the position shown It is evident that the signals of both tracks a and b have moved accordingly While signal " O " of track a at this continued turn has not been used, the magnetic signal " 8 " of track b has induced a surge within the sensing head 33 in position I b 19 during the movement of the drum at the instant under the signal head (process 2, carry-over process). As the carry-over pre-mark switch (telegraphic or electronic relay) is in non-active position, because from the preceding sector no carry-over pre-mark signal had been forwarded, this surge after amplification has been led via amplifying circuit B to the recording heads 341 and 342 in positions I c/d 19 connected in parallel (compare Fig 10 a) Both signal heads have been active but only signal head 34 ' above track c had been able to record a signal in field " 8," because in the fields " O " to " 9 " of track d no recording of magnetic signals is possible, because within these fields no magnetizable layer on track d is provided.

Therefore signal " 8 " is transferred to track c with the same digit value. The sector I of the rotor holds a signal " O " on track a, on track b signal " 8," and on track c also a signal " 8 " Meanwhile the penultimate denomination of the keyboard has become active and has switched on the record 70 ing head in stator field I b 7, indicated by numeral " 2 " Signal " 0 " on track a of sector II of the drum has been moved on likewise. Phase of rotation in Fig 14 d. With a further rotation by 30 fields the " O " 75 signal on track a has been erased by passing under the erasing head 61 in position II a 19, consequently erasing the signals on track a of the rotor The signal " 8 " on track b has moved on without having become active again 80 The signal " 8 " on track c, on the contrary, has passed below the sensing head 36 in position II c 5 transferring the signal " 8 " with unchanged digit value after being amplified onto track e by the action of the recording 85 head 38 in position II e 5 (compare Fig 1 la, computing process ( 3) transfer process, if the sum is less than 10) The transfer process ( 4) of Fig 20 diminishing 10 if the sum exceeds 9, could not become active because no signal 90 was on track d when the respective field passed below sensing head 37 in position I d 35 As described in Fig 14 c the signal " 8 " has been transferred to track c and not to track d, because it is less than 10 95 On sector II of the drum, the " 0 " signal on track a has passed under sensing head 31. At the instant of passing the signal head generates a surge in its coil transferring it to the switched-on recording head 32 ' via the 100 amplifier By this means the signal causes a signal displacement by two fields, which means addition of " O + 2 = 2 " (compare Fig 8 b). Meanwhile on sector III of the rotor again a " O " signal has been recorded on track a 105 Phase of rotation in Fig 14 e. The rotor has now almost finished one " revolution " On sector I of the rotor the signals " 8 " on track b and c have been erased by erasing heads 62, 63 in positions II b/c 110 19 The signal " 8 " of track e meanwhile has passed under the sensing head 58 in position IV e 29 and has transferred this signal with the same digit value " 8 " to track a, because the excited pre-mark switch for the 115 " fugitive one " had not been excited The signal " 8 " on track " e " is still existing. On sector II meanwhile, the signal " 2 " according to process ( 2) has been transferred onto track c with the same digit value because 120 the gas discharge tube 52 of the pre-mark switch 47 has not been excited by a carry-over pre-mark signal and because the recording head 342 in position I d 19 of track d cannot become active at digit values

less than 10 in con 125 sequence of the fact that the fields of this track are not magnetizable This signal " 2 " has moved during the further rotation under the sensing head 36 (I c 5 process ( 3) which has transferred this signal with the same digit value 130 786,044 board according to the number " 91," and in process ( 1) according to Fig 9 b a displacement of digit value signals takes place by " 9 " fields Therefore on track b of the sector II of the rotor the signal " 11 " will be recorded being the signal of the sum. In sector III of the drum a signal " O " still remains on track e. Phase of rotation in Fig 15 c. In sector I the original signal " 8 " on track a and the signals " 9 " on the tracks b and c have been erased by the erasing heads 61-63 after the signal " 9 " has previously been transferred from track c to the track e with the same digit value at the running under the sensing head of track c (compare Fig 1 la). In sector II the original signal " 2 " on track a has moved on without having been active again On track b the signal " 11 " has almost reached the sensing head of the track b according to process ( 2) of Fig 10 b. In sector III, the " O " signal has moved on without having been active. Phase of rotation in Fig 15 d. In sector I the signal " 9 " has moved on in track e The signals on the tracks b and c are erased. In sector II the signals " 2 " on track a and " 11 " on track b have moved on, without having been active When signal " 11 " passes under the sensing head of track b, this signal " 11 " is transferred to track d instead of track c and is recorded there with the same digit value This digit value remains unchanged, for the gas discharge tube 52 of the carry-over pre-mark switch had not been excited in the preceding denomination The transfer takes place only to track d because track c has no magnetizable layer at these fields (fields 10 to 19) in contrary to track d which is magnetizable in these fields, whereas track d is not magnetizable in fields 0 to 9 (compare the blackened fields on the figure) At the further rotation the signal " 1 " is passed in track d below the sensing head 37 Hereby process ( 4) became effective As this digit value exceeds 9 a change of signal position takes place by fields, effecting the diminishing by 10 (compare Fig 1 ib, the transfer from sensing head 37 in position I d 35 to recording head 38 in position II e 5) The recording on track e is performed as a signal " 1 " The discharge tube 52 is excited by the premark signal for the forwarding of a carry-over from amplifier 51 (see hatching of the discharge-tube 52 in Figs 15 d, 15 e) By exciting

the telegraphic or electronic pre-mark switch 47 (Figs 10) of process ( 2) at the next process ( 2) the transfer of the magnetic signal in track b to track c or d will take place from sensing head 33 in position I b 19 to the recording heads 35 ' and 352 in positions I c/d 18, thus effecting the tens carry-over. In sector III meanwhile the " O " signal has been recorded by process ( 1) likewise as " 0," onto track e In the further course of the rotation the signal " O " on track a and the signals " 2 " in tracks b and c have been erased by the erasing heads 61, 62 and 63 (II a-c 19), and the signal " 2 " on track e has been moved on. On sector III the " O " signal has been transferred without change to track e by the processes ( 1), ( 2), ( 3), according to Figs 8 c, 10 c, 1 lc, because " 0 + 0 = O " The transfer of the " O " may also be suppressed if the " 0 "contact is held inoperative during process ( 1). In this case, no signal will be transferred from track a to track b in sector III and the signal " O " will be eliminated by the erasing head 61 of track a before becoming active As shown in Fig 14 e the sum of " O + 28 = 28 " has been recorded on track e. Task: 28 + 91 = 119 (Figs 15 a-e and 16 a). As described in Fig 14 a the signals for " 028 " are recorded on the rotor as on track a and also on track e sector I the signal " 8 " is recorded and in sector II at this instant the signal " 2 " only is on track e. Phase of rotation in Fig 15 a. The last denomination of the new figure " 91," viz, the " 1 " has been prepared for the input by the pressing down of keys in the keyboard. In sector I track a of the rotor the signal " 8 " is under the sensing head 31 of track a (I a 9, compare Fig 9 a, process ( 1) As only the recording head 32 ' (I b 8) is switched on, indicated by numeral 1, the signal, while transferred to track b will be displaced by one field and recorded as " 9," i e, as the sum of " 8 + 1 = 9 " In sector II the signal " 2 " and in sector III the signal " O " have been moved on. Phase of rotation in Fig 15 b. In sector I of the drum the original signal " 8 " on track a has advanced without having been active again The signal " 9 " on track b has in the meantime moved under the sensing head 33 of the track b (I b 19 according to process ( 2) and in the course of this, the signal " 9 " has been recorded on track C in the manner described, because the gas discharge tube 52 of the carry-over pre-mark switch had not been excited in the preceding denomination (therefore the same digit value), and because there is no magnetizable medium on track d in the fields for digit values less than 10 (compare Fig 10 a).

The sensing head 37 on track d which performs the diminishing of " 10 " at digit values above 9 and also causes the carry-over to the next denomination, has not become active, as no signal has been recorded on track d. In sector II meanwhile the signal " 2 " on track a has been moved under the sensing head of this track, actuating the computing process ( 1) of Fig 9 b The recording head in position I b 0 is switched on by pressing down the key " 9 " in the penultimate column of the key786,044 so that the " O "-signals are recorded in the tracks a and b. Phase of rotation in Fig 15 e. In sector I the signal " 9 " on track e has moved on, without having been active in the meantime. In sector II the original signal " 2 " on track a has been erased, as well as the signals " 11 " on tracks b and d On track e the signal " 1 " 1 o has moved on without having been active. In sector III the original signal " O " on track a has also moved on without having been active again The signal " O " on track b, however, has passed under the sensing head on track b. At the transfer process ( 2) according to Fig. c, which performs the carry-over from the preceding denomination, signal " O " of the track b has been transferred by the sensing head 33 in position I b 19, via the amplifier, to the recording heads 35 ', 352 in position I c/d 18, as the pre-mark switch 47 (see above) has been switched over By this however only the recording on track c could be effective, as described repeatedly above In the rotationphase of this figure there are, therefore, " O "signals on track a and on track b, whereas on track d the signal " 1 " is recorded. Phase of rotation in Fig 16 a. The rotor meanwhile has finished its rotation and has returned to its zero-position. In sector I according to Fig 21 a the signal " 9 " has been transferred by the process 5 with the same digit value via amplifier-circuit E from track e to track a Therefore this signal is recorded on both tracks e and a. In sector II the signal " 1 " has moved on without having been active. In sector III the signal "I" on track c has been transferred to track e by process ( 3) via amplifier circuit C according to Fig llc The signals " O " on tracks a and b and signal " 1 " on track c have been erased by the erasing heads 61, 62 and 63 of this track The discharge tube 52 has meanwhile been extinguished by a signal which is generated by permanent signals, e g by the zero-signals of the track n, provided in the " O "-position of each sector The signals are generated by a special sensing head at the same time with the O passing of the field

20 under sensing head 33 and will be active if the discharge tube 52 has been ignited Herewith the addition process of the second number has been finished during one rotation of the rotor. SS b SUBTRACTION. Task: " 119-84 _ 35 " The detailed description of the subtraction process is started by the switching on of the last denomination of the subtrahend ( 84), that is -4, within the keyboard 1 and actuating the subtraction key (Figs 16 a-h). The final phase according to Fig 16 a is in this case at the same time the initial phase of the subtraction. Phase of rotation in Fig 16 b. In sector I the signal " 9 " on track a has moved under the sensing head 31 in stator field I a 9 for process ( 1) according to Fig. 17 a Thereby a surge has been induced in the sensing head, which after amplification is con 70 ducted to the switched on secondary winding of the recording head 32 of the complementary digit value of " 4 " in stator field I a 4, which records the new result as signal " 14 " on track b 75 In the sectors II and III there are the signals " 1 " still on track e of each of the sectors. Phase of rotation in Fig 16 c. With further rotation the original signal 80 " 9 " in track a of sector I has moved on without having been active in the meantime The signal " 14," however, has been transferred by process ( 2) according to Fig 18 a from track b with the same digit value to track d, because 85 no carry-over pre-mark signal has been released by the preceding denomination and the summand exceeds the value " 9 " In sector II meanwhile the signal " 1 " is transferred by process ( 5) according to Fig 90 21 a from track e to track a, and on track e this signal is erased by the erasing head 65. In sector III the signal " 1 " remains on track e. Phase of rotation in Fig 16 d 95 In sector I the original signal " 9 " is stillon track a The signal " 14 " in track b has moved on without having been active again. On track d the signal " 14 " has passed below the sensing head 37 of this track whereby a 100 transfer to track e has been performed, effecting the diminishing by 10 by a displacement of 10 fields from sensing head 37 in position I d 35 to recording head 38 in position II e 5 within the stator The signal " 14 " of track d 105 consequently has now been recorded on track e as a signal " 4 " In this phase the discharge tube 52 has been excited (see above, rotation phase of Fig 15 d). In sector II the original signal " 1 " has 110 passed below the sensing head 31 of track a. At this instant the transfer to track b has been performed according

to process ( 1) of Fig 12 b with the complementary digit value of " 8 " by the switched on secondary winding of the 115 recording head 32 ' in stator field I b 8 This is equivalent to an additive signal displacement of the value " 1 " by the primary winding On the track b therefore the signal " 2 " is recorded 120 Within the sector III meanwhile the signal " 1 " has moved on without having become active. Phase of rotation in Fig 16 e. During the further rotation the original 125 signal 9 on track a and the signals " 4 on tracks b and d have been erased by their erasing heads 61, 62 and 64 The signal " 4 " on track e remains. The original signal " 1 " on track a of sector 130 786,044 conducted from the sensing head 58 to the recording head 60 in position IV a 18 by process ( 5), being amplified and transferred from track e to track a By this step a displacement by "one" in additional direction has been performed (digit value carry-over of the "fugitive one") Consequently the signal " 4 " of track e has been recorded on track a, now as signal " 5 " The signal " 3 " on track c has moved on, having been unchanged and been inactive. In sector III the signals " 10 " on tracks b and d have been erased and the signal " O " only remains on track e Herewith the subtraction procedure 119-84 = 35 has been terminated. C SUBTRACTION BELOW ZERO At subtractions below zero there is in contrast to the subtraction with results higher than zero no addition of the "fugitive one" required, because no "passing through" carryover in all the denominations occurs as with the complementary adding In this case the complementary digit " 9 " remains in the first denomination. V THE ELECTRIC SWITCHING MEANS FOR THE DIFFERENT COMPUTING PROCESSES The electric switching means are designed as structure units likewise as the mechanical parts which are described above, whereby the designed units can be combined with each other ad libitum. These electric switching means are shown in Fig 13 by the generally used symbols This Fig shows also the co-ordination of these electric switching means to the different signal heads within the stator The switching diagrams of the amplifiers, electric switches, etc, are shown in detail in Fig 17 and 17 sequ. The design of the machine may be simplified by using the same means for different processes, whereas in these Figs separate switching means are shown for every process in order to facilitate the description and their understanding. As switching means are electronic tubes, discharge tubes and so on, preferably used with the usual circuit elements like resistances, capacitors, transformers, etc.

The machine according to the invention is operating without any quantitative measuring and is therefore independent of the characteristics of tubes, special voltages and the like and is as a pure Yes-No process (black and white method), extremely reliable. For a better understanding there will now be described electrical switching means for the different processes involved in a computing operation, namely: 1 Digit value processing means; 2-5 Carry-over means; 2 Separating and forwarding means; 3 Undiminished transfer; 4 Diminishing means; Carry-over of Fugitive " 1 " II has moved on without having been active again The signal " 2 " on track b has passed under the sensing head 33 of this track and is transferred by it to track c as a signal " 3 " by process ( 2) according to Fig 18 a This signal is now recorded there, because the discharge tube 52 has been excited (see phase of rotation in Fig 16 e) and the value " 3 " is below 10. The signal " 1 " of sector III has been transferred from track e to track a by process ( 5) and on track e this signal has been erased. The secondary winding of the recording head in position I b O is switched on, indicated by the numeral 9 at the circumference of the stator. Phase of rotation in Fig 16 f. The signal '4 " on track e of sector I has moved on without having been active. The signal " 3 " of track c sector II has been transferred to track e with the same digit value by process ( 3) of Fig 19 a All the signals " 1,". " 2," " 3 " on tracks a, b, c have been erased. In sector III the signal " 1 " on track a has passed under the sensing head of this track. In this way it has induced a surge, which has been conducted to the secondary winding of the recording head " 9 " in stator field I b 0 via amplifier 41 This signifies the addition of " 9 " or the subtraction of " O " respectively. Consequently the signal " 10 " has been recorded on track b by process ( 1) When passing under the sensing head 33 of this track, the signal " 10 " is transferred to track d with the same digit value by process ( 2), because no carryover pre-mark signal has occurred influencing the relay, which therefore remains in the original position. Phase of rotation in Fig 16 g. On track e in each of the sectors I and II meanwhile the signals " 3 " and " 4 " have moved on without having been active. In sector III the original signal " 1 " on track a has been erased The signal " 10 " on track b moved on without having been active again The signal " 10 " on track d however has passed under the sensing head 37

of the track d, transferring by process ( 4) the signal " 10 " from track d and diminishing it to a signal " 0 " At this instant, the discharge relay 52 has been ignited by the same signal, preparing a ten's carry-over into the next denomination It is necessary to provide suitable means (compare Fig 26, reference numbers 156, 112, 148, 149) in case of a transfer of a carry-over from the last sector, i e, sector III in the example illustrated, to sector I, to secure the action of the control-relay in process ( 5) by exciting the corresponding discharge relay tube 147 (compare Fig 26 and in Fig. 16 g the hatched discharge tubes 52 and 147). Phase of rotation in Fig 16 h. The signal " 4 " on track e sector I has meanwhile passed under the sensing head 58 in position IV e 19 As the relay 147 has been switched on before, this signal has been 786,044 1878,4 1 DIGIT VALUE PROCESSING MEANS FOR PROCESS 1 IN AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT A. The processing means, which are in principle described above (the Figs 7-9 and 12) effect the transfer of a signal from track a to track b In Fig 17 a the arrangement is shown by means of symbols The transfer of signals from track a by the sensing head 31 in stator field I a 9 to one of the recording heads 32 in stator fields 1 b 9-0 effects the change of the position or displacement of the computing signals for digit values This transfer is effected via a low frequency amplifier 41 to compensate for the losses of the airslot, of the leakage field and magnetizing losses, etc, at the transfer and via the digit value switches (and denomination switches 54 -9). In Fig 17 b the contacts of the horizontal contact rows 16 -, which are arranged below the keys of the full keyboard 1, correspond to the above-mentioned switches 54 The contacts are made effective beginning from the last denomination successively by the sector switch 22 with the single distributor contacts 391 to 39 ' In the example shown the number 028 is pressed down Within the keyboard in similar manner with reference to Figs 8 a-c. At the full keyboard the distributing contacts 391 are connected with the vertical denomination contacts 151-15 ' (compare also Fig 8 and 9). When using a tens keyboard provision is made whereby either the keys operate a full contact board stepwisely denomination by denomination or the denomination switches are provided indicating within which denomination each depressed key is to operate. The denomination switches (sector switches) can be as the Figs 17 b to 17 g show, electromechanical, or electronic distributing switches. Electronic switches for instance can be discharge tubes, which are switched on successively according to the relative position of the rotor to the stator.

On the other hand there can be used switches which are practically without inertia directly as the digit value switches 54 -549, for instance by means of a tens keyboard or the like, wherein the digit value signals are not switched directly, but are first recorded for instance in a magnetic storage or record means The way of this process is in principle explained in Fig. 17 h For the understanding of the digit value processing at higher speeds it is sufficient to know that the unit is provided with a practically inertia-less control device, which makes effective those digit values for the different denominations which are recorded in the corresponding sectors I, II, III, etc. a AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT BY CONTACT SWITCHING The operation of the amplifier circuit by contact switching and full keyboard is as follows: The sensing head 31 in stator field I a 9 (corresponding to the stator diagram of the Fig 6 a) is connected according to Fig 17 b with the control grid and the cathode resistance of the pentode 67 of the amplifier 41. The voltage surge, which is generated within 70 the sensing head 31 by the passing magnetic signal, is made effective after its amplification via a coupling capacitor 69 at the control grid of the discharge tube 68 The capacitor 70 is loaded via the resistance 71, so that its voltage 75 is only a little below the ignition voltage of the discharge tube 68, as the discharge tube is biassed by means of the resistance 72 Due to the high resistance 71, only a single discharge occurs within each sector 80 A signal, coming from the sensing head 31 and amplified by the pentode 67 effects the ignition of the discharge tube 68 and subsequently the discharge of the capacitor The current surge resulting from the 85 discharge of the capacitor 70 is conveyed to one of the recording heads (Fig 17 b recording head 32 ' in stator field I b 1) via the contact below the pressed down key " 8 " of the keyboard 1 which connects the 90 vertical row 151 with the horizontal row 16 ', via the contact 391 of the sector switch, wiping contact 42 in sector I position and central contact 40 of the sector switch 22 The bias is preferably stabilized by an electronic 95 stabilizer (not shown) In case of a transfer process according to Fig 8 a the magnetic signal " 8 " is recorded by the discharge tube 68 via the recording head 32 ' 'in stator field I b 1 at the instant, when the magnetic signal 100 in field 0 sector I track a of the rotor passes the slot of the sensing head 31 and in track b the field 8 passes the slot of the recording head 32 S in stator field I b 1, whereby this recording head is switched on by the pressed 105 down co-ordinated key of the last denomination on the keyboard By this means the magnetic signal " 8 " is recorded as the

resulting signal of the addition of the "zero-signal" plus " 8 " on track b ( 0 + 8 = 8) 110 In order to ensure that the signals receive a defined position within track b, which is independent of the exactness of the position of the signals sensed within track a, at the transfer from track a to track b an electronic 115 "registering" is provided This registering effects the recording of the resulting signals at defined fields regardless of little inaccuracies which may occur in a longer row of additions. In this case the electronic registering records 120 the result according to computing process The amplifier circuit A which is co-ordinated to this process is also designed for a higher counting speed by the arrangement of reliable electronic means 125 Fig 17 c shows this modification of the switching diagram of this amplifier circuit It effects by means of an additional registering circuit, that during one computing period at the transfer from track a to track b the signals 130 786,044 786,044 19 for the results are recorded at defined fields by signal switching control means, which are operating either with photo-sensing or an inductive signal generator. In this Fig the sensing head 31 is connected with the control grid and the basic point of the cathode resistance of the amplifier tube 74. Photo-cell '79 makes it possible to take from punch cards the computing signals in a photoelectric way (compare photo-electric sensing at the bottom of Fig 40) Voltage signals occurring in the sensing head 31 in stator field I a 9 cause the pre-amplifier pentode 74 to ignite the pre-relay discharge tube 73 via the coupling capacitor 75 and open hereby the pentode 67, which then receives the required screen grid voltage as a voltage drop at the resistance 77 in the discharge circuit of the discharge tube 73 on discharge of the capacitor 86. The opened pentode 67 is the amplifier tube for the signal markings (magnetic or optic on the signal carrier), whereby in case of magnetic markings the sensing is effected by the sensing head 76 in stator field XII Im 19 or in case of optic markings by photocell 78. Hereby either the sensing head 76 is excited by magnetic signals within track m or the photocell 78 is excited by corresponding optical markings Both means, signal head as well as photocell, effect in the same way, via the pentode 67 the discharge of capacitor 70 via the discharge tube 68 This discharge will become effective by that recording head, which is switched on by its co-ordinated digit value switch 54 (see Fig 17 b) and hereby effects the recording of signals on track b displaced according to the computing process 1 ("processing'"). 40) As the amplifier circuit A of the calculator can operate with digit values, introduced by different input and control means, for

instance, manually by keyboards (full or ten's keyboard) but also by means of punched cards, optic or magnetic tapes or the like, this amplifier circuit will be adanted to these different input and control means, according to the different functions required in the computing, that is to say, the input of the figures, of the signals "addition," "subtraction," etc, and the number of the computor which is to operate Other examples of the design of this amplifier circuit A are shown for the control of punched cards and tapes separately. b AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT A BY ELECTRONIC SWITCHING. In Figs 17 d and e are shown as modifications of the sector switch 22 (compare Figs. 8, 9, 12 and 17 b), designed as a contact distributor, a rotating magnetic yoke as an inductively effective signal distributing arm Such a signal distributor armn will be preferably used at speeds, at which contact distributors like the sector switch 22 are unreliable The signal distributing arm 80 is fixed on shaft 18 (compare Fig 2) in a position defined by kev 84. Fig 17 f shows the distributing arm in a stator 85. In the stator, primary coils 81 '- and secondary coils 821-13, magnetically connected 70 at one side as pairs, by the stationary yokes 83 are arranged If the primary coils are connected electrically in series, as it shall be presumed for the cause of simplification and if during the rotating of the rotor these primary 75 coils are constantly energized, f i direct current, the secondary coils, by the passage of the distributor arm 80, receives voltage surges. These voltage surges are generated within those secondary coils which are co-ordinated 80 to the corresponding sector, for instance, the secondary coil 82 ' for sector I, the secondary coil 82 ' for sector II, the secondary coil 82 ' for sector III and so on by an inductive effect at the changing or cutting of the magnetic 85 field by the distributor arm and therefore the changing of the magnetic resistance between coils 81 and 82. In total the stator contains 13 pairs of primary and secondary coils, whereby each 90 sector of the signal carrier 7 has a co-ordinated pair of these coils. The signal distributor arm 80 connects magnetically in turn the primary coil with the secondary coil of each pair of coils and the 95 connection is effected at the beginning of each sector During the lime of the passing of the signal distributor arm 80 over a pair of coils this forms an amplified coupling and therefore a lower resistance via the signal distributing 100 arm 80 and the closed magnetic circuit acts as a transformer. Fig 17 g shows the wiring of the amplifier circuit A with electronic denomination or sector switches operated inductively by the 105 signal

distributor arm. In detail (like in Fig 17 c) the pentode 74 of amplifier circuit A amplifies the signals sensed in the signal head 31 in stator field I a 9 The amplified signals are led via the 110 coupling capacitor 75 to the discharge tube 73 and effects its ignition to discharge capacitor 86 The screen grid voltage of pentode 67 is effected by a voltage drop at resistance 77. The electronic registering is effected by 115 means of the permanent signals in track m, whereby the signals are sensed from the signal carrier by means of sensing heads 76 As an alternative there can also be used a photocell 78 for sensing optically marked permanent 120 signals in a track corresponding to track in but in an optical way After the amplification by the pentode 67 they effect the ignition of the discharge tube 68. The recording heads 32 9 in stator fields 125 I b 9-0 are not directly connected with the discharge circuit of the discharge tube 68 as in Fig 17 c via a contact sector switch 22. The discharge tube 68 controls only the recording via the pentode 87 and the discharge 130 786,044 distributor tubes 88, of which there is provided one for each denomination of the full keyboard 1 Such discharge distributor tubes 8818 operate together with the contact rows 151-15 ' Only at the ignition of one of these distributing tubes 88 I-888 the full keyboard will be effective in that vertical denomination row which is co-ordinated with the ignited tube. Therefore all the discharge tubes 881-888 have a defined voltage drop between anode and cathode, which is below the ignition voltage (it is to be preferred to stabilize the voltage by the stabiliser 89) The control grids of the discharge tubes 88 W-88 ' are adjusted negatively compared to the cathode by means of the voltage division between resistance and secondary coil 82 of the respective discharge. This voltage drop (low ohmic coil) has such a dimension that at the ignition of one of the discharge tubes 88 I-888 the voltage at all the other discharge tubes is decreasing almost to the arc-voltage, so that ignitions of other discharge tubes 88 W-88 ' of this circuit is prevented. Before the "zero"-position of a sector is reached during the rotation of the signal carrier and indicating disc 7 the discharge tube which corresponds to this particular must be ignited. If for instance for the purpose of a repeated addition (multiplication) controlled by the full keyboard 1, the digit values, being indicated by pressing down the respective keys, are to be effective successively denomination by denomination with great denomination-computing speeds, this is preferably done as follows: The keys of the keyboard 1 remain untouched, after they have been nressed

down. The last denomination row of the keyboard (in which in the shown example key " 8 " is pressed down) will be made effective by the ignition of discharge tube 82 ' of the inductive distributor (compare Figs 17 d-f), so that the recording head 328 in stator fields I b 1 via discharge tube 881 and the contact below the key " 8 " (of the last denomination) is switched on by the ignition with a low current This current is not sufficient to effect the recording of a signal, but it maintains the discharge as an electronic preparation for its effectiveness. Immediately after the sensing head 31 has been excited in stator field I a 9 (see above), the capacitor 70 is discharged by the registering signals via the discharge tube 68 and resistance 90. The voltage drop, which is effected at resistance 90 "opens" the pentode 87 and effects a strong current surge in its plate circuit. The discharge tube 881, which is ignited, tries to keep its arc-voltage despite the enlarged current of the pentode 87, and therefore a voltage surge in the switched-on recording head 328 in stator field I b 1 (pressed down key " 8 " of the last denomination of the keyboard) is effected, which in turn effects the recording of the resulting digit value signal. By means of pentode 91 and discharge tube 92 the extinction of the discharge tubes 881 70 888 is precisely controlled at the end of the passing of each sector For this purpose there is sensed either a permanent magnetic signal by a signal head or, as a variation, a permanent optic signal sensed by a photocell is used as 75 an extinguishing signal This signal, which is preferably the permanent "zero"-signal in each sector in track n, is sensed by the sensing head 93 and effects an ignition of discharge tube 92 via a coupling capacitor By the resistance 80 94, the cathode of pentode 87 will be for a short time strongly positive compared with the voltage on the control grid Thus pentode 87 will be closed for a short while and the ignited discharge tube 88 ' will be extinguished by the 85 blocking of the plate current. According to the position of switch 121 an output of figures can be effected by a visual indicating unit (stroboscopic flash-tube 150) or by a distributor 23 a 90 Instead of electronic denomination switches (Fig 17 g) electronic digit value switch can also be used for the whole switching process. This process is shown in principle in Fig. 17 h Here we see again the full keyboard 1, 95 where the keys indicating number " 28 " are pressed down in the last two denominations. The contacts of the full keyboard are connected via the contact rows

16 9 with the corresponding electronic digit value switches 100 -, which are to operate successively The switching on of these digit value switches is effected denomination by denomination beginning with the last denomination, which is marked in Fig 17 h as vertical row 151 in the 105 full keyboard 1 The successive operation in the different denomination I, II, III, etc of the full keyboard is effected by contacts, for instance by pressed down keys, in such a way, that an inductive sector switch (Figs 17 d 110 17 f) is used, whereby its secondary coils 8218 receive a voltage surge by the rotating inductive yoke 80, beginning successively at the right hand coil 821 at the beginning of each sector Thus this process operates denomina 115 tion-wise. The secondary coil 82 ' of the sector switch will be effective via the vertical contact row ' within sector I, the secondary coil 822 will be effective via the vertical contact row 120 152 in sector II, the secondary coil 82 ' via the vertical contact row 15 ' of the full keyboard in sector III etc. If this inductive sector switch, according to Figs 17 d-f, creates by the mechanical move 125 ment of its inductive signal distributor arm (rotating yoke) an impulse as voltage surge, via the vertical contact row 151 in sector I, that is to say in that circuit, which is coordinated to the last denomination, then auto 130 786,044 synchronized mechanically or by means of synchronization signals, for instance startstop-signals, so that the digit value signals of the input means can control the electronic digit value switches 95/96 correspondingly 70 As soon as the magnetic yoke 80 of the inductive distributor (compare Figs 17 d-f) cuts for instance the magnetic field of the coil 822 of the vertical contact row 152 at the beginning of sector II, a voltage surge is automatically 75 delivered via the contact " 2," to the control grid of the gas tube 952, which is part of the digit value switch 95/96 ', and this digit value switch will be closed for the time length of processing within the penultimate denomina 80 tion Hereby the displacement by two digit value fields of those digit value signals will be effected, which are in that sector coordinated to the penultimate denomination of the number 85 After the termination of the processing within the penultimate denomination the switched on digit value switch will be automatically switched off by the extinction of the digit value tube and all the digit value switches 90 are ready for a new operation. Within the third last denomination by means of the secondary coil 82 ' and the vertical contact row 15 ' in sector III in the example, there will be effective a rest current signal 95 "O" by the rest contact " O " of the full keyboard 1, because no other signal is pressed down within this denomination In the remaining denominations the digit

value switches 95 -96 are operated in similar manner 100 By this means the digit value signal displacement will be effective successively on the signal carrier in the different denomination areas (sectors) of the computing signal carrier. As soon as the first denomination of the 105 number in the Fig the eighth denomination to be processed has been recorded, then if instead of a simple addition a multiplication is to be effected by repeated addition, the computing process can be again begun at the last 110 denomination of the number, whereby a larger number of areas or sectors can be provided than the numbers to be processed have denominations, for instance preferably 16 denominations, so that the signal carrier con 115 tains 16 areas for digit values or 16 sectors. THE DIGIT VALUE CARRY-OVER MEANS FOR COMPUTING PROCESS 2-5 IN THE AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS B-E. The digit value carry-over means comprise: 120 amplifier circuit B for the computing process 2 a, the separating means, which distinguish between resulting digit values of the computing process 1 below or equal to and those above a limiting value, and they comprise for the 125 computing process 2 b the forwarding means, which effects the carry-over forwarding into the next denomination by a displacement of the resulting digit value within the said denomination by " 1 " These carry-over means 130 matically one of the digit value switches will be effective within this number, and is marked by the pressed down contact of the full keyboard or by an equivalent sensing device as S input means. Within the full keyboard 1, shown in Fig. 17 h, the digit value " 8 " is within the last denomination. When the inductive distributor arm 80 generates a voltage surge within secondary coil 821 the digit value switch 95 W-96 ' is excited in the shown example via the vertical contact row 151 and the horizontal contact row 16 ' The digit value switch 958/968, which is co-ordinated to the digit value " 8 " is "closed" for the time length of one denomination, that is during the passing of one sector The signal of the voltage surge "closes" this preferably inertia-less switch and the computing process 29 is effected by the digit value processing means of the amplifier circuit A because of the switched on digit value switch By this electronic switch (discharge switch) only pentode 968 will be effective The recording head 328 in the plate circuit of pentode 96 ' will receive the signals, which are to be recorded, as this recording head 32 ' is co-ordinated to the pentode 96 '. In 'Fig 17 h digit value switches comprise the combination of a gas discharge tube 95 -9 with the co-ordinated pentode 96 ' The pentodes lead digit value signals only to that one of the recording heads 32 '-32 ', the coordinated gas discharge tube of which is ignited, as the

screen grids of the pentodesreceive in this example its voltage by the voltage drop at the resistances 97 ' , which are connected into the main discharge circuits of the gas tubes. After the computing process, for instance the addition process, is terminated under the influence of a switched-on digit value switch 95/96 within one sector, the digit value switch is automatically returned to its ineffec< 5 tive position by the extinction of the ignited gas tube by a control signal, which is delivered to all the tubes 96 " at the end of each sector. After resetting all the digit value switches into the ineffective position, these electronic switches are again prepared for new action within the second digit, that is within penultimate denomination, which is to be processed. Within this penultimate digit the digit value " 2 " is marked within the full keyboard 1 by pressing down the required key of this full keyboard and thereby closing the corresponding contacts. The contact input by pressing down keys can be replaced by equivalent contact means, for instance controlled by punched cards, punched tapes, or other equivalent means, for example magnetic tapes or the like, as input means In this case the denomination or digit value-distributor as a contact distributor, inductive or electronic distributor or the like 786,044 are effective at a signal transfer from track b to track c or d. in amplifier circuit B means for an unchanged signal transfer from track c to track e for the computing process 3; in amplifier circuit D diminishing means for the diminishing of the resulting digit values within the same denomination and means for the forwarding of pre-mark signals to the next denomination for the computing process 4 at the signal transfer from track d to track e; and in amplifier circuit E means for retransfer of signals from track e to track a and for taking regard of the "fugitive one" in the computing process 5. 2 THE SEPARATING AND FORWARDING MEANS FOR COMPUTING PROCESS 2 IN AMPLIFYING CIRCUIT B. The arrangement is shown by symbols in Fig 18 a The transfer of digit value signals is, as already described in Figs 10 a-10 c, effective from track b by means of sensing head 33 in stator field I b 19 to track c or d via the recording head pairs 341 and 342, in stator fields 1 c and d 19 or 35 ' and 352 in stator fields I c and d 18 connected in parallel, whereby at any time only one of these recording heads can be effective within one of the tracks c or d, as at any time there is only in one of these tracks a possibility for magnetizing In track c only signals for digit values smaller than 10 can be recorded and in track d only signals for digit values which exceed " 9 " can be recorded By such an arrangement the separating is effected, dependent on whether the respective sum of

digit values of this sector is within the limit digit value " 9 " or whether it exceeds it. The digit value signals recorded on track d are transferred by process 4 to effect the diminishing and the forwarding of pre-mark signals into the next denomination The digit value signals recorded in track c, are transferred by process 3 without any further change of value. If at the preceding denomination the gas discharge tube 52 of the pre-mark switch has been ignited in process 4 by a pre-mark signal ( for a necessary carry-over forwarding into the next denomination, then the signal transfer from track b to track c or d is effected via sensing head 33 in stator field I b 19 to the pair of recording heads 351 and 352 in stator field I c and d 18. The ignition of the tube 52 operates switch 47 and therefore the signal is displaced by one field and recorded on track c or d by recording head 351 or 352 thus effecting the forwarding of the carry-over by changing the digit value by "one " The transfer is effected via the amplifier 44 and via one of the two switching ways of the carry-over pre-mark switch 47 (symbolically shown as an electromechanical relay 47), whereby in the resting position of this relay (if no carry-over forwarding was to be effected) in its switching position 48, the signals are lead to the pair of recording heads 34 ' and 342 of the tracks c and d in the digit valuei 70 fields 19, and in the operation switching position 49 (if a carry-over forwarding has to be effected) supplied to the pair of recording heads 351 and 352 in the digit value fields 18 of the tracks c and d 75 At speeds which are higher than 200 denomination additions per second (as in Fig. 18 b) electronic relays instead of telegraphic relays are to be preferred, which can be designed for instance with a wiring diagram 80 according to Fig 18 c and d or with a wiring diagram corresponding in its effect Such electronic relays operate practically without inertia and can operate very reliably even at high speeds, for instance 50,000 denomination 85 additions per second etc As these electronic relays are very simple and require no service, their use is to be recommended also at lower speeds than 200 per second. As the electronic relay operates with two 90 pentodes or the like and one gas discharge tube according to Fig 18 c, they effect at the same time the amplification in the required degree, and a separate amplifier can be omitted 95 a AMPLIFYING CIRCUIT B BY CONTACT SWITCHING Fig 18 b shows the amplifying circuit B which effects the transfer from track b to track c and d with an electro-mechanic (telegraphic) 100 relay The sensing head 33 above the track b in stator field I b 19 is connected via the amplifier 44 and the carry-over pre-mark switch 47 with one of the groups of the recording

heads 341 and 342 or 35 ' and 35 '105 connected in series or respectively in parallel. In the resting position 48 of the carry-over pre-mark switch 47 both recording heads 341 and 34 ' will be effective in the stator field I c and d 19, whereas after a switching over of 110 the carry-over pre-mark switch 47 to switching way 49, both recording heads 351 and 352 in the stator field I c and d 18 are switched on, whereby a digit value signal displacement is effected by one field and thus a carry-over 115 forwarding from the preceding denomination by a change of the digit value by " 1 " At the transfer to track c or d respectively the signals, which have resulted from the counting process 1 are separated according to whether the 120 resulting digit value is equal or lower than the limit digit value or whether it exceeds it, whereby there is taken regard already of carryover forwarding by one from the preceding denomination 12 Signals with a digit value which does not exceed the limit digit value (in the example " 9 " according to a decadic number-system) and which are recorded in the rotor fields 0-9, are recorded in track c, as track d has 130 786,044 consequence of it and contrary to the preceding state, the pentode 101 is now opened, and the pentode 100 is closed. Both groups of recording heads are connected into the plate circuits of the pentodes 70 and 101, whereby the groups of signal heads becoming effective are selected by the switching condition of the gas discharge tube. The effecting of a carry-over forwarding into the next denomination (next sector) depends 75 therefore on whether the discharge tube 52 is ignited or not The extinguishing of the discharge tube 52 is shown in Fig 18 c by means of the discharging of the capacitor 104 An extinguishing can also be effected in a different 80 timing instant by the known means of breaking down the plate circuit The description of the amplifier circuit A in Fig '17 g shows an electronic solution for it The pentode is not required if two discharge tubes are directly 85 coupled. A further modification of the design accordto Fig 18 d shows an electronic relay, two coupled electronic tubes 'instead of the use of gas discharge tubes The signals which are 90 induced in Fig 18 d in the sensing head 33 are in this case amplified as usual by the pentode 98 of the amplifier 44 and hexodes 105, 106, the control grids of which are connected in parallel via the capacitors 107, 108 95 In the plate circuit of the hexode 106 are the recording heads 351 and 35 ' of the positions I c and d 18 and in the plate circuit of the hexode 105 are the recording heads 34 ' and 342 in the positions I c and d 19 100 If a current flows within the hexode 105, the cathode resistance

109 of the hexode 105 supplies the negative bias of suppressor grid of the hexode 106 Alternatively, if there is a current in the hexode 106, the cathode 105 resistance 110 delivers a negative bias to the hexode 105 Thereby the opened hexode delivers by its cathode resistance the block voltage by which the other hexode is closed. By this way only one of the two hexodes can 110 be opened at any instant The control of this electronic relay is effected by means of negative signals, which are supplied to the relay either from the amplifier circuit C or D at the transfer of computing signals 115 The switching over from the electronic tube to the other electronic tube 106 or vice versa is effected in this case by the suppressing of the current in the electronic tube 105 or 106 for a short instance, either by a nega 120 tive impulse to the control grid itself or-as in Fig 18 d-by a negative signal to a second control grid So long as a current flows in one tube, the other one is blocked by the bias of its suppressor grid (of 106 respectively 105) 125 of the cathode resistances 109 respectively 110. If by a negative impulse the hexode 105 is closed for a short while, in this instant no bias is delivered, and hexode 106 is opened by the blocking of the hexode 105 until the 130 no magnetizable layer in the rotor fields 0-9. The signals, the digit value of which exceeds the limit digit value (higher than 9), are recorded in track d, as the alternative track c has no magnetizable layer in its rotor fields 10-19, and therefore fields of track d can only be magnetized with resulting digit values from 10-19. The sensing head 35 is connected to the control grid of the amplifier pentode 98 In the pentode plate circuit is an electromechanical (telegraphic) relay 47, which has a definite bias to the resting position 48 and which is used as carry-over pre-mark switch. This switch has two switching ways 48 and 49, the alternative position of which switches in one or other of the two recording head groups 341, 342 or 351, 35 '. b AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT B wi TH ELECTRONIC RELAY. Fig 18 c and d show two designs of the switching diagram of amplifier circuit B with electronic relay, which can be used for higher speeds of the calculator and which can be used in combination with the amplifier The sensing head 33 in stator field I b 19 is connected via the amplifier pentode 98 of the amplifier 44 and to the carry-over pre-mark switch, which in this case is an electronic twoway switch of a special design at conferring an electronic relay Such relay in its resting position is connected to the recording heads 341 and 34 ' in stator fields I c and d 19, and in the operating switch position to the recording heads 351 and 35 ' in stator fields I c and d 18

according to the carry-over pre-mark signals from the preceding denomination in the winding 99. Such a pre-mark signal is supplied to the grid of the discharge tube 52 (compare also Fig 10 a-c) and it ignites this tube When this tube is ignited, the pentode 101 is opened and the pentode 100 is closed On the contrary, if it remains extinguished, the pentode 100 is opened and the pentode 101 is closed. This opposite and mutual opening and closing of the pentodes is effected by the resistances 102 and '103, which are connected into the discharge circuit of the gas discharge tube 52, whereby the junction regulates the potential of the cathode and whereby the positive side is connected to the screen grid of the pentode 101 and the negative side is connected to the suppressor grid of the second pentode 10. If the gas discharge tube is extinguished, the cathode and the suppressor grid of the pentode 100 have the same potential, so that the tube 100 is effective, it is opened. If the discharge tube is ignited, there is a voltage drop at the resistance 102, 103 according to the current of this tube Thereby the screen grid of pentode 101 receives a positive voltage, whereas the suppressor grid of the second pentode 100 is negatively biassed In 786,044 hexode 105 will be opened again by a negative impulse onto the control grid of the hexode 106. 3 MEANS FOR UNDIMINISHED TRANSFER FOR PROCESS ( 3) IN AMPLIFYING CIRCUIT C. An unchanged transfer of digit values is effected by means of the amplifier circuit C, symbolically shown in Fig 19 a The transfer is effected from sensing head 36 in stator field II c 5 to the recording head 38 in stator field II e 5 via the amplifier 50 without any alteration of the digit value This transfer is effective, if the resulting digit value of the computing process ( 1) does not exceed the limiting value Special switches deciding whether the transfer process ( 3) or the transfer process ( 4) will be effective are not required, as by the arrangement of the tracks c and d this separation is already effected on the rotor. The signal heads 36 and 38 are in the fields of the stator which correspond radially one to another, so that the digit value signals are transferred with the same digit value Fig 19 b shows a modification of the amplifier circuit C The digit value signals sensed by means of sensing head 36 or amplified by tube III. For the control of the digit value pre-mark switch, designed as an electromagnetic (telegraphic) relay, an additional repositioning winding 53 a is provided at the output side of the amplifier. Fig '19 c shows the same wiring diagram for co-operation with Fig 20

c, that is without the operation of such a repositioning winding. 4 THE DIMINISHING MEANS FOR PROCESS ( 4) IN THE AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT D. A diminishing of the digit value signals in the same denomination is effected during the signal transfer from track d to track e in the amplifying circuit D in combination with the forwarding pre-mark signal of a carry-over as shown in Fig 20 a. The means which transfer signals of the sensing head 37 track d in stator field I d 15 to the recording 38 in stator field II e 5, are of a similar design, but regard must be taken of the radial displacement of the signal heads by ten fields, by which the subtraction of "ten" is effected The circuit is provided with a usual low frequency amplifier 51. The plate circuit of the tube 113 of the amplifier 51, is via a transformer 112 which is directly connected to the ignition electrode of the discharge tube 52 (compare Figs 10, 11 b and 19 c), the discharge current of which effects the carry-over pre-mark switch by its winding 53. Fig 20 b shows a practical example of the amplifier circuit D The signals sensed by sensing head 37 are amplified by the pentode 113, the plate current of which excites the winding 53 b of the carry-over pre-mark switch and simultaneously effects the recording of computing signals by its recording head 38. The transfer from track d to track e is effected according to Fig 20 c via the sensing head 37 which supplies the signals via the amplifier tube 113 to the recording head 38 in stator field II e 5 By means of the additional winding 99, this recording head 38 effects the ignition of the gas discharge tube 52 (amplifier circuit B, Fig 18 c) for the purpose of the forwarding of the carry-over to the next denomination By this means the transfer of the signal from track d to track e representing the resulting digit value is displaced by ten fields according to the difference between the position of the sensing head 37 in stator field I d 35 and the position of the recording head 38 in stator field II e 5 Hereby the discharge tube 52 of the amplifier circuit B will be ignited for switching over the carryover pre-mark switch 47. MEANS FOR THE CARRY-OVER OF THE FUGITIVE " 1 " FOR PROCESS ( 5) IN AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT E. From track e signals of digit values can be re-transferred for the purpose of further additions to track a These signals can also be transferred to and recorded on other tracks (for instance to a selective signal carrier storage of signal carriers in form of tapes as output means). The re-transfer to track a can be effected without any displacement If during subtractions by complementary additions there is given the

carry-over signal for a "fugitive one," the transfer in the last denomination is effected by the relay in the amplifier circuit according to Fig 21 a This relay can be designed in full accordance with the electronic pre-mark switch of the amplifier circuit B of Fig 18 c. The amplifying circuit E of Fig 21 a, via the amplifier 66, connects the sensing head 58 in stator field XIII a 19 to the recording head 59 in stator field XIII a 19 for an unchanged transfer, or to the recording head in stator field XIII a 18 if regard has to be taken to a fugitive" 1 " With computors of medium or greater capacity the amplifier circuit E effects the addition of the "fugitive 1 " without additional cycles of operation, whereas in slower operating computers requiring further cycles of operation in computing process ( 2) the " fugitive " 1 " is forwarded from the first denomination to the last denomination of the number. These forwarding means are arranged in the empty sector, in which otherwise the fugitive one would appear as a pre-mark signal for a carry-over forwarding It is a repetition of those carry-over forwarding means for the next denomination in process ( 2), and is controlled in the same way by the carry-over pre-mark signal released in process ( 4) This pre-mark signal is delivered to its gas discharge tube 147 only during the passing of sector XIII of disc 7 through the zero-position of the stator (compare 'Figs 16 g, and h where for clearness 786,044 786,044 sector IV is shown as on empty sector) In Fig. 21 b the discharge tube 147 receives ignition signals only in the case of a carry-over forwarding from the last into the first sector, and such ignition effects the switching over of the pentodes as described with reference to Fig 18 c, see pentodes 100 and 101. 6 A SUMMARISED WIRING DIAGRAMS OF THE AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS A-E. In 'Fig 22 there is given a summarised survey of the amplifier circuits, based upon the preceding description of these circuits in the Figs 17-21 The different amplifying circuits are separated from each other by dotted lines. As a switching diagram for amplifier circuit A there is chosen the switching by full keyboard and an electronic denomination switch as sector switch according to Fig 17 g. The amplifier circuit B is in accordance with Fig 18 c. The amplifier circuit C uses a switching diagram according to Fig 19 c. The amplifier circuit D is switched according to Fig 20 c. The amplifier circuit E corresponds to the switching of the switching diagram of Fig. b.

By the preceding description of the different Figures 17-21, the reading of this complete diagram for computing processes as for instance addition, subtraction, multiplication and division, will be easier. In Fig 22 is shown the possibility of a connection with output means, by which either intermediate or definite results can be recorded by means of printing units, storage means or the like or by which such results can be shown by visual indicating means, for instance, stroboscopic means. The connection to these output means is shown in the cathode circuit of the discharge tube 68 If the recording switch 121 lies in the switching way 122 by reason of the function key 4 " print " of the keyboard in Fig 1, the signals of digit values sensed from the record means are, according to their timed position with respect to the zero-timing moment, supplied to a distributor in this circuit, for instance to the primary coils 23 a of the distributing stator 23 (compare Fig 2), which is shown in detail in Figs 23 a-d, and which allows the change-over of the different timed digit value signals into different switching ways and relays or storage positions according to the digit value. If as shown this recording switch 121 is in switching way 123, these processes can be connected which require no additional distributing means, for instance, the visual indicating of a result by means of a stroboscopic visual indicating means (see my co-pending Application No 37205/54). The inductive distributor according to Figs. 23 a-b comprises in stator 23 a circle of ten primary coils 23 a 0-9 and ten secondary coils 23 b 0-9, the cores 128 a and 128 b of which are on their one side connected with each other in pairs by the yokes 124 Fig 23 a shows the side-view and Fig 23 c the section 70 on A-B of the stator illustrated in Fig 23 a. The rotor 24 (compare also Fig 2) is fixed on shaft 18 by a key 125 in a defined position relative to disc 7 It is of starlike form with teeth 126 8 (rotating yokes) and in the 75 example has nine teeth equally spaced so that between the 9 parts of the rotor and between the ten parts of the stator there is a vernierlike displacement by rotor movement in the direction of the arrow 127, which is used for 80 the purpose of the digit value distribution for the digit value signals 0-9 in the different sectors of the disc 7. The rotor 24 is fixed by its key 125 on shaft 18 in such a way that in that timing instant, 85 in which, according to Fig 8 a, the digit value field 0 is below the slot 310 of the sensing head 31 in track a, the tooth 126 of the starlike rotor 24 is exactly opposite the cores 128 a O and 128 b O of the pair of coils 23 a' and 23 b M 90 connected

magnetically by the stationary yoke 1240 The magnetic resistance is very low at that instant, when the tooth 126 connects the primary coil 23 a' magnetically to the secondary coil 23 b O in the way of a transformer; and 95 if a digit value signal " O " has been recorded on track a it will be sensed at that instant In all other pairs of coils there is no inductive connection and therefore they have a high magnetic resistance A sensed signal " 0 " 100 therefore, supplied to all the primary coils 23 a' therefore will generate a signal only in the magnetically-connected secondary coil 23 b M. If in the next instant the field of the digit 105 value " 1 " is below the sensing head 31, the connection of the coils 23 a O and 23 a O is effected by the tooth 1261 In that timing instant " 2 " the coils 23 al and 23 bl are connected via the tooth 1262 etc, until, after " 9 " the 110 inductive distributor begins again with " O " For a better understanding, in Fig 23 a there was chosen a vernier division, at which in one rotation of the rotor each coil will be effective ten times, giving a total of 100 115 fields in the sectors I-X It is evident that where 13 sectors are used, each sub-divided into 40 digit value fields, suitable modifications will be made to the rotor and stator By reason of using the vernier divisions larger coil 120 intervals can be allowed On the same principle, there could be an arrangement with the teeth in the zero-position of each sector and ten primary and secondary coils in the stator fields 0, 1, 2, 3 9 of the same or of the following 125 sector. As Fig 23 d shows, the primary coils 23 a 0-9 are connected in series and in switching position 122 via the recording switch 121 to the discharge circuit of the discharge tube 130 68 (compare Fig 22) At that instant in which a digit value signal is -sensed by the sensing head 31 in track a a current surge is generated by the amplifier circuit A which is given to the primary coils 23 a-9 A movable magnetic tooth 126 connects one of the secondary coils 23 b-' with the corresponding primary coil so that within this secondary coil a voltage surge is generated, which corresponds to the respective digit value signal " 0-9 " Such a voltage surge is used for the ignition or exciting of one or another of the relays connected to each secondary coil, for instance a discharge relay 129 by means of which output or storage means can be connected in accordance with the timed instant of digit value signals. * By means of such a distributing switch a stroboscopic visual indication of the signals, sensed from disc 7, can be effected such as is shown in Figs 32/33. Fig 23 e shows in perspective the practical design of an inductive distributor switch with rotor 117, teeth 195 '9, primary and secondary coils 116 a, 116 b respectively on yokes 197, with a further rotor 118

of a contact switch, pairs of gliding brushes 1191 and 119 ' and contact 120, for another distributing switch, e.g, the sector switch. VI COMPUTING PROCESSES FOR MULTIPLICATION AND DIVISION. Multiplication may be effected by a denominational displacement and within each denomination a repeated addition So far as an addition process is concerned, reference is made to the above-mentioned elucidations, especially to the descriptions of the Figures 9-11, 14, and 17. The fundamental processes of additional means for the denomination displacement, the " counting of the rotations " and the control of the rotations effective at each denomination will be described as a supplement to the abovementioned Fig 17 a, by means of the Figs. 24 a-b and 25 a-c Fig 24 a comprises a computing arrangement connected with electronic denomination switch and full keyboard, such as is shown in Fig 17 g Figs 25 a and b show a multiple inductive distributor arm 14118 of the sector switch which can effect the functions of the denominational displacement. In Fig 24 a the amplifying circuit A with control from the full keyboard, including the reference numbers is so far identical with Fig. 17 g, and additional description is not required so far as the similar parts are concerned. As in Fig 17 g, the digits to be added, in this case the multiplicand for the multiplication process, are recorded in the full keyboard by closing the corresponding contacts between the vertical denomination contact rows 15 '-15 ' and the horizontal digit value contact rows 16 '8, i e, corresponding to " 000 000 28 " The separate denominations are made effective denomination by denomination and, beginning from the right hand, by the ignition of the single gas discharge tubes 881-8, which is effected by secondary coils 82 s of the inductive sector switch The inductive distributor arm not shown in Fig 24 a which makes effective the electronic denomination switches one after another, may be the distributor arm 1411 of Fig 25 a This distributor arm 1411 is fixed to shaft 18 in such a way that it connects the secondary coil 82 ' with the primary coil 811 when the rotor is in the zero-position concerning the denominations (sectors) and digit value fields The connection of the primary coil 81 ' and the secondary coil 822 is effected by the same distributor arm 141 ', when the rotor has passed the sector I, and when, concerning the digit values, it is in the zeropoint of sector II By this arrangement, during the passing of sector I the denomination 15 ' (in the shown example switched on digit value " 8 "); at the passing of sector II the denomination 152 (digit value " 2 "); at the passing of sector III the denomination 15 ' (digit value " 0 "); and at the passing of sector IV the denomination

154 (digit value " O " etc, is effective. At the first rotation of the disc is added, according to Figs 8 a-c. 000 + 028 = 028 During addition the arrangement is effective only for a single rotation (computing cycle) and the blocking of the keys is released after this single rotation, the keys remaining in a rest position during multiplication, so that at the keyboard " 28 " remains switched on, and during a second rotation is computed: 028 + 028 = 056, at a third rotation 056 + 028 = 084, at a fourth rotation 084 + 028 = 112 etc. After nine rotations the signal carrier shows as a result 28 x 9 = 252, provided the process of repeated additions has not been interrupted. The number of cycles effecting additions in this denomination is fixed by the last denomin-ation of the multiplicator For example, in the task 28 x 69 = 1932 the first step is to find the result of 28 x 9 in the manner described above After terminating the nine cycles with the intermediate result 252, recorded in the signal carrier, the circle of coils Fig 25 c comprising the primary coils 811 and the secondary coils 821 (see Fig 17 f) is mechanically shifted in the axial direction in such a way that the inductive distributor arm 141 ', which is displaced by one sector relative to the distributor arm 1411 (Figs. a and b), now connects the primary and secondary coils 8118 and 82 '-, instead of the distributor arm 1411. 786,044 rows is effected by which digit values of the single denominations of the second factor are represented. The switch 131 is part of the cycle counter which after each rotation switches to the next 70 position During the first rotation of the computing signal carrier, switch 131 effects the connection to switching field 133 ', during the second rotation to switching field 1331, that is to say, the centre contact 132 is connected 75 to the single contact 133 ' before the first rotation; and switches over to 1331 during the passing of sector XIII of the first rotation, to 1332 during the passing of sector XIII of the second rotation and so on 80 Switch 135 switches to the next contact field after ten rotations of the computing signal carrier, that is to say, once after one rotation of the distributor switch 131 during its switching-over from field 133 ' to 133 85 In its starting position, switch 135 connects the positive pole, via the central contact 136, the contact arm, and the switching field 137 '. to the last vertical contact row 138 '. After ten rotations of the signal carrier, 90 that is after ten cycles, switch 135 switches over to switching field 1372, so that the

positive pole is connected via the centre contact of this switch to the vertical contact row 1382, that is to say, the penultimate denomination of 95 the multiplicator After ten further cycles it moves to contact field 137 ' and connects the centre contact 136 to the third contact row 138 ' and so on. In connection with the cycle counting, the 100 device has the task of comparing the digit recording in the full keyboard with the number of the rotations of the rotor By this means the computing arrangement will be kept effective until the number of rotations within each 105 denomination of the multiplicator is attained which corresponds to the digit value of the corresponding denomination of the multiplicand For this purpose the windings 139 a and b of a relay are excited each time the 110 central contact 132 is in the zero-position 133 ' of the cycle-counter 131 The coordinated relay contacts for instance contact keep effective the computing arrangement in this switching position by closing the circuit 115 of the keyboard When arranged as a polarised relay, or by means of an additional winding or the like, the relay remains effective, until in the particular denomination the cycle counter switch 131 closes a circuit through the contact 120 corresponding to the key pressed down in the keyboard 162 and the switched denomination contact field of the switch 135, giving within this comparison device a condition wherein the rotation number which corresponds to the 125 digit value has been reached, and further addition processes are to be kept ineffective. The last denomination of the multiplicator is represented by the digit value " 9 " which is made effective by means of the switch 135 130 This may for instance be done in the way shown in Fig 25 c The multiple distributor arm 141 ' is fixed to shaft 18 The circle with its primary and secondary coils 811 and 82 -8 is switched mechanically step by step after each ten rotations by means of the cam groove 142 of the ten-part intermittently operating mechanism 143 The springs 144 urge the slide on which the circle 85 of coils is mounted towards the next switching position. Beginning at the right side, the circle and its slide are moved axially after each ten rotations to bring them into register with the next arm of the multiple distributor arm 141 - The ignition of the denomination switches 88 -8 is effected after each lateral displacement of the circle so that after each ten cycles a displacement of the ignition time of the tubes 881 of the electronic denomination switch is effected and therefore a denomination displacement by one sector The distributor arm 1411 is located in each adjusted position so that it effects first an ignition of the last electronic denomination switch 88 ' according to the last denomination ' of keyboard 1, at the beginning of the passing of the sector I; then

it effects the ignition of the denomination switch 882 at the beginning of the passing of the sector II as is described with the reference to Fig 17 g The successive ignitions of the denomination switches recurs ten times during the first ten cycles of the computing signal carrier After these ten cycles the last denomination 151 of keyboard 1 becomes effective when the sector II of the rotor becomes operative, and the penultimate denomination 152 is effective at the beginning of the passing of sector III, etc In this way is effected a successive displacement of each sectors by one sector length between the sensing of the values from keyboard 1 and the sensing of the values from the computing signal carrier 7, this displacement bringing about an alteration of the denominations. It has already been shown that instead of such mechanical displacement electric changeover switchings are possible, e g, with different coils. As every distributor arm becomes active ten times before the axial movement of the coils to the next arm of the distributor is effected there must be provided a device which ensures that only a certain number of cycles of the distributor arm in each position of the coils is effective. A practical example of this cycle-counter and comparison-device for use with contact switching is shown in Fig 24 a, which includes full keyboard 162, with vertical contact rows 138 '- and horizontal contact rows 1340-9, similar to those shown in Figs 2, 8, 9 and 17 g Corresponding to the keys which are pressed down, e g, the keys " 69," a connection of the vertical and the horizontal contact 786,044 having switching field 1371 connected thereto and the key contact " 9 " After the switching on of relay 139 repeated additions in the contact positions 1331, 133 ', 133 '-1339 are made in all nine times. On the contact 132 moving from 133 ' to 133 ' a circuit consisting of the contact arm 136, contact field 1371, vertical contact row 138 ', key-contact " 9," horizontal contact row 134 ', connected to contact field 1339, contact arm 132 and winding 139 b is closed and switch 140 is opened, thereby disconnecting the computing arrangement. In completion of the ten rotations the coils 85 are shifted to coincide with the second distributor arm 1412, and the switch 135 switches to the contact field 1372 The relay 139 is again excited via contact 133 ' and winding 139 & The repeated addition is now recommenced in the next denomination during the switching positions 1331, 133 of the switch 132, i e, for six rotations After the sixth rotation the relay is interrupted via the keyboard 162 by a counter winding 139, and further addition processes during the rotations 7, 8, 9 are rendered ineffective. After the second series of ten cycles the third distributor-arm 141 '

is in effective cooperation with the coils 85, displaced axially. This time the relay 139 remains in its resting position at the switching position 133 ' of switch 132, as via the Testing contact 134 '-138 ' and switching field 137 ' of switch 135 the operating winding 139 & is short-circuited In this position no rotation is effective as addition In the same manner the further denominations are multiplied in an automatic-mechanical way by a repeated denomination addition. If electric switches are used, the change of connection can immediately be controlled by such a comparison device The same schedule would be valid for controllable mechanical displacement devices But as in general the addition speeds exceed greatly the requirements of office machine operation, it will generally not be necessary to bring about an acceleration at simpler devices. The division process differs from the multiplication process only in that, after the introduction into the machine of the dividend by a single addition, a repeated subtraction for instance in the form of a complementary addition during nine rotations is effected in the same way as it is done in the multiplication process, and in that during the tenth rotation an addition is brought about This repeated subtraction is interrupted when the process has passed below the value zero This passing below the zero value is marked by the absence of the fugitive " 1," and therefore the winding 139 b of the relay 140 of the comparison device is excited, and further complementary additions, viz, the subtraction process, are rendered ineffective Simultaneously the rotation number is recorded on the signal carrier so that the number of effective rotations in each denomination is clearly fixed in a magnetic way and can be read and used as a quotient When dividing, the process always passes below the zero value in consequence of repeated subtraction processes, and a tenth process is always effected for the single addition from which results the " remainder " of the division in this denomination and which is the starting position for further subtractions in the next lower denomination. Otherwise the processes are completely analogous to the already-described addition/ subtraction processes and to the rotation and comparison processes used in multiplication. One difference which must be mentioned is that the switching of the distributor arms must be opposite to that described with reference to Fig 25 c, so that the division process begins at the highest denomination of the dividend and finishes at the last denomination. As already described, the " remainder " remains in storage in the signal carrier together with the quotient which is also fixed in a magnetic way and they can be taken off at any instant The details of a practical example of this arrangement will now be described: 1 WIRING OF THE COMPUTING ARRANGEMENT FOR ADDITION, SUBTRACTION,

MULTIPLICATION, AND D Iv ISION 95 a AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT A FOR PROCESS ( 1). The sensing coil 31 in position I a 19 of Fig 6 b is shown in Fig 26 with the same reference number The amplifier of process ( 1) is pentode 67 with the co-ordinated switch 100 ing means, registers and capacitors The primary windings of the recording heads in I b 9-0 are the windings 32 '-' The secondary windings of these heads for the subtraction (complementary windings) are the windings 105 166 - Use is made of the full keyboard 1. The successive switching of the last, penultimate, etc, denomination of the full keyboard is effected by means of gas discharge tubes 881-' (compare with Fig 17 g) 110 b AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT B FOR PROCESS ( 2). The sensing head 33 in the position I b 19 to Fig 6 b is represented with the same reference number The carry-over pre-markswitch is represented together with the 115 amplifier by two electronic tubes 100 and 101 of which pentode 100 is the resting contact including amplifier, and pentode 101 the operation contact including amplifier The recording heads within their plate circuits are 120 accordingly the signal heads 351 and 352 and the recording heads of the "' resting contacts are the heads 34 ' and 34 '. c AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT C FOR PROCESS ( 3). As a sensing head is provided the signal 125 head 36 As an amplifier is used the pentode with its switching means The recording is effected via a secondary winding of the recording head 38. 786,044 786,044 d AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT D FOR PROCESS ( 4). The sensing head 37 is connected to the grid of the pentode 113 which is used as an amplifier together with its resistors and capacitors The recording head 38 with the transformer 112 indicated in Fig 10 are shown with the same reference numbers The discharge tube which effects the change-over switching of the electronic relay is identified by reference numeral 52. e AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT E FOR PROCESS ( 5). The sensing head 58 in position XIII e 19 of Fig 6 b is connected to the electronic relay which is formed by the two pentodes 145 and 146, and also effects an amplification It is operated as a switch by the discharge tube 147 Pentode 146 represents the resting contact for the recording head 59 in position XIII a 19, and pentode 145 represents the operation contact for the recording head 60 in position XIII a 18. The switch which provides the pre-mark carry-over signals only at the passing from sector XII to sector XIII can effect an ignition of the gas discharge tube 147 and by it a change-over of the electronic relay in the ringmodulator circle 112, 148, 149 controlled by the gas discharge tube 154 This tube switches the signals from transformer 112 to transformer 149, and therefore to the grid of the discharge tube

147, but only when tube 154 is ignited Provision is made in the main discharge circuits to ensure that the tubes are extinguished at controlled timing instants. 2 SUPPLEMENTARY MEANS FOR MULTIPLICATION. Mechanical parts of the computing arrangement are shown in perspective. On shaft 18 signal distributing arms 141 ' cut the fields of the coils 155 which are arranged round these arms and also displaced progressively and can be shifted axially in the direction of the arrow 230 Moreover is represented the coil 156, which is not movable and whose field is also cut by an arm 170. In co-operation with the coils and the discharge tubes 881- the arms effect the automatic denomination displacement for the purpose of the multiplication and division and the switching of the single denominations of the full keyboard, for the processing. There is provided a second keyboard 162, which is used for the feeding-in of the multiplicator and pre-sets the cycle control respective cycle comparison The second keyboard also effects the necessary switching processes in co-operation with the stepping mechanisms 157 and 158 which operate inductively and without contacts The windings of the coils of these stepping mechanisms are marked 159, and the gas discharge switch which replaces the relay 139 is marked 161. The decision whether the operation process shall be addition, subtraction, multiplication or division is effected by the choice of the key " A-S-M-D " Below these keys are the marked contact sets which initiate the selected function. 3 MULTIPLICATION PROCESS. By reason of the preceding description the " addition" process is known, so that the "additions" description can be confined to the control of the repeated addition and the denomination displacement. In the full keyboard 1, for instance, may be tapped " 28," and in the second keyboard 162 may be tapped " 69," and the task " 28 x 69 = 1932 " is submitted to the calculator on operation of the command key cc M "y The discharge tube 88 ' ignites The arm 141 ' cuts the field of the coil 155 ' and a voltage surge is generated within the coil, and the surge is conveyed to the grid of the tube The ignition of the discharge tube prevents the ignition of any other tube in one cycle. The main discharge circuit of the discharge tube is in the plate circuit of pentode 67 whose current is controlled by its grid potential. This pentode is biassed to such an extent that its plate current is just strong enough to keep up the ignition of the gas discharge tube. When the sensing head 31 in track a (compare 31 in Fig 6 b) generates

a voltage surge by induction of the magnetic signal, this raises the plate current of tube 67 and effects a signal recording by means of the recording head 32 ' (in position I b 1, compare Fig 6 a, 8 a and 14 b) and records signal " 8 " in track b. On further rotation of the computing signal carrier 7 the discharge tube 881 is extinguished in that the grid of the pentode 67 is tapped negative by the sensing head 171 to such an extent that the current which is necessary to sustain the discharge of the tube is no longer maintained. On further rotation arm 141 ' cuts the next coil 1552 The succeeding discharge tube 88:, which renders effective the penultimate denomination of the full keyboard, is thereby ignited as this coil is connected to the ignition electrode of this tube. As the penultimate denomination key " 2 " is pressed down the recording head 322 " 2 " becomes effective (addition) On the passing of the signal " O " below the sensing head 31 of track a, the recording head 32 ' effects the recording of signal " 2 " in track b (compare figures 8 b, 14 d). Thus, during the first rotation the denominations of the keyboard are successively rendered effective by igniting the successive discharge tubes 88 at the passing of the arm through the fields of the successive coils. If no key in any vertical row has been pressed down, zero signals are effected electrically by means of the discharge tube 167 If any one of the gas discharge tubes 88 is ignited, the discharge tube 167 " O " cannot also be ignited, as meanwhile the plate voltage 786,644 has broken down to arc-voltage. If, however, no key is pressed down and the contacts remained open, so that the discharge tube 88 which is co-ordinated to the denomination could not ignite, then on additional impulses in their place the discharge tube 167 ignites, the main discharge circuit of which leads via a winding of the recording head 32 " 0. Similarly, the second cycle is effected, and to the interim sum " 28 " which is on the signal carrier, is now added the number " 28," so that at the end of the second cycle the interim sum " 56 " is on the signal carrier at the end of the third cycle " 84 " and so on. In the last denomination of full keyboard 162 is a " 9 " therefore nine rotations, i e, nine cycles are effected successively After these nine cycles the digit value for " 9 x 28 " is recorded on the computing signal carrier. The set of coils 155 8 is now shifted by one denomination to the left (in direction of the arrow 230) always after nine rotations in a manner indicated by reference to Fig 25 c. During the next passing of sector I of the signal carrier 7 no

discharge tube is ignited as no denomination of the full keyboard 1 is effective, and only the " O " discharge tube 167 or the like becomes effective so that in the sector 1 of the new sum " O " is added, and the sum remains unchanged. At the continued rotation the arm 1412 has reached the field of coil 155 ', has therewith ignited the discharge tube 88 ' and has rendered effective the pressed down key " 8 " in the last denomination of the full keyboard 1, preparatory for the passing of sector II of the signal carrier 7 (compare Figures 14 c and 14 d) The displacement of the distributor arm by one denomination effects therewith that without any contact switches and the like in the further course of the repeated addition of " 28 " the computing signals become effective displaced by one denomination. In the described practical example again nine rotations ensue mechanically in a similar manner. As in the penultimate denomination of the full keyboard 162, however, the key " 6 " is pressed down; only the first six rotations become effective as additions, whereas during the three further rotations no functions are effective This is brought about by discharge tube 161, which at its ignition biasses the suppressor grid of the pentode 67 and by means of the voltage drop in the resistance 173 the tube is practically "closed " Thereby the amplifying function of the pentode for the voltage surges of the passing digit value signals, which are induced in the sensing head 31, becomes ineffective in the same instant. Moreover, by the closing of the pentode the discharge tubes 88 " of the penultimate denomination of the full keyboard 1 is extinguished By means of a compensation winding 231 of the erasing head 61, in position II a 19, in the discharge circuit of discharge tube 161, the erasing effect in track a is cancelled at the same time, so that the digit value signals for a sum recorded in this track are 70 not changed or erased during the next rotations by the extinction of the discharge tube 161. After terminating the nine rotations the pentode is " opened " again and the effectiveness of the erasing head 61 is restored 75 The ignition of said discharge tube 161 is controlled by an inductive distributor having a yoke on its discs of the counter as a cycle and by means of which the magnetic flux between the pole-shoes of a pair of coils is 80 preliminarily closed. The pairs of coils 59 are arranged around the " units " disc 157 of the cycle counter, and the pairs of coils 160 around the " ten's " disc 158 of the cycle counter The yoke 168 is 85 fixed to the non-magnetic disc 157, and the yoke 169 is fixed to the non-magnetic disc 158.

The secondary windings of the coils 159 are connected via the keyboard with the primary windings of the coils 160 The secondary 90 winding of the coil 156 is connected with the primary windings of the coils 159, and the secondary windings of the coils 160 are connected with the cathode and the ignitionelectrode of the discharge tube 161 When the 95 arm 170 moves through the magnetic field of the coil 156, built up by direct current of its primary winding, a voltage surge will be generated in the secondary winding at each revolution This surge will be conducted, as 100 described above, via the inductive working distributors 159 and 160, however, only when in this denomination of the keyboard the contact, which corresponds to the revolution, is closed in order to ignite the discharge tube, in 105 this case after the sixth revolution. In another practical form of the calculation arrangement, a recording head is shifted at each revolution along the signal carrier by a gear unit such as is shown in Fig 24 b, or a 110 slowly operating storage-unit is connected to it. In this case the digit value signals are kept in the respective fields of the circumference, for instance, signal " 6 " in the field in which after the sixth revolution the sensing head and the 115 storage-unit are opposite to each other If in a case of multiplication the signal is passing under the sensing head, the discharge tube 161 will be ignited. In order to increase the speed of the com 120 putor, it is possible to eliminate any ineffective revolutions in any particular denomination Fot example, if there are only two denominations in a number, then they can be recorded immediately the digit in the ten's denomination 125 has been reached Further, when the number in the units denomination has been reached, switching over to the tens denomination can be effected without delay caused by the completion of the complementary remaining 13 Q 786,O 44 rotations in the units denomination. The switching of the relay 1521, 1522 does not require any further explanation The contacts make effective the computing process in the shown position after switching over they effect the indication and eliminate the effectiveness of the erasing head in track a. 4 THE DIVISION PROCESS. The additional equipment for the division consists of a compensatory winding of the coil 1550, by means of which is stated that the value " O " has run through and has been evaluated for signal forwarding, and of a set of signal heads 172 by the means of which the result (quotient) is recorded in the signal carrier. The cycles at the division are the same as that at the multiplication When the dividend is set in the keyboard 162, and the divisor is set

in the keyboard 1, in the course of the first revolution the dividend will be recorded on the signal carrier by addition The slide with the circle 85 of coils 155 is in the left-hand position Its starting position when dividing corresponds therefore to the final position at the multiplication At this position of the circle 85 of coils 155 ' the divisor which is set in keyboard 1 is subtracted during the course of nine revolutions. The subtraction is effected again by the employing of secondary windings 166 of the recording heads 32 '', the co-ordinated digit value of which is complementary to the primary windings. The change-over switching from "addition" to " subtraction" will be performed by the shifting of switch 55 from switchway 56 to switchway 57. Similar to the procedure of multiplication the effectiveness of these nine revolutions concerning the computing process is interrupted when the discharge tube 161 is ignited The ignition occurs if, during the passing of distributor arms 141 through the field of the coil 155 ", no digit value forwarding signal of the " fugitive one " has been performed. If the coil 555 has a secondary winding, the magnetic flux of this coil can be compensated by the ignition of the discharge tube 147 as the secondary winding is part of the main discharge circuit When there is no "fugitive one" this discharge tube does not become effective The coil 155 ' effect in turn the ignition of the discharge tube 161, which block the pentode 67, current to the erasing head 61 of track a is counteracted and the process of repeated subtraction is interrupted. Moreover, the ignition of the discharge tube 161 effects the recording of a digit value signal by recording head ( 172 D) which is effective via the distributor 159/168 at a position of the change-over switch 2271 corresponding to that at which it is " switched on " at the respective revolution The quotient of the division process is recorded denomination by denomination on the signal carrier such as described above The correct denominationwise co-ordination in the signal carrier is accomplished by the co-operation of the distributors 160 and 169 in conjunction with the set of coils 1558. Of the nine revolutions, co-ordinated to one denomination, only such a number of cycles will be effective as is necessary to bring the result below " zero " The number of cycles recorded on the signal carrier, however, will be one less, due to a suitable arrangement of the connection of the distributor coils in combination with the recording heads 1729. As a " tenth revolution" takes place for practical purposes within every denomination displacement, an addition of the divisor, recorded

in keyboard 1 is effected in a way that, during the course of the tenth or last cycle within one denomination displacement, the contact 55 is switched over from switchway 57 to switchway 58 For the performance of addition, switch 228 is closed; for subtraction, switch 229 is closed For multiplication switches 2261 and 226 ' are closed For division, switches 2271 and 2273 are closed. Round-off procedures, in dependence of the decimal point are possible with both multiplication and division These operations will be explained later in the description of the distributive computing process (cross-coil computing arrangement) in union with the use of the ten's keyboard in order to facilitate the explication of the multiplication and division. VII SIMPLIFICATIONS AND MODIFICATIONS OF THE WIRING. On account of the separate performance of the computing processes ( 1)-{ 5) in single amplifier circuits the operation of the calculator becomes particularly clear Further advantages can result from the combination of several functions within one switching circuit In the following are given some characteristic examples of such combinations. 1 COMBINATION OF PROCESS ( 1) WITH PROCESS ( 2). Instead of separating the process ( 1) from the process ( 2) (the processing) the carry-over forwarding a combination of both processes can also be made within the switching diagram. The processes ( 3) and ( 4) can also be combined to a certain degree The changes resulting in this case are to be seen by the example in Fig 27 a. This Figure shows that sensing heads 311and 312 are provided and that they are arranged in the positions I a 9 and I a 10 of the stator. The displacement by one field of the digit value carry-over which otherwise occurs in process ( 2) is here already effected in process ( 1) in that the electronic relay, formed by the tubes 174-176, in the case of a transfer without a digit value carry-over from the preceding denomination, renders effective the the automatic storage of the new balance after computation if the new balance signal is not recorded on a magnetizable layer or the like on or in an account card Each of the sensing heads 31 -9 has two windings, one of the windings being connected to contact 56, and provided for direct addition, and the other, connected to contact 57 of the relay 55, is provided for complementary addition (subtraction). The relay 55 effects the switching-over "addition-subtraction " The contacts 54 '-549 of the keys 0-9 of the ten's keyboard are also shown in the drawing The sensing heads 31 only become effective during that rotation of the signal carrier following pressing down of the keys The switching-on of the digit value switches 54 is effected via the relay and contact 192 The relay is controlled by the adjustable cams which

are on the automatic switchboard 193 fixed to the movable part of the printing unit Its part A controls, by means of cams 194 and switches 1930, to which denomination the respective digit value belongs. For instance, if cam " 2 " is set, the sensed digit-value is recorded in sector-II (penultimate denomination), as only in sector II of the rotating distributor 199 is provided a contact for effecting the switching-on of the relay 190 via its winding 189. Part Bl selects bhi means of cam 195 and switch 1931, in which track (a, b, or f) of the storage unit, to which registry number area the digit values are delivered, whereas in part B 2 cams 196, in co-operation with switches 1932 and 1933, select whether an addition or a subtraction shall be effected By cams 197, part Cl of the switchboard and switches 1932 and 193 ' controls which balance number area shall be dealt with, whereas part C 2, by means of cams 198 and switches 193 ', 193 ', 193 ' and 193 ' effects addition or subtraction. Corresponding to the description of the multiplication processes (section VI), the controlling of these processes can also be effected by different tracks of the storages, which are provided for these programme control markings, and which are sensed by a gliding group of sensing heads. so The working operation is as follows: The displacement of the computing signals for addition is effected by the switching-on of the respective sensing heads 31 -' The displacement of the signal by the required distance is effected by transfer to the recording head 179, if the sums keep within the limiting value The signal which is excited in the sensing head is amplified by pentode 74 so that the gas discharge tube 73 is ignited, and the capacitor 86, charged by a resistor to a voltage lower than the striking voltage, is discharged in a short time (compare Fig 17 c) The voltage drop at the resistor 75 affects the screen-grid voltage and the pentode 67 is opened This tube amplifies the signal taken from track m by sensing head 76. If the limiting value has not been exceeded, the undiminished recording is effected in switching position 200 of the limiting value switch by means of the recording head 179 70 After the passing of field 9 under the slot of this recording head the limiting value switch switches-over to position 201, thus connecting the recording head 181 to the pentode 67 for the recording of diminished values By dis 75 placement of signal head the diminishing is effective. The winding 53 a of the carry-over pre-mark switch 47 which comprises a polarized relay, is excited by a secondary winding of the record 80 ing head 179 The relay switches to switchway 48, effecting the recordings without forwarding the digit value carry-over A computing signal, recorded by means of the recording head 181, energizes by the

winding 99 the winding 53 b 85 of the polarized relay and turns it over to switchway 59 By this arrangement, the sensing head 311 " 1 " is switched-on and effects the forwarding of the digit value carry-over to the next denomination 90 Thus within all the denominations (sectors) which are not computed, the digit value signals of the same value are transferred via the holding contact 191 and the switchway 48, so that the sensing head 31 ' is effective At 95 the performance of the carry-over forwarding, the sensing head 311 is effective. Only once in the operating sector and during only one revolution, i e, at every keypressing, the relay 189 changes over to switch 100 way 192 and effects in the same denomination an addition via the closed switch of the switches 54 of the ten's keyboard In the following sectors, the forwarding of the digit value carry-over is effected according to 105 whether the switchway 201 is rendered effective A " fugitive one " is transferred directly from the last sector into the first sector. The recording of the result can be done by the usual recording units, by the types of a 110 typewriter or the printing unit, described in the following. VIII VARIANCES OF THE MECHANICAL PARTS. The fundamental structure of the mechanical 115 parts of the computor is shown according to the invention, in Fig 31 a. On the main shaft 18 are firmly arranged and fixed in their mutual position by keys or the like: toothed wheels 205 and 206, the 120 magnetizable discs 207 the cylindrical computing signal carrier 71 as well as the inductive switches 157 and 158, necessary for the multiplication. The Figures 31 b and 31 c show in side view 125 and edge view respectively one of the magnetizable discs 207 which are provided as track c and d for the distinguishing of the digit-values, i e, whether the result is less than or equal to limiting digit-value or exceed it 130 786,044 circuit 23 b-9 at the instant of the signal timing position " 2 " ( 0 + 2 = 2) It is in that moment, when the yoke 1260 passes the field between the magnetic poles of the excited coil 23 al and secondary coil 23 b', that the signal 70 will be recorded in the record means (in the example a magnetic layer) by means of one of the recording heads 179-182 at the corresponding field It is evident that in lieu of this a glow-storage, a contact-storage, etc, can be 75 used. If, instead of the digit value switch 542, the digit value switch 548 for the digit value " 8 " had been closed, the voltage surge would have been released at the signal-timing posi 80 tion " 8 " An ignition of the gas discharge tube 218 during the second revolution, effects the addition of " 1 " The digit value switch 54 ' shown closed,

introduces as a first operand the digit 85 value " 2 " At the passing of the yoke 1261 during this revolution the voltage surge would be excited in the signal timing position " 3," etc. It is evident that this procedure is similar 90 to the digit value signal displacement by signal heads which are mutually displaced and represents a means to generate a signal corresponding to the sum of both the operands when the corresponding denomination passes under the 95 recording head. The ignition of the discharge tube 218 during the revolution corresponding to the first operand requires a more detailed explanation. In this example of the computing arrangement, 100 the ignition of the discharge tube 218 takes place whenever one of the magnetic yokes 126 runs through the group of coils 215 a, 215 b and 216 a, 216 b During the passing of the magnetic yoke through the coils, 215 and 105 216 the discharge tube 219 will be ignited by an impulse from coil 215 b and extinguished afterwards by an impulse from coil 216 b. During the passing by of the yoke 126 the ignition takes place at that moment when the 110 field " O " passes under the sensing head 31. As the discharge tube 219 will switch on the pentode 220, and a voltage surge, generated in the sensing head 31 is amplified by the pentode 220 and transferred, but only if the 115 surge reaches the grid of the pentode during the time of its opening, that is to say, during the first revolution only a " O " signal is transferred, during the second revolution a " 1 " signal is transferred, etc Therefore a compar 120 ing verification of the numbers of revolutions with the numbers of the signals being stored will be obtained automatically If there is conformity between these two cycles the signals will be transferred 125 The signal sensed by sensing head 31 will be transmitted to the ignition electrode of the discharge tube 218, via transformer 221, so that this tube will be ignited in the case of conformity before the yoke is entering the 130 The figures 31 d and 31 a are similar views of the toothed wheel 205 of Fig 3 la such as can be employed for the input of the zero signal in connection with a signal head. B COMPUTING BY DISTRIBUTIVE MEANS OF COMPUTING. In the preceding description has been described a principle of computing by calculation arrangements comprising displaced signal heads co-operating with magnetizable computing signal carriers and transfer means The displacement could be effected at the recording as well as the sensing. According to the invention computing signals can be delivered to signal carriers of modified forms of computing arrangements which will give a result-signal defined relative to space or time.

As a further example of a computing arrangement the computing operation is effected by computing distributors, of which the recording of the result is as described in the preceding section A, by transfer means to a signal carrier. I DISTRIBUTIVE COMPUTING WITH SUCCESSIVE INTRODUCTION OF THE SECOND DIGIT-VALUE. As a practical example a distributor was chosen which is effective by variations of a magnetic field. Fig 32 shows a computing unit suitable for slow operational speeds. In this case, the movable magnetic yoke 1260 (" O " yoke), comparable to a contact-arm moves during the first revolution between the primary coils 215 a, 216 a, 23 a 0-9, 217 a and the secondary coils 215 b, 216 b, 23 b' , 217 b of the instructive distributor This rotation is co-ordinated to the digit value " O " of the one number to be added. After this revolution the yoke is displaced axially, so that at the second revolution the yoke 126 ', angularly backwards displaced by one field, will move through the fields of the pairs of coils On completion of this second revolution, which is co-ordinated to the digit value " 1," the yoke 1262, then 1263, etc, pass between the coils, that is to say, in ten revolutions ten yokes, displaced each time by one digit field pass between the coils. By the switches 54 '-, which might be the switches of the full keyboard, the keys of a typewriter or a bookkeeping machine, etc, one of the primary coils 23 a 0-8, representing the digit values 0-9 (at subtraction cycles the complementary values 9-0) will be excited. The switch position remains unchanged during ten revolutions. In the example, the " 2 " has been switched on by the digit value switch 542, which connects primary coil 23 a O in the main discharge circuit of the tube 218 If during the first revolution which is the " O " cycle, the discharge tube 218 has been ignited A voltage surge will be induced in the secondary coil 786,044 pairs of coils 23 a/b'-9 and 217 a/b At the passing of the magnetic yoke through the pairs of coils 217 a/b, that is, after the revolution has been finished, the discharge tube 218 will be extinguished by a corresponding extinguishing impulse generated by coil 217 b. The voltage surge, generated in the secondary coils 23 b' will be recorded by the recording heads 179, 180, 181 and 182. The selection of the proper recording head from the above set will be performed by procedures analogous to those of Fig 29 The signal heads 179, 180 are displaced, as described in that figure, relative to the heads 181, 182 by ten digit value units This has been done for the purpose of the diminishing of ten from resulting sums above the limiting value The switching over is done by a suitable switching mechanism 47/184 The forwarding of the digit value carry-over is

effected by means of a polarised relay 47/53 a, 53 b which will switch over according to which pair of heads is excited The relay serves as a carryover pre-mark switch. The digit-value carry-over forwarding relay takes up its proper position in the moment, when the operation contact is closed If the armature of the control relay is in its upper position (carry-over position), the relay 223 will be excited This status will remain by its contact 223 until the holding circuit has been broken by the opening of the holding contact. At the energising of relay 223 via the switching-over contact 47 of the said relay, the switching over to the switching position 49 with the recording heads 180/182 is effected at the performance of the digit-value carryover, whereas in the holding position the signals are recording in switching position 48, by the heads 179/181 As already mentioned, at any instant only one of these heads will be effective by means of the switch 84. The contact switch-over mechanism can be replaced for inertialess operating by inertialess switches, such as gas discharge tubes, electronic relays, etc. In the construction above described, ten revolutions are necessary for each of the computing cycles However, in consideration of the available revolution numbers this is tolerable at normal computing operations Another practical example of the computing arrangement requires only one revolution at every computing operation. II PRACTICAL EXAMPLES OF A CALCULATING ARRANGEMENT ACCORDING TO THE COMPUTING DISTRIBUTING PROCEDURE WITH SIMULTANEOUS ACTUATION OF THE SECOND DIGIT-VALUE. High efficiency is possible with the above described computing distributing method, if each of the magnetic yokes has its own set or circle of coils on the stator according to the Fig 33, and comprising primary coils and secondary coils, the former being marked 240, 241, 242, 243-249, and the latter 250, 251, 252, 253-259 In the secondary coils it will be seen that coils 251-259 are sub-divided into coils 251 a and 251 b, 252 a and 252 b and so on, the number of coils sub-divided pro 70 gressively increasing in number to effect the carry-over into the next denomination Coils 240 will not be so sub-divided as they only deal with values " 0-9 " While in the mechanism according to Fig 75 32 the magnetic yokes will be shifted laterally opposite to the set of coils, causing the magnetic yoke 126 first to enter the magnetic fields of the coils during the first revolution and by yoke 126 ' at the second revolution and 80 by yoke 1262 at the third revolution etc this lateral movement will be omitted in the mechanism according to Fig 33.

In Fig 32 the discharge tube 218, by means of which the coils were excited, was ignited 85 during one revolution only and remained extinguished during the other revolutions, but in Fig 33, one of the discharge tubes 244 will be ignited during every counting revolution These discharge tubes, in the same way 90 as the discharge tube 218 in Fig 32, will excite the energizing of the co-ordinated sets of coils The only difference is, that for every digit-value, one discharge tube and a set of coils " 0 to 9 " has been co-ordinated 95 In the case where a " O " should be added to the digit-value " 6," set in the last denomination of the full keyboard according to Fig. 35, the discharge tube 244 will be ignited. By this ignition, the primary coil 240 ', co 100 ordinated to the " 6 " will be excited and if the magnetic yoke 126 passes, a voltage surge will be induced in the secondary coils 250, connected in series, at the instant at which the respective field of the rotor passes the record 105 ing head 179, recording the addition " 6 " 1 + 0 " = cc 6 " If, however, the addition " 6 + 1 = 7 " has to be performed, the discharge tube 2441 is ignited according to the second digit to be 110 added, viz 1 As the magnetic yoke 126 ' is displaced angularly relative to the magnetic yoke 126 by one digit value unit, the " 7 " corresponding to the sum of the digit values will be recorded on the signal carrier by the 115 recording head 179. The ignition of the discharge tube 244 is effected by the upper set of coils 238/239 by means of the magnetic yoke 126. If the voltage surge of a digit value signal 120 is imparted to the grid of pentode 87 and amplified, the discharge tube 237 will be ignited via the coupling member 236; the discharge tube 237 together with the capacitor 233 represents a tilting switching The 125 capacitor has been biassed closely below ignition voltage by a resistance. At the moment of the ignition of discharge tube 237 the capacitor 233 discharge itself via the primary coils 238 of the set of coils A 130 786,044 values exceeds the limiting value, the sensing head 312 will be connected by the armature 47 of the relay with the grid of the pentode 67. When the magnetic yoke 1260 passes the 70 coils 238/239 at the beginning of the next digit column, and if the sensing is done via the sensing head 312, that pair of the coils 239, which is "higher" by one unit will be excited, and tube of discharge 244 9 which 75 is "higher" by one digit will be ignited, and thus the digit value carry-over into the next denomination will be terminated. If higher speeds are required, the polarized relay would have to be replaced by an elec 80 tronic relay.

* Sitemap * Accessibility * Legal notice * Terms of use * Last updated: 08.04.2015 * Worldwide Database * 5.8.23.4; 93p

* GB786045 (A)

Description: GB786045 (A) ? 1957-11-13

Improvements in or relating to electric calculators

Description of GB786045 (A)

A high quality text as facsimile in your desired language may be available amongst the following family members:

DE1021188 (B) US3403385 (A) US3530285 (A) DE1021188 (B) US3403385 (A) US3530285 (A) less Translate this text into Tooltip

[83][(1)__Select language] Translate this text into

The EPO does not accept any responsibility for the accuracy of data and information originating from other authorities than the EPO; in particular, the EPO does not guarantee that they are complete, up-to-date or fit for specific purposes.

PATENT SPECIFICATION 786,045 Date of Application and filing Complete Specification June 23, 1950. No 37227/54. Application made in Germany an Oct I, 1948 V t i) D (Divided out of No 786,021). Complete Specification Published Nov 13,1957. Index at acceptance: -Class 106 ( 11), A(IX: 2 C: 5 A: g EB: GC 8 B: 9 X: LOB).

International Classification: -GO 6 f. COMPLETE SPECIFICATION Improvenments in or relating to Electric Calculators We, GERHARD Di Rms, of Moerfelder Landstrasse, 44, Frankfurt on Main, Germany, of German Nationality, do hereby declare the invention, for which I pray that a patent may be granted to me, and the method by which it is to be performed, to be particularly described in and by the following statement: - This invention relates to electrical calculating apparatus. It is an object of the present invention to provide an electrical calculating apparatus utilising a plurality of number storages from which values may be entered into a computing arrangement and into which computed result values may be entered. It is a further object to arrange that such number storages are operated in synchronism in such a way that the same denominational orders of various numbers held in the number storages are available for reading out at the same time. According to one feature of the invention, electrical calculating apparatus includes a plurality of cylically operating signal storages, each storage comprising a magnetisable storage surface being adapted to store signals representing one or more multi-denominational numbers, read out means for each storage adapted to read out in succession the stored signals representing the successive denominations of a number, the denominational significance of a signal being determined by the time in the storage cycle at which the signal is read out, the storages being operated in synchronism so that the same denomination of different numbers is available to the read out means of the different storages at the same time, means for controlling a computing arrangement by electrical signals derived from at least one of said read out means and means for entering result signals from the computing arrangement into one of said signal storages. According to another feature of the invention, electrical calculating apparatus includes a rotatable signal storage number with a maglPrice netisable surface which is notionally divided into a plurality of number storage tracks, each track comprising the same number of sectors, signals representing the successive denomina 50 tions of a number being recorded in successive sectors of a track, signal sensing and recording means, for each track, which are so positioned relative to the storage member that at any particular time they are adapted to sense, or 55 record, respectively in sectors having the same denominational significance in the various tracks, means for controlling a computing arrangement by electrical signals derived from at least one of said sensing means and means 60 for applying result

signals from the computing arrangement to one of said recording means. The calculating apparatus described in this specification is also described wholly or in part in Specifications Nos 15773/50, 37226/54 and 65 37231/54 (Serial Nos 786,021, 784,044 and 786,049) but the scope of the claims differs in each case. The invention will now be described by way of example with reference to the accompanying 70 drawings, in which:Fig 1 is a diagrammatic view of a signal storage disc with a magnetisable surface, various signal storage positions being indicated for the purpose of explanation; 75 Figs 2 a-2 e show various forms of magnetic signal heads; Fig 3 shows diagrammatically various signal sensing and recording heads in association with the disc of Fig 1; 20 Figs 4 a and 4 b and 5 a-5 c are schematic representations of signal tracks to illustrate the transfer of values between tracks; Figs 6 a-6 c illustrate the recording of a value on a signal track under the joint control 85 of another track and a keyboard; Figs 7 a-7 c illustrate the recording of an intermediate sum value on a signal track; Figs 8 a-8 c illustrate an arrangement for recording a digit on either of two tracks in 90 accordance with whether or not a carry is required; 786,045 Figs 9 a-9 c illustrate the recording of the final sum value on a result track; Figs 10 a and 10 b illustrate a subtraction operation; Figs lia-11 c show various forms of amplifier and gating circuits for selectively operating a plurality of recording heads; Figs lid-llf are views of a distributor arm and an inductive distributor; Fig Ilg shows another form of amplifying and gating circuit employing the distributor of Fig h f; Fig Ilk shows an amplifying circuit using electronic switches controlled by a distributor; Figs 12 a-12 d show amplifying and gating circuits used for selective recording in accordance with the presence or absence of a carry; Figs 13 a-13 c show further amplifying and gating circuits for effecting addition; Figs 14 a-14 c show amplifying and gating circuits utilised in effecting subtraction; and Figs 15 a and 15 b show amplifying and gating circuits for handling a subtractive carry. Fig 1 shows a magnetic signal storage device in the form of a disc 7 The disc is mounted on a shaft 18 which is continuously driven by a suitable motor, for example, in the manner shown in my co-pending Application No. 15773/50 (Serial No 786,021) The disc has a magnetisable surface, which may be in the form of a magnetisable layer on the disc if the disc itself is of non-magnetic material. As Fig 1 shows, the disc must be thought to be sub-divided not only into the said different sectors I-XIII corresponding to the different denominations of a given number, but also in such a way, that each

sector is subdivided into digit areas or fields representing different digit values The denominational area of sector I is for the recording of the digit values in the last denomination of a number; sector II is for the recording of digit values in the penultimate denomination of that number; sector III is for the recording of digit values in the ante-penultimate denomination of the number, and so on. Fig 1 shows also that, within each denomination area or sector there are different groups of digit-areas or fields, these being indicated in sector 1 as fields 0-9; 10-19; 20-39 To illustrate the way in which signals of different digit-values in any denomination in a number are recorded on the magnetisable disc 7, one must understand that, in each sector, the digitvalue " O " will always be in the field " O "; digit-value " 1 " will always be in the field " 1 "; digit-value " 2 " will always be in the field " 2 "; digit-value " 3 " will always be in the field " 3 "; digit-value " 4 " will always be in the field " 4 "; digit-value " 5 " will always be in the field " 5 "; and so on, and digit-value " 9 " will always be in the field " 9 " The fields 10-19 are provided for intermediate recordings and the fields 20-39 to allow for processing time. The number 28 therefore, would be recorded in track a as shown in Fig 1 in such a way that there is an " 8 " digit-value signal recorded within the field " 8 " in track a of sector I, whereas a digit-value signal " 2 " is 70 recorded in the field " 2 " track a of sector II, and digit-value " O " is recorded within field " O " track a of sector III, and further digitvalues " O " are recorded within the fields " O " of all the remaining sectors of the said track a 75 It is further to be seen from Fig 1 that the magnetisable layer may be regarded as divided into side-by-side concentric tracks a-e; fr-. in and n, the said digit-value signals corresponding to " 28 " being shown in track a 80 During relative movement between the disc 7 and signal heads, the said different tracks are traversed by these heads, which have recording, sensing and erasing means, the respective heads being fixed within the stator in appro 85 priate positions. Whereas the tracks a, c, d and e are represented generally as single tracks in the example now being described, the tracks b and f 1-f, are shown as a plurality of sub-tracks, each 90 being traversable by a recording, sensing and erasing head, these heads being either movable from track to track or more usually there being signal heads for each track which can be switched on and off as required The sub-divid 95 ing of track b is illustrated fully in Figs 4 a and 4 b. Within the tracks c and d there are interruptions in the magnetisable layer Within each sector a magnetisable layer is present 100 wci&;n track c only w Pitin the fields 0-9, whereas it is present within track d only within the fields 10-19 The non-magnetisable portions of

these tracks are shown cross hatched. Tn addition to the tracks a-e, which are 105 used for the processing of digit-value signals there are two further tracks mz and 11 which contaii permanenit signals In track N in each sector there is such a signal in field 0, and in track m 7 in each sector there are permanent 1 l( signals in the fields 0-9 These permanent signals are sensed by a sensing head, whereby from track N in each sector a zero signal can be put into the fieldl " O " of for example track a, and track m provides registering signals for 11 I use during computation proceedings as described below. The recording, sensing and erasing of the magnetic signals on to and from the disc can be carried out in any manner known from mag 12 t netic tape sound technology and the like. Examples of signal heads and their manner of use are described in my copending Application No 37214/54 (Serial No 786,033). Fig 2 a shows a usual magnet head in dia 12 grammatic representation In particular, the iron core 25 is shown with a slot 26 and a winding 27, the head overlying the magnetic layer 28 of the disc 7 A magnetic flux in the head induced by an electric current within the 13 ( 786,045 winding 27 flows through the arms of the iron core 25 and partly through the magnetic layer 28 and thereby brings about an increased magnetic saturation of this layer, and the remanent magnetising-eflect within the magnetisable layer 28 constitutes a signal which may be of any of the known recordable types. The sensing of such magnetically recorded signals takes place in the reverse manner, by means of sensing heads or sensing windings in the same heads as the recording windings A magnetic signal which passes the slot 26 of a sensing head brings about a change of voltage within the winding of that head, which constitutes a signal and which when amplified can be used for computation or control functions or the like. Erasing takes place mainly by means of energizing an erasing head by a high-frequency current Alternatively, the erasing could take place by a suitable direct current erasing head, which would saturate the magnetic layer and again demagnetize it to bring about the original condition of such layer The sensing and recording heads may, as shown in Figs 2 b2 c, be mechanically united into a set of two or more heads In this case the sensing can take place with the aid of a sensing head and the subsequent recording with the aid of a recording head if they are connected to each other over signal transmission means, for example, an amplifier If the sensing and recording slots 26 and 26 ' of this combination of heads are in alignment radially of the disc then a magnetic signal passing the sensing head is transmitted from the sensed track to the corresponding field in the track under the

recording head 30 and therefore with the same digit value, since the slots 26 and 261 are not displaced angularly relative to each other as showvn later on in Fig 5 b If the slots 26 and 26 ' are mutually displaced angularly, then with such a transfer of a signal from the sensed track to the track under the recording head 30 a change of position angularly of the disc will take place in the same sector, and therefore with a change of digit value of the signal (see Fig 7 c). Fig 2 b shows two signal heads 29-30 positioned side-by-side in such a way that the slot 26 of the sensing head 29 is distant from the slot 261 of the recording head 30 by one field in the direction of the relative movement between the heads and the magnetizable layer. Fig 2 c shows a combined set of one sensing head 31 with slot 31 and ten recording heads 32 with slots 32 -329 by means of which the transfer of signals from one track to other tracks can be effected in such manner that any pre-determined changing of the position of the signal on the signal-carrier, e g, the magnetizable disc 7 can take place The slot 31 of the sensing head 31 is in the same angular position as the slot 32 ' of the first of the recording heads 32, the slots 31 ', 32 ' 32 ' of the other recording heads being progressively advanced angularly with respect to that of the previous recording heads by the extent of one digit value field. Fig 2 d represents the same set of heads as 70 shown in Fig 2 c but in the working position relatively to a magnetizable signal carrier or record means in the form of a disc, namely disc 7, this set of heads being able to change the position of signals in dependence on switches 75 (not show Fn) and operating with one sensed track a and a track b divided into ten subtracks arranged side-by-side. Fig 2 e shows an alternative arrangement in which such a set of heads operates with only 80 two tracks a and b, track b not being subdivided The disc lies in the slots of the heads, these being in line and signals are sensed in track a and recorded in track b The arrangement shown in Fig 2 d has the advantage that 85 the several slots can be arranged much closer to each other, whereas the arrangement shown in Fig 2 e is that it requires no more space for track b than for track a. As shown in Fig 3 the signal heads are 90 arranged as a stator over the rotating disc 7. There are different sets of signal heads to be seen The signal head 31 is for the sensing of signals within track a, from whence these signals are picked up and are transferred by sig 95 nal-transmission means, which are switchable, to the recording heads 32 '-32 ' over the respective sub-tracks in track b These elements for transferring signals from track a to track b are the digit-value-processing means 100 The sets of signal heads 33-38 are the signal heads of carry-over

means Of these the signal heads 33-34 are for separating or distinguishing between signals on track b which are equal to or lower than a denominational 105 limit value, for example, digit value 9, and thoswe on l:rac; b which excezd that limiting value, the former being recorded on track c and the latter on track d Signal heads 35 are for the performance of the carry-over of the 110 digit value " 1 " from the preceding denomination. The transfer from the tracks c and d to the track c is elfected by the signal heads 36-38. When transferring from track c to track e there 115 is no change of digit-value, whereas when transferring from track d to track e value diminishing means are provided comprising signal heads 37-38 There are provided also means which determine whether, within the next 120 denomination, the recording heads 34 or 35 shall operate, dependent upon whether or not there are signals in track d for transfer to track c Only one arrangement of these sets of signal heads is provided irrespective of the 125 number of sectors on the rotating disc such one arrangement processing different denominations in succession. The tracks f-hi of Fig 1 are for the recording of the results of 12 numbers, that is 1 R O 786,045 to say, for example, the calculator with twelve tracks fi-f is a twelve-number calculator. By enlarging the size of the disc or by arranging a second or more discs moving together in synchronism it is possible to have as many signal-tracks as are required for any number of numbers. As there is high-speed relative movement between the record means and the signal heads, there is an air gap between the relatively moving parts preventing friction, but determining a recording and/or sensing of signals in the required frequency and intensity. Fig 4 a shows diagrammatically the different fields on the rotating disc in which signals can be recorded, whereas Fig 4 b shows in which different fields of the stator the sensing, recording and erasing heads are prodived Both these diagrams show the different sectors as reetangles in order to have enough room to show exactly the different fields in which the signals are to be recorded, and in which the different signal heads are arranged For convenience the tracks f,-f are omitted from Figs 4 a and 4 b their purpose being similar to that of track e. Fig 4 a also shows diagrammatically the different sectors, fields and tracks of the magnetizable disc 7, used as a signal carrier or record means Four sectors of a thirteen-sector disc are shown, placed next to one another as rectangles, the third from the left reperesenting the identical sectors Im-XII The complete signal carrier comprises the thirteen sectors, of which the sectors I-XII are used as record means, for processing up to twelve denominations The diagram shows sector II

at the right of sector I, but it is to be understood that on the disc sector II is arranged in sequence to sector I, so that the fields 0-40 of the sector I have their continuation in the fields 0-40 of the sector II, which lead again in continuation to the 40 fields of a sector Il I, and so on and finally to the fields of the sector XII and then to the switching sector III. The permanent signals for " zero " in track n and for registering purposes in the fields 0-9 of track in, which are used as signal generators in combination with sensing heads, S are indicated by stroke markings with the fields of the track mn and n Within track a is shown the recording of the number 028 by means of signals within the field 8 of sector I, being the signal for thfe last -&nommaton 8 ef this number 028, and W tin field 2 of sector H, being the sigral fc" the penultimate denomination 2 of such number; both such signals being indica cdi in the diagram Fig 4 a by hatched fields in the track a In the following sectors IIIXII there would be signals only in the fields 0 of tract ac and the complete recording wvould therefore represent the number 000800000023. Corresponding in position to the ten recording heads 32 of the digit value displacement arrangement the track b is made up into ten sub-tracks, this as above stated allowing of an easier construction and arrangement of the sets of signal heads with their slots in a small angular distance 70 Within the fields 0-9 of the tracks c and d there is a magnetizable layer in track c only, whereas in track d the said fields are not magnetizable, the layer being absent The crosswise hatched lines indicate that there is no 75 possibility for recording within the fields as indicated, as in these the layer is removed in order to separate signals having a digit value equal to and lower than 9 and which are recorded on track c, from those whose digit 80 value is higher than 9 and are recorded on track d For the same reason there is no magnefizable layer within the fields 10-19 in track c, whereas the same fields in track d can magnetized Finally ttac-k v constitutes the 85 result track. Fig 4 b shows diagrammatically an example of the arrangement of the signal heads within the stator For indicatipn the different types of signal head the following symbols are used: 90 + a recording head o a sensing head a non-switching erasing head and C a switchable erasing head. This diagram makes it possible to describe 95 by means of symbols the exact Position of the signal heads within the stator, and the different kinds of signal heads. To facilitate the description, the following symbols will be used A signal head of t'n 100 stator within sector I, track a, field 9, is

symbolized e g in all the following diagrams by: I a 9; a signal head of the stator within sector I, tract b, field 9 is s-ymbolized e g in all the following diagrams by 1 b 9 etc 105 In order to simplify the descrip-ricnti of the position of the sianal heads arranged within the stator, their position is indicated by a combined symbolism of letters and figre; The Roman figure: indicates che sectzro c the states 110 in which the signal head is to bh found the small following letter indicates the track in which the signal head is situated and the figure finally indicates the field within the sectvr of the track in which the slot of the signal head 115 is situated. " I a 9 " indicates, therefore, that the slot, of this signal head is in sector IL track, and field 9 of the stator. In the stator there are provided sensing and 120 recording heads for the following process:COMPUTING PROCESS ( 1): DIGIT VALUE PROCESSING. This process effects the change of the digit value of a signal in dependence of another 125 digit value The means for this process co -nprise sensing heads 32 -9 in the stator fields I b 0 to I b 9 for the signal transfer from track a to track b, see A in Fig 4 b. 786,045 COMPUTING PROCESSES ( 2)-( 5): CARRYOVER PROCESSES. COMPUTING PROCESS ( 2), Within this process is effected the statement, whether the resulting sum of the digit values of the respective denomination exceeds the limiting value, and further, on the carryover forwarding by a correction of the resulting digit value by " 1 " in dependence on a carryover pre-mark signal of the preceding denomination. The means for this computing process comprise sensing head 33 in stator position I b 19, recording heads 34 ' and 343 in stator positions I c 19 and I d 19 and the recording heads 35 ' and 352 in stator positions l c 18 and I d 18 for the signal transfer from track b to track c or d. (B of Fig 4 b). COMPUTING PROCESS ( 3) The unchanged transfer of the digit value signals, if the sum of the digit values does not exceed the limiting value, the means for this process 3 comprising sensing head 36 in stator position II c 5 and recording head 38 in stator position II e 5, for the signal transfer from track c to track e (C of Fig 4 b). COMPUTING PROCESS ( 4) The digit value diminishing within the same denomination and the pre-marking of a carryover as correction of a resulting digit value in the following denomination is effected by the means of this process, if the resulting sum of the digit value exceeds the limiting value. The means of this process comprise sensing head 37 in stator position

I d 35 and recording head 38 in stator position II e 5 for the signal transfer from track d to track e (D of Fig 4 b). COMPUTING PROCESS ( 5) The addition of the " fugitive one " in subtraction and the re-transfer to track a The means for this process are the sensing head 58 in stator position XIII e 19 and the recording heads 59 and 60 in stator positions X 1 I a 19 and XIII a 18 for the signal transfer from track e to track a (E of Fig 4 b). Erasing heads are provided in the stator positions II a-d 19 and XIII e 39 The erasing heads in the tracks b and e are uncontrolled. They automatically erase the signals from these tracks after they have been processed. The erasing head in track a is effective only during addition or subtraction processes It is provided with a compensation winding, by which the erasing effect can be moved if no further addition or subtraction is to be effected, for several rotations may run through without processing, for instance, in multiplication or division or if, instead of computing, sensing for indicating the result is to be effective. During a co-operation with the selective storage it is likewise necessary to make use of controlled erasing heads in tracks which are to receive signals from the selective storage or are to deliver signals for the result and the like into storage. COMPUTING PROCESSES FOR ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION. 1 DIGIT VALUE PROCESSING IN ADDITION Computing by means of such a signal carrier or record means and signal heads depends on 70 the changing of the position of signals on the signal carrier, in this case the magnetizable disc 7 The description of the computing processes therefore requires first an explanation as to how the signals representing the digit 75 values in a number are recorded A part of the track a of the signal carrier is therefore shown enlarged and elongated in the various diagrams of Pigs Sa-5 c. Fig 5 a shows two sectors of the track, a 80 (sectors 1 and Ii) for the recording of the last and penultimate denominations or the number ( 128, and the subdivision oi these two sectors into tour times ten fields The sectors are noted with Roman figures I and Il, starting with the 85 iast denomination of a number which is to be represented Thus, for example, for the recording of the number 028 sector I is provided for the recording of the signal of the last denomination, which is in this case the digit value 8, 90 whereas the signal which represents the digit value; of the penultimate denomination of this number is recorded within the sector IL. The next sectors 11/IV etc record only signals in the fields for the digit value 0 95 The recording of a signal representing the digit value 08 takes place

within the field 8 of the first quarter of the sector I by means of an increased or otherwise altered remanence of the magnetizable layer or in any other suitable 100 known manner (e g a change of amplitude, frequency, phase, etc) The recording of the digit value 2 (penultimate digit) takes place in a corresponding manner by means of a magnetic signal within the field 2 of the first quarter of 105 the sector II With numbers which contain more than two denominations signals for the corresponding digit values are recorded in the remaining sectors; in this example (" 028 ") the digit value 0 is recorded in the remaining 110 sectors. For the transfer of signals in a sector from one track to another, for instance from track a to track b a sensing head is located within the track a and a recording head is located within 115 the track b In Fig Sb two such signal heads are connected over an amplifier If the slot of the sensing head 29 and of the recording head 30, as shown in this example, are in the tracks a and b respectively but in the same 120 line of stator fields and within the same sector, signals recorded in tracks a with the record means rotating in the direction of the arrow, are sensed from track a, and transferred to track b without a change of their digit value 125 position In Fig 5 b the signal 8 is being sensed 786,045 within the track a in exactly the same moment when the field 8 of track b passes below the slot of the recording head 30 as the two slots of the sensing and recording heads are in the same line of fields, whereby the sensed signal for 8 on track a is recorded again as a signal for 8 on track b With further movement of the signal carrier to the extent of one sector, the digit value 2 in the track a in the sector II, that is the penultimate denomination of the number 028 is likewise transferred unchanged in value on to track b as a magnetic signal in field 2 of the sector II, since sector II, field 2, track a of the rotor passes a iow the slot of the sensing head 29 just at the moment when sector II field 2 of the track b is below the slot of the recording head 30. If, however, as demonstrated in Fig Sc the slot of the sensing head 29 is displaced from the slot of the recording head 30 by one field, for example, if the slot of this recording head is just over the field 9 of the sector I, then the magnetic signal of track a in field 'U induces a voltage in the sensing head, and the recording head produces a magnetic signal in the magnetizable layer, of track b and in a position altered by one field compared with the original signal in track a. By means of this displacement of the heads by one field, the signals when being transferred from track a to track b are changed in position so that the digit value of the signal sensed on track a is increased by " one " on transfer to track b. Figs 6 a-6 c shows the computing

process of " 000 "+ " 028 "=" 028 " Tlhe Fig 6 a shows the keyboard 1 with the different vertical and horizontal rows of contacts The horizontally connected contacts 16-160 indicate the different digit-values 0-9, whereas the vertical rows of contacts 15 '-15 ' indicate the different denominations, for example, 15 ' is the row of contacts for the last or unit denomination of a number, 152 is the row for the penultimate or tens denomination of the number, ' is the row for the hundreds denomination, and so on In Figs 6 a-6 c the full keyboard 1 shows that in the last denomination there is pressed down the key " 8 ", which has made a contact between the horizontal contact line 16 ' and the vertical contact line 15 ', such contact being maintained so long as this key is kept down In the contact row for the penultimate denomination, there is pressed down the key " 2 " which connects the horizontal contact line 16 ' for the digit value 2 with the vertical contact line 152 Therefore within the full keyboard, the number 28 is introduced into the calculator As there are no keys pressed down in the preceding vertical rows of contacts 153' there is indicated an " O " because contacts below row 16 are normally connected but are separated when and so long as another key in the same vertical row is pressed down Also, Fig 6 a shows the sector switch 22 with peripheral contacts 39 '-39 and a centre contact This contact 40 is connected to the anode circuit of the amplifier 41 which amplifies signals from the sensing head 31 which, as shown, is sensing a signal in track a at slot 31 ' The 70 peripheral contacts 39 '-39 ' are connected to the respective vertical contact rows 151-15 ' as shown and are wiped by the contact 42 which rotates with the sector switch. in Fig 6 a the arm 42 is wiping the peri 75 pheral contact 39 ' and at that instant only digit values in the vertical row 151 can be processed. Fig 6 a also shows that the sensing head 31 over track a of the rotating disc 7 is sensing the signal ' " O ' in the digit value field O " 80 of sector I, which signal is transferred over the amplifier 41 to the centre contact 40 of the sector switch 22 and wiping arm 42 to the peripheral contact 391 thence to the vertically connected contacts in row 15 ' and through the 55 closed contact below the depressed key " 8 " via thie horizontal connection i 6 to one side of the winding of the recording head having the slot 32-, see also Fig zc-2 a There is thus recorded in track b a signal in field 8 of sector 90 I representing the computation 01-8 = 8 ", effected by the digit value processing means. The other side of the winding of the recording head is connected back to the amplifier 41 again Instead or zero signals being sensed from 95 track a they may be, in certain cases, sensed on track N and conveyed

to the amplifier 41, the alternatives being determined by tne switch 43. Fig 6 b shows the same processing means for 10 dealing with the digit values '0 2 = 2 " or " 00 + 20 = 20 " of the penultimate denomination of the number 028 There is again shown the keyboard 1 with pressed down keys " 20 " and " 8 " so that, within the penultimate ver 10. tical contact row 152 the key " 2 " is pressed down to close the contacts below it By this means there is a connection between the vertical contact row 15 ' and the horizontal contact rowi 162 Within the sector II the sensing 11 ( head 31, after passing over the area of sector a, senses a signal 0 in the track al (or i) which, through the amplifier 41, the sector switch 22 and the contacts 39 of the depressed key is transmitted to the recording head with slot 11 ' 32 ', whereby a signal is recorded in track b in field 2 representing the computation " 00 + = 20 " In the same manner, sectors III, IV and V and so on in track b receive a zero signal transmitted through an amplifier 41, sec 12 i tor switch 22 and the normally closed contacts in rows 15 '-15 ', representing the computations " 000 + 000 = 000 " according to Fig 6 c. Figs 7 a-7 c show the digit-value processing (without subsequent carry-over) for the addi 12 tion of the numbers:" O 2 8 + O 9 1 = O 11 9 " 786,045 within the sectors III, II, I for the three last denominations of numbers 028 and 091. Fig 7 a shows sector I of the tracks a and b during that instant of the relative movement between signal carrier and signal heads, when sector 1 field 8 of track a is below the slot 31 of the sensing head which is in the position I a 9 in the stator (see Fig 4 b). Over the track b there is again shown the set of the ten recording heads with their slots 32 "-32 " each displaced by one field from the next within the stator positions I b 9 to I b 0. These recording heads receive electric signals induced in the sensing head 31 and transmitted via the amplifier 41, the sector switch 22 and the contacts of key " 1 ", (representing the last denomination of the number 91) and the horizontal connection 161 to recording head with slot 32 l representing the computation " 8 + 1 = 9 " As the slot 32 ' of the energized recording head is displaced from the slot 310 of the sensing head by one field, the magnetic signal of the recorded digit value on to track b will in this case be " 9 ", instead of the sensed digit value " 8 " The displacement by one field effects an addition of " 1 " by these processing means These processing means are referred to in the following description as "amplifying circuit A ". With the further relative movement of the rotor with respect to the signal heads, a magnetic signal in the sector II, field 2, of track a

(digit value of the penultimate digit of the number " 28 ") passes under the slot 31 P of the sensing head This moment is shown in Fig 7 b. As 20 and 90 are now to be added the recording head 329 is switched in within the sector II of the disc 7 so that the magnetic signal " 2 " in sector II track a is changed in position by 9 fields when transferred from track a to track b and is recorded as " 11 " in sector II of track b. As on the further relative movement of the rotor by one sector, the recording head becomes effective in sector IHI, in dependence on the connection of the horizontal line 16 to the vertical row 153 for the third-last denomination of the number, and the sensing head 31 in the position I a 9 of the stator is connected with the recording head 32 in position I b 9 via the amplifier 41, sector switch 22 and the zero contacts in row 16 of the keyboard 1, so that there is no changing of digit value position during the signal transfer from track a to track b. The means for changing the digit value position of signals during transfer from track to track are called in the following description value-processing means They operate within the example so far described during a transfer from track a to track b The result received on track b by an addition of " 0: 2: 8 to 0: 9: 1 " by means of the set of signal heads 31-32 in combination with the digit value switches in lines 160-169 and the amplifier 41 will be " 0:11:9 " These signals are recorded in track b as an intermediate result of the computing processes effected by the processing means as shown in Figs 7 a-7 c In order to transform this intermediate result " 0: 11:9 " into the final result " 1: 1: 9 " a carry-over is 70 still essential and is efiected by carry-over means operating in this example during signal transfer from track b to tracks c and d and from those tracks to track e. The several phases of these processes may be 75 brought together by corresponding switch means and the like As it is possible, however, to demonstrate in this example the different operations in different phases, the following description will explain this 80 2 CARRY-OVER The carry-over means which is illustrated dio-grainmatically in Figs 8 a-8 c and 9 a-9 c consists of signal-separating means, valuediminishing means, and signal-iorwarding means. a CASES EXCEEDING THE LIMITING VALUE AND FORWARDING THE CARRY-OVER INTO THE NEXT DENOMINATION. The separating means are for separating sig 90 nals representing resulting digit values equal to or lower than a pre-determined digit value (e.g, " 9 ") from signals representing resulting digit values

which are higher than such predetermined digit value They comprise, in the 95 example now described, means for a signal transfer from track b to tracks c and d; usually sensing head 33, the recording heads 34 '342, the amplifier, non-magnetizable areas 45 in the fields " 10-19 " of track c and non 100 magnetizable area 46 in the fields " 0-9 " of track d, and also two recording heads 35 '352, being distant from the recording heads 341-342 by one field in each case and being effective as forwarding means, if a carry-over 105 of " 1 " into the next sector has to be effected. The transfer of signals from track b, to the track c or d takes place via " the amplifier circuit B " which consists of the amplifier 44, the forwarding switch 47 having two ways 48 and 110 49, a sensing head 33 in the position I b 19 in the stator, two recording heads 34 I-342 in the positions I c 19 and I d 19 within the stator for the separating of signals and two further recording heads 35 '-352, being distant from 115 the recording heads 34 '-34 ' by one field in each case and being effective as means for forwarding the value " 1 " if a carry-over into the next sector has to be effected The recording heads 341-34 are connected in parallel 120 and connected to switch way 48 whilst 351352 are in parallel and connected to switch way 4-9 of the forwarding switch 47 All the signal heads are suitable mounted fixedly on the frame 21 125 By means of the chequered arrangement of magnetizable and non-magnetizable areas 4546 of the tracks c and d, the recording of any 786,045 one signal can only take place either in the track c or in the track d since at any one instant there is only one of the slots in each pair of the recording heads 34 I-342 and 351 '35 over a magnetizable layer Within the tracks c and a signals of digit values lower than or equal to 9, are therefore always recordable only on the track c, whereas digit value signals exceeding " 9 " are always recordable oily on the track a. In Fig 8 a the separating of the signal 9 " sensed irom the track b in sector I is effective during the transfer of that signal irom track b to trac Ls c ancd a onmy in traca c, not-wicthstanding that it is presented to both tracks, and the ellect is that the signal 9 " of track b is now recorded in the field position " 9 " on the track c whilst on track d no recording can take place. H the forwarding switch 4 hi were in switch position 49, it would connect the amplifier 44 with the second pair of recording heads 351352 In such event a forwarding o G the signal 9;' from track b wouwd t aze place, so that there would be a change of digit value position by " 1 " and a signal 10 " in track a would result This forwarding switch 47 as is described later with reference to Figs 12 a-12 d, may consist of a plurality of electronic tubes but alternatively could consist of relays or other suitable switch means.

Fig 8 b shows the separating of the magnetic signal " 11 " sensed from track b in sector II, after a rotation of the disc 7 by one sector. As a magnetizable layer in field " 11 " is provided in the track d only, a transfer of a signal " 11 " from the track b to the tracks c and d can only be effective on track a, in field '11 " in sector II of that track. With the procedure described hitherto in the example " 028 + 091 = 119 ", the first sum 028 is still in track a During the transfer from track a to track b, namely, during the value changing by the processing means, there has taken place a changing of the digit value position by one field because of the pressed down key " 1 " in the last denomination row 15 ' of the keyboard 1 having been effective within sector I of the magnetizable disc, as controlled by the sector switch 22 (see Fig 7 a). After a relative movement by one sector there has taken place within sector II a changing of the digit value position of the signal 2 in a by "nine" fields because of the pressed down key " 9 " in the penultimate denomination row 15 ' of the keyboard 1, " 028 + 091 = 0:11:9 " having been effected within the sector H as controlled by the sector switch 22 (Fig 7 b). Within sector III no change of signal position has taken place during this transfer from track a to track b as the sector switch 22 has made only zero contacts effective (see Fig 2 c). After the separating means has been effective in the three different sectors, according to Figs 8 a-8 c during a transfer from track b to tracks c and d, the signals are now to be found in the tracks a, b, c and d as follows: Track Sector III Sector II Sector I a 0 2 8 b 0 11 9 c 1 9 d b '7 ON-DIMINISHING OR DIMINISHING THE DIGIT VALUE IN THE SAME DENOMINATION. To complete the processing a diminishing 75 means is required Such means is operated during a transier of the signals from the tracks c and a to the result track e, as shown in Figs. 9 a-9 c This transfer is efected in such a way that two sensing heads 36-37 are connected So respectively via the amplifiers 50 and 51 to the windings Gf the recording head 38 The sensing head 36 is in position II c 5 over track c, whereas the recording nead is in the stator position Ii e 5 over the track c Therefore, sig 85 nals on she trackl c are transferred to the track c with the same digit value For example, in Fig 9 a, the transferring of the signal 9 " in sector i from track c to track c is shown. The diminishing means consists of two go amplifier circuits, the amplifier circuit C, by which those signal are transferred from track c to track e when no diminishing is to take place, and the amplifier circuit D for transferring signals from track d to track e, whilst 95

at the same time diminishing them in digit value by a corresponding change of digit value position The extent by which diminishing takes place (diminishing value) depends upon the limiting value For example, in decimal 100 notation it would be by 10 fields, and in converting pence to shillings it would be by 12 fields, and so on. The amplifier circuit C consists of a winding of the recording head 38 in the stator posi 105 tion II c 5, the amplifier 50 and the sensing head 36 over the track c in position ii c 5 The amplifier circuit D consists of another or the same winding on sensing head 33 in the stator position II c 5, the amplifier 51 and the sens 110 ing head 37 which is distant by 10 fields irom the recording head 38 over track d in the stator position I d 35 The amplifier circuit D controls the carry-over forwarding switch 47 of circuit B and which moves over from position 115 48 to position 49, dependent upon whether signals are being sensed from track c or track d. As with the further rotation o X the disc 7 the magnetic signal 5 '11 " runs below the slot of the sensing head 37 of the amplifier circuit 120 D, there takes place, on the transfer from track d to track e, a field displacement (change of digit value position) of the signal by ten fields so that the magnetic signal " 11 " on track d is recorded in track e diminished to the value 125 " 1 ", in field 1 of track e (Fig 9 b) This transfer effects also the ignition of the gas discharge tube 52 of the forwarding switch 47 and by energizing the relay winding 53 effects a 686,045 switching over from the way 48 to the way 49 so that on the transfer from track b to track c or track d the signal is forwarded into the next sector III. The transfer from tracks c and d to track e within sector III is shown in Fig 9 c In Fig. 7 c there has been shown the operating of the processing means with amplifier circuit A durmg a -: 10 accor On ti show over over sectoe ing s III f 1 mear chanj the s erase posit resp( opern so fl foun T 3 T. ferre trans are I tranl A sivel num nunm proc tracl only wise mor para A that wise imnr atin nun that stats mon pass cess cerr I ing during the next denomination area of the signal carrier (that is during the rotation of the next sector past the signal heads for processing the next denomination of the same number) can include a forwarding of a signal from the previous denomination area. signal transfer from track a to track b 3 DIGIT VALUE PROCESSING DURING ding to the computation: " O + 0 = 0 " SUBTRACTION 70 he transfer from track b to tracks c and d Subtraction with the machine according to n in Fig 8 c the forwarding of the carry this invention is carried out preferably by the signal " 1 " was controlled by a tens carry addition of complementary digit values, and is signal from the

previous denomination in illustrated in Figs 10 a-10 b For this purpose r II, via the switch way 49 of the forward the recording heads 32 -329 used as part of 75 witch 47 the processing means during the transfer of ow the transfer of the signal " 1 " in sector signals from track a to track b are each prorom track c to track e, takes place by vided with an additional winding, and whereas Ls of the amplifier circuit C without any the one end of the normal winding on each ge of digit value position, and therefore head is connected to the key contacts having 80 ignal " 1 " is recorded in track e the digit value which that head represents, the O the further rotation of the disc 7 the corresponding end of the additional windings :r heads 61-64 (see Figs 3 and 4 b stator is connected to the key contacts having the ions II a-d 19) of the tracks a, b, c and d complementary digit value For example, in ctively which are permanently effective, head 32 ', one end of the normal winding goes 85 ate to remove the signal in those tracks, to key contacts 168 in row 9 ' and the corresiat only in the track e are signals to be ponding end of the additional winding goes d, as follows: to key contacts 161 in row 9 'For the purpose of addition the change-over switch 55 is in the rack Sector III Sector II Sector I position 56 and for the purpose of subtraction 90 a it is in the position 57, under the control of b appropriate function keys. c For the purpose of comparison, Fig 10 a d illustrates an addition of 10 to 80 in sector II, e 1 1 9 as a part of the operation of adding 119 to 84 95 The sensing head slot 31 is connected over the hese result signals may either be trans amplifier 41 and the sector switch 22 and vered back to trace a for further processing, or tical contact line 152 and horizontal line 168 to 3 ferred to one of the tracks f,-f, which the normal winding of the recording head 32 ', :he record means for further computers, or and the additional winding of the complemen 100 sferred to output means tary recording head 321 As the change-over s the processing means operates succes switch 55 is in position 56, only the normal y in the several sectors, independent of the windings are in circuit, as shown by the iber of sectors, that is independent of the thickened line in Fig 10 a. iber of denominations of the numbers to be On the other hand, subtraction is illustrated 105 essed and independent of the number of by means of the example " 119-84-35 ". cs f,-f, of a multi-number calculator, This is done by way of addition of the compleone set of signal heads is required Other mentary to nine in each denomination of the there is the possibility of processing by number 84 to the number 119, e g, e than one sets of signal heads, e g in " 00000119 + 99999915 = 00000035 " 110 Ilel or in series Fig 10 b shows the processing for that part i further great advantage rests in the fact of this operation which concerns sector IL The the value

processing may take place digit change-over switch 55 is now in position 57 Thus, the value processing means are and therefore puts only the additional windings lediately free for further processing, oper in circuit, as shown by the thickened lines 115 g during the value processing of a complete In this example a " fugitive one " well iber This results in particular from the fact known in mechanical calculators results in the arrangement of the signal heads in the sector XIII and is to be added in sector I, this or is such that with every cycle of relative may be done as a separate addition operation vement all the fields of every sector have by the carry-over means as described above, 120 sed the signal heads and all the value pro and as is usual in mechanical computers, or ing operations for the denominations con can be done by change of digit value position ied are completed during transfer from track c to track a over his means in practice that the value process amplifier circuit E. 786,045 Ex AMPLE XIII XII XI X IX VIII VII VI V IV III 11 I o 0 O O O O O 0 1 1 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 5 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 5 The amplifier circuit E by means of which this carry procedure is carried out is shown in Fig 15 b. 1 DIGIT VALUE PROCESSING MEANS FOR PROCESS 1 IN AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT A. The processing means, which are in principle described above (the Figs 5-7 and 10) effect the transfer of a signal from track a to track b In Fig 11 a the arrangement is shown by means of symbols The transfer of signals from track a by the sensing head 31 in stator field I a 9 to one of the recording heads 32 in stator fields 1 b 9-f edects the change of the position or displacement of the computing signals for digit values This transfer is effected via a low frequency amplifier 41 to compensate for the losses of the airslot, of the leakage field and magnetizing losses, etc, at the transfer and via the digit value switches (and denomination switches 54 '). In Fig 11 b the contacts of the horizontal contact rows 160-9, which are arranged below the keys of the full keyboard 1, correspond to the above-mentioned switches 54 The contacts are made effective beginning from the last denomination successively by the sector switch 22 with the single distributor contacts 391 to 39 ' In the example shown the number 028 is pressed down within the keyboard in similar manner with reference to Figs 6 a-c. At the full keyboard the distributing contacts 391-8 are connected with the vertical denomination contacts 15 I-158 (compare also Fig 6 and 7). When using a tens keyboard provision is made whereby either the keys operate a full contact board stepwisely demonination by denomination or the denomination switches are provided indicating within which

denomination each depressed key is to operate. The denomination switches (sector switches) can be as the Figs lib to 11 g show, electromechanical, or electronic distributing switches. Electronic switches for instance can be discharge tubes, which are switched on successively according to the relative position of the rotor to the stator. On the other hand there can be used switches which are practically without inertia directly as the digit value switches 54 '-54 ', for instance by means of a tens keyboard or the like, wherein the digit value signals are not switched directly, but are first recorded for instance in a magnetic storage or record means. For the understanding of the digit value processing at higher speed it is sufficient to know that the unit is provided with a practically inertia-less control device, which makes effective those digit values for the different denominations which are recorded in the corresponding sectors I, II, III, etc. a AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT BY CONTACT SWITCHING. The operation of the amplifier circuit by contact switching and full keyboard is as follows:The sensing head 31 in stator field I a 9 (corresponding to the stator diagram of the Fig. 4 a) is connected according to Fig 1 lb with the control grid and the cathode resistance of the pentode 67 of the amplifier 41 The voltage surge, which is generated within the sensing head 31 by the passing magnetic signal, is made effective after its amplification via a coupling capacitor 69 at the control grid of the discharge tube 68 The capacitor 70 is loaded via the resistance 71, so that its voltage is only a little below the ignition voltage of the discharge tube 68, as the discharge tube is biassed by means of the resistance 72 Due to the high resistance 71, only a single discharge occurs within each sector. A signal, coming from the sensing head 31 and amplified by the pentode 67 effects the ignition of the discharge tube 68 and subsequently the discharge of the capacitor 70 The current surge resulting from the discharge of the capacitor 70 is conveyed to one of the recording heads (Fig lib recording head 328 in stator field I b 1) via the contact below the pressed down key " 8 " of the keyboard 1 which connects the vertical row 15 ' with the horizontal row 16 ', via the contact 391 of the sector switch, wiping contact 42 in sector I position and central contact 40 of the sector switch 22 The bias is preferably stabilized by an electronic stabilizer (not shown) In case a transfer process according to Fig 6 a the magnetic signal " 8 " is recorded by the discharge tube 68 via the recording head 32 ' in stator field I b 1 at the instant, when the magnetic signal in field 0 sector I track a of the rotor passes the slot of the sensing head 119 -84 = 35 786,045 31 and in track b the field 8 passes the slot of the

recording head 32 s in stator field I b 1, whereby this recording head is switched on by the pressed down coordinated key of the last denomination on the keyboard By this means the magnetic signal " 8 " is recorded as the resulting signal of the addition of the "zero-signal" plus " 8 " on track b ( 0 + 8 = 8). In order to ensure that the signals receive a defined position within track b, which is independent of the exactness of the position of the signals sensed within track a, at the transfer from track a to track b an electronic " registering" is provided This registering effects the recording of the resulting signals at defined fields regardless of little inaccuracies which may occur in a longer row of additions. In this case the electronic registering records the result according to computing process The amplifier circuit A which is co-ordinated to this process is also designed for a higher counting speed by the arrangement of reliable electronic means. Fig llc shows this modification of the switching diagram of this amplifier circuit It effects by means of an additional registering circuit, that during one computing period at the transfer from track a to track b the signals for the results are recorded at defined fields by signal switching control means, which are operating either with photo-sensing or an inductive signal generator. In this figure the sensing head 31 is connected with the control grid and the basic point of the cathode resistance of the amplifier tube 74 Photo-cell 79 makes it possible to take from punchcards the computing signals in a photo-electric way Voltage signals occurring in the sensing head 31 in stator field I a 9 cause the pre-amplifier pentode 74 to ignite the pre-relay discharge tube 73 via the coupling capacitor 75 and open hereby the pentode 67, which then receives the required screen grid voltage as a voltage drop at the resistance 77 in the discharge circuit of the discharge tube 73 on discharge of the capacitor 86. The opened pentode 67 is the amplifier tube for the signal markings (magnetic or optic on the signal carrier), whereby in case of magnetic markings the sensing is effected by the sensing head 76 in stator field XIII m 19 or in case of optic markings by photocell 78 Hereby either the sensing head 76 is excited by magnetic signals within track m or the photocell 78 is excited by corresponding optical markings Both means, signal head as well as photocell, effect in the same way, via the pentode 67 the discharge of capacitor 70 via the discharge tube 68 This discharge will become effective by that recording head, which is switched on by its co-ordinated digit value switch 54 (see Fig llb) and hereby effects the recording of signals on track b displaced according to the computing process 1 (" processing "). b AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT A BY ELECTRONIC SWITCHING.

In Figs Ild and e are shown as modifica-tions of the sector switch 22 (compare Figs 6, 7, 10 and llb), designed as a contact distri 70 butor, a rotating magnetic yoke as an inductively effective signal distributing arm Such a signal distributor arm will be preferably used at speeds, at which contact distributors like the sector switch 22 are unreliable The signal dis 75 tributing arm 80 is fixed on shaft 18 (compare Fig 1) in a position defined by key 84. Fig 17 f shows the distributing arm in a stator 85. In the stator, primary coils 81 "-l and 80 secondary coils 82 '-" 3, magnetically connected at one side as pairs, by the stationary yokes 83 are arranged If the primary coils are connected electrically in series, as it shall be presunned for the cause of simplification and if 85 during the rotating of the rotor these primary coils are constantly energized, e g direct current, the secondary coils, by the passage of the distributor arm 80, receive voltage surges. These voltage surges are generated within 90 those secondary coils, which are co-ordinated to the corresponding sector, for instance, the secondary coil 821 for sector I, the secondary coil 82 ' for sector II, the secondary coil 823 for sector III and so on by an inductive effect 95 at the changing or cutting of the magnetic field by the distributor arm and therefore the changing of the magnetic coupling between coils 81 and 82. In total the stator contains 13 pairs of 100 primary and secondary coils, whereby each sector of the signal carrier 7 has a co-ordinated pair of these coils. The signal distributor arm 80 connects magnetically in turn the primary coil with the 105 secondary coil of each pair of coils and the connection is effected at the beginning of each sector During the time of the passing of the signal distributor arm 80 over a pair of coils this forms an amplified coupling and therefore 110 a lower resistance via the signal distributing arm 80 and the closed magnetic circuit acts as a transformer. Fig 10 g shows the wiring of the amplifier circuit A with electronic denomination or sec 115 tor switches operated inductively by the signal distributor arm. In detail (as in Fig lic) the pentode 74 of amplifier circuit A amplifies the signals sensed in the signal head 31 in stator field I a 9 The 120 amplified signals are led via the coupling capacitor 75 to the discharge tube 73 and effect its ignition to discharge capacitor 86 The screen grid voltage of pentode 67 is effected by a voltage drop at resistance 77 125 The electronic registering is effected by means of the permanent signals in track m, whereby the signals are sensed from the signal carrier by means of sensing heads 76 As an alternative there can also be used a photocell 130 78 for sensing optically marked

permanent signals in a track corresponding to track m but in an optical way After the amplification by the pentode 67 they effect the ignition of the discharge tube 68. The recording heads 32 9 in stator fields I b 9-0 are not directly connected with the discharge circuit of the discharge tube 68 as in Fig lic via a contact sector switch 22 The discharge tube 68 control only the recording via the pentode 87 and the discharge distributor tubes 881-', of which there is provided one for each denomination of the full keyboard 1 Such discharge distributor tubes 881- operate together with the contact rows 15 '-15 '. Only at the ignition of one of these distributing tubes 88 I-889 the full keyboard will be effective in that vertical denomination row, which is co-ordinated with the ignited tube. Therefore all the discharge tubes 881-88 ' have a defined voltage drop between anode and cathode, which is below the ignition voltage (it is to be preferred to stabilize the voltage by stabiliser 89) The control grids of the discharge tubes 88 '-88 ' are adjusted negatively compared to the cathode by means of the voltage division between resistance and secondary coil 82 of the respective discharge This voltage drop (low ohmic coil) has such a dimension that at the ignition of one of the discharge tubes 881-88 ' the voltage at all the other discharge tubes is decreasing almost to the arcvoltage, so that ignitions of other discharge tubes 88 I-888 of this circuit is prevented. Before the "zero "-position of a sector is reached during the rotation of the signal carrier disc 7 the discharge tube which corresponds to this particular value must be ignited. Immediately after the sensing head 31 has been excited in stator field I a 9 (see above), the capacitor 70 is discharged by the registering signals via the discharge tube 68 and resistance 90. The voltage drop, which is effected at resistance 90 " opens the pentode 87 and effects a strong current surge in its plate circuit. The discharge tube 88 ', which is ignited, tries to keep its arc-voltage despite the enlarged current of the pentode 87, and therefore a voltage surge in the switched-on recording head 328 in stator field I b 1 (pressed down key " 8 " of the last denomination of the keyboard) is effected, which in turn effects the recording of the resulting digit value signal. By means of pentode 91 and discharge tube 92 the extinction of the discharge tubes 88 '888 is precisely controlled at the end of the passing of each sector For this purpose there is sensed either a permanent magnetic signal by a signal head or, as a variation, a permanent optic signal sensed by a photocell is used as an extinguishing signal This signal, which is preferably the permanent

"zero "-signal in each sector in track n, is sensed by the sensing head 93 and effects an ignition of discharge tube 92 via a coupling capacitor By the resistance 94, the cathode of pentode 87 will be for a short time strongly positive compared with the voltage on the control grid Thus pentode 87 will be closed for a short while and 70 the ignited discharge tube 88 ' will be extinguished by the blocking of the plate current. According to the position of the switch 121, an output can be obtained via a distributor 23 a or a visual indicating unit (flash tube 150 uti 75 lised as a stroboscopic light source). It will be appreciated that in an arrangement such as that shown in Fig llb or lic, the lines from the keyboard which are shown connected to the heads 32 -9 may instead be 80 connected to the grids of a plurality of gas tubes The firing of such gas tubes under control of the keyboard setting is then used to control the energising of the appropriate head. This arrangement avoids any direct connection 85 between the keyboard and the recording heads. For example, instead of electronic denomination switches (Fig hla) electronic digit value switches can also be used for the whole switching process This process is shown in principle 90 in Fig 11 h Here we see again the full keyboard 1, where the keys indicating number " 28 " are pressed down in the last two denominations The contacts of the full keyboard are connected via the horizontal contact 95 rows 16 with the corresponding electronic digit value switches 95 -9, which are to operate successively The switching on of these digit value switches is effected denomination by denomination beginning with the last denomi Ion nation, which is marked in Fig 11 k as vertical row 15 ' in the full keyboard 1 The successive operation in the different denomination I, II, III etc of the full keyboard is effected by contacts, for instance by pressed down keys, in 105 such a way, that the inductive sector switch (Figs 11 d and lie and 11 f) is used, whereby its secondary coils 82 '-' receive a voltage surge by the rotating inductive yoke 80, beginning successively at the right hand coil 821 at the 110 beginning of each sector Thus this process operates denomination-wise. The secondary coil 82 ' of the sector switch will be effective via the vertical contact row ' within sector I, the secondary coil 82 ' will 115 be effective via the vertical contact row 152 in sector II, the secondary coil 823 via the vertical contact row 15 ' of the full keyboard in sector III, etc. In Fig 11 h, digit value switches comprise 120 the combination of a gas discharge tube 950-D with the co-ordinated pentode 96 -9 The pentodes lead digit value signals only to that one of the recording

heads 32 -329, the coordinated gas discharge tube of which is 125 ignited, as the screen grids of the pentodes receive in this example its voltage by the voltage drop at the resistances 97 '9, which are connected into the main discharge circuits of the gas tubes 130 786,045 whereby at any time only one of these record 65 ing heads can be effective within one of the tracks c or d, as at any time there is only in one of these tracks a possibility for magnetizing In track c only signals for digit values smaller than 10 can be recorded and in 70 track d only signals for digit values which exceed " 9 " can be recorded By such an arrangement the separating is effected, dependent on whether the respective sum of digit values of this sector is within the 75 limit digit value " 9 " or whether it exceeds it. The digit value signals recorded on track d are transferred to effect the diminishing and the forwarding of pre-mark signals into the 80 next denomination The digit value signals recorded in track c, are transferred without any further change of value. If at the preceding denomination the gas discharge tube 52 of the pre-mark switch has been 85 ignited in process 4 by a pre-mark signal for a necessary carry-over forwarding into the next denomination, then the signal transfer from track b to track c or d is effected via sensing head 33 in stator field I b 19 to the pair of 90 recording heads 351 and 352 in stator field I c and d 18. The ignition of the tube 52 operates switch 47 and therefore the signal is displaced by one field and recorded on track c or d by 95 recording head 35 ' or 352 thus effecting the forwarding of the carry-over by changing the digit value by " one ". The transfer is effected via the amplifier 44 and via one of the two switching ways of the 100 carry-over pre-mark switch 47 (symbolically shown as an electro-mechanical relay 47), whereby in the resting position of this relay (if no carry-over forwarding was to be effected) in its switching position 48 (Figs 12 a and 105 12 b) the signals are led to the pair of recording heads 34 ' and 34 ' of the tracks c and d in the digit value fields 19, and in the operation switching position 49 (if a carry-over forwarding has to be effected) supplied to the 110 pair of recording heads 351 and 352 in the digit value fields 18 of the tracks c and d. At speeds which are higher than 200 denomination additions per second electronic relays instead of telegraphic relays are to be 115 preferred, which can be designed for instance with a wiring diagram according to Fig 12 c and d or with a wiring diagram corresponding in its effect, for instance by controlled ring modulators or the like Such electronic relays 120 operate practically without inertia and can operate very reliably even at high speeds, for instance 50,000 denomination additions per second etc.

As the electronic relay operate with two 125 pentodes or the like and one gas discharge tube according to Fig 12 c, they effect at the same time the amplification in the required degree, and a separate amplifier can be omitted. After the computing process, for instance the addition process, is terminated under the influence of a switched-on digit value switch 95/96 within one sector, the digit value S switch is automatically returned to its ineffective position by the extinction of the ignited gas tube by a control signal, which is delivered to all the tubes 96 -9 at the end of each sector After resetting all the digit value switches into the ineffective position, these electronic switches are again prepared for new action within the second digit, that is within penultimate denomination, which is to be processed. Within this penultimate digit the digit value " 2 " is marked within the full keyboard 1 by pressing down the required key of this full keyboard and thereby closing the corresponding contacts. The contact input by pressing down keys can be replaced by equivalent contact means, for instance controlled by punched cards, punched tapes, or other equivalent means, for example magnetic tapes or the like, as input means In this case the denomination or digit value-distributor as a contact distributor, inductive or electronic distributor or the like synchronised mechanically or by means of synchronisation signals, for instance start-stop signals, so that the digit value signals of the input means can control the electronic digit value switches 95/96 correspondingly. THE DIGIT VALUE CARRY-OVER MEANS. The digit value carry-over means comprise: amplifier circuit B the separating means, which distinguish between resulting digit values of the computing process 1 below or equal to those above a limiting value, and the forwarding means, which effects the carryover forwarding into the next denomination by a displacement of the resulting digit value within the said denomination by " 1 " These carryover means are effective at a signal transfer from track b to track c or d. Amplifier circuit C operates to transfer an unchanged signal from track c to track e. Amplifier circuit D includes diminishing means for the diminishing of the resulting digit values within the same denomination and means for the forwarding of pre-mark signals to the next denomination at the signal transfer from track d to track e. Amplifier circuit E includes means for retransfer of signals from track e to track a and for taking regard of the " fugitive one 2 THE SEPARATING AND FORWARDING MEANS. The arrangement is shown by symbols in Fig 12 a The transfer of digit

value signals is, as already described in Figs 8 a-Sc effective from track b bv means of sensing head 33 in stator field I b 19 to track c or d via the recording head pairs 34 ' and 342, in stator fields I c and d 19 or 35 ' and 352 in stator fields I c and d 18 connected in parallel, 786,045 786,045 a AMPLIFYING CIRCUIT B BY CONTACT SWITCHING. Fig 12 b shows the amplifying circuit B which effects the transfer from track b to track c and d with an electro-mechanic (telegraphic) relay The sensing head 33 above the track b in stator field I b 19 is connected via the amplifier 44 and the carry-over pre-mark switch 47 with one of the groups of the recording heads 341 and 342 or 35 ' and 352 connected in series or respectively in parallel. In the resting position 48 of the carry -over pre-mark switch 47 both recording heads 341 and 342 will be effective in the stator field I c and d 19, whereas after a switching over of the carry-over pre-mark switch 47 to switching way 49, both recording heads 351 and 352 in the stator field I c and d 18 are switched on, whereby a digit value signal displacement is effected by one field and thus a carry-over forwarding from the preceding denomination by a change of the digit value by " 1 " At the transfer to track c or d respectively the signals, which have resulted from the counting process 1 are separated according to whether the resulting digit value is equal or lower than the limit digit value or whether it exceeds it, whereby there is taken regard already of carry-over forwarding by one from the preceding denomination. Signals with a digit value which does not exceed the limit digit value (in the example " 9 " according to a decadic number-system) and which are recorded in the rotor fields 0-9, are recorded in track c, as track d has no magnetizable layer in the rotor fields 0-9. The signals, the digit value of which exceeds the limit digit value (higher than 9), are recorded in track d, as the alternative track c has no magnetizable layer in its rotor fields 10-19, and therefore fields of track d can only be magnetized with resulting digit values from 10-19. The sensing head 35 is connected to the control grid of the amplifier pentode 98 In the pentode plate circuit is an electro-mechanical (telegraphic) relay 47, which has a definite bias to the resting position 48 and which is used as carry-over pre-mark switch This switch has two switching ways 48 and 49, the alternative position of which switches in one or other of the two recording head groups 341, 342 or 351, 352 b AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT B WITH ELECTRONIC RELAY. Figs 12 c and d show two designs of the switching diagram of amplifier circuit B with electronic relay, which can be used for higher speeds of the calculator and which can be used in combination with the

amplifier The sensing head 33 in stator field I b 19 is connected via the amplifier pentode 98 of the amplifier 44 and to the carry-over pre-mark switch, which in this case is an electronic two-way switch Such relay in its resting position is 65 connected to the recording heads 341 and 342 in stator fields I c and d 19, and in the operating switch position to the recording heads 351 and 352 in stator fields I c and d 18 according to the carry-over pre-mark signals from the 70 preceding denomination in the winding 99. Such a pre-mark signal is supplied to the grid of the discharge tube 52 (compare also Fig 8 a-c) and it ignites this tube When this tube is ignited, the pentode 101 is opened and 75 the pentode 100 is closed On the contrary, if it remains extinguished, the pentode 100 is opened and the pentode 101 is closed. This opposite and mutual opening and closing of the pentodes is effected by the resistance 80 102 and 103, which are connected into the discharge circuit of the gas discharge tube 52, whereby the junction regulates the potential of the cathode and whereby the positive side is connected to the screen grid of the pentode 85 101 and the negative side is connected to the suppressor grid of the second pentode 100. If the gas discharge tube is extinguished, the cathode and the suppressor grid of the pentode 100 have the same potential, so that 90 the tube 100 is effective, it is opened. If the discharge tube is ignited, there is a voltage drop at the resistance 102, 103 according to the current of this tube Thereby the screen grid of pentode 101 receives a positive 95 voltage, whereas the suppressor grid of the second pentode 100 is negatively biassed In consequence of it and contrary to the preceding state, the pentode 101 is now opened, and the pentode 100 is closed 100 Both groups of recording heads are connected into the plate circuits of the pentodes and 101, whereby the groups of signal heads becoming effective are selected by the switching condition of the gas discharge tube 105 The effecting of a carry-over forwarding into the next denomination (next sector) depends therefore on whether the discharge tube 52 is ignited or not The extinguishing of the discharge tube 52 is shown in Fig 12 c by means 110 of the discharging of the capacitor 104 An extinguishing can also be effected in a different timing instant by the known means of breaking down the plate circuit The description of the amplifier circuit A in Fig 11 g shows an 115 electronic solution for it The pentode is not required if two discharge tubes are directly coupled. A further modification of the design according to Fig 12 d shows as electronic relay, two 120 coupled electronic tubes instead of the use of gas discharge tubes The signals which are induced in Fig 12 d in the sensing head 33 are in this case amplified as usual by the pentode

98 of the amplifier 44 and hexodes 105, 106, 125 the control grids of which are connected in parallel via the capacitors 107, 108 In the plate circuit of the hexode 106 are the recording heads 351 and 352 of the positions I c and co-operation with Fig 14 c, that is without the 65 operation of such a repositioning winding. 4 CIRCUIT D. A diminishing of the digit value signals in the same denomination is effected during the signal transfer from track d to track e in the 70 amplifying circuit D in combination with the forwarding pre-mark signal of a carry-over as shown in Fig 14 a. The means which transfer signals of the sensing head 37 track d in stator field I d 15 75 to the recording head 38 in stator field II e 5, are of a similar design, but regard must be taken of the radial displacement of the signal heads by ten fields, by which the subtraction of " ten " is effected The circuit is provided 80 with a usual low frequency amplifier 51. The plate circuit of the tube 113 of the amplifier 51, is via a transformer 112 which is directly connected to the ignition electrode of the discharge tube 52 (compare Figs 8, 9 b 85 and 13 c), the discharge current of which effects the carry-over pre-mark switch by its winding 53. Fig 14 b shows a practical example of the amplifier circuit D The signals sensed by 90 sensing head 37 are amplified by the pentode 113, the plate current of which excites the winding 53 b of the carry-over pre-mark switch and simultaneously effects the recording of computing signals by its recording 95 head 38. The transfer from track d to track e is effected according to Fig 14 c via the sensing head 37 which supplies the signals via the amplifier tube 113 to the recording head 38 100 in stator field II e 5 By means of the additional winding 99, this recording head 38 effects the ignition of the gas discharge tube 52 (amplifier circuit B, Fig 12 c), for the purpose of the forwarding of the carry-over to the 105 next denomination By this means the transfer of the signal from track d to track e representing the resulting digit value is displaced by ten fields according to the difference between the position of the sensing head 37 110 in stator field I d 35 and the position of the recording head 38 in stator field II e 5 Hereby the discharge tube 52 of the amplifier circuit B will be ignited for switching over the carryover pre-mark switch 47 115 AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT E. From track e signals of digit values can be re-transferred for the purpose of further additions to track a These signals can also be transferred to and recorded on other tracks 120 (for instance to a selective signal carrier storage of signal carriers in form of tapes as output means).

The re-transfer to track a can be effected without any displacement If during subtrac 125 tions by complementary additions there is given the carry-over signal for a "fugitive d 18 and in the plate circuit of the hexode are the recording heads 34 ' and 342 in the positions 1 c and d 19. If a current flows within the hexode 105, the cathode resistance 109 of the hexode 105 supplies the negative bias of suppressor grid of the hexode 106 Alternatively, if there is a current in the hexode 106, the cathode resistance 110 delivers a negative bias to the hexode 105 Thereby the opened hexode delivers by its cathode resistance the block voltage by which the other hexode is closed By this way only one of the two hexodes can be opened at any instant The control of this electronic relay is effected by means of negative signals, which are supplied to the relay either from the amplifier circuit C or D at the transfer of computing signals. The switching over from the electronic tube Z O 105 to the other electronic tube 106 or vice versa is effected in this case by the suppressing of the current in the electronic tube 105 or 106 for a short instance, either by a negative impulse to the control grid itself or-as in Fig 18 d-by a negative signal to a second control grid So long as a current flows in one tube, the other one is blocked by the bias of its suppressor grid of the cathode resistances 109 respectively 110 If by a negative impulse the hexode 105 is closed for a short while, in this instant no bias is delivered, and hexode 106 is opened by the blocking of the hexode 105 until the hexode 105 will be opened again by a negative impulse onto the control grid of the hexode 106. 3 AMPLIFYING CIRCUIT C. An unchanged transfer of digit values is effected by means of the amplifier circuit C, symbolically shown in Fig 13 a The transfer is effected from sensing head 36 in stator field II c 5 to the recording head 38 in stator field II e 5 via the amplifier 50 without any alteration of the digit value This transfer is effective, if the resulting digit value of the computing process ( 1) does not exceed the limiting value Special switches deciding whether the transfer process ( 3) or the transfer process ( 4) will be effective are not required, as by the arrangement of the tracks c and d this separation is already effected on the rotor. The signal heads 36 and 38 are in the fields of the stator which correspond radially one to another, so that the digit value signals are transferred with the same digit value Fig. 13 b shows a modification of the amplifier circuit C The digit value signals sensed by means of sensing head 36 are amplified by tube 111

For the control of the digit value pre-mark switch, designed as an electro-magnetic (telegraphic) relay, an additional repositioning winding 53 a is provided at the output side of the amplifier. Fig 13 c shows the same wiring diagram for 1786,045 is 786,045 one ", the transfer in the last denomination is effected by the relay in the amplifier circuit according to Fig 15 a This relay can b. designed in full accordance with the electronic pre-mark switch of the amplifier circuit B of Fig 12 c. The amplifying circuit E of Fig 15 a, via the amplifier 66, connects the sensing head 58 in stator field XIII a 19 to the recording head 59 in stator field XIII a 19 for an unchanged transfer, or to the recording head 60 in stator field XIII a 18 if regard has to be taken to a fugitive " 1 ". With computers of medium or greater capacity the amplifier circuit E effects the addition of the fugitive " 1 " without additional cycles of operation, whereas in slower operating computors requiring further cycles of operation in computing process ( 2) the fugitive " 1 " is forwarded from the first denomination to the last denomination of the number These forwarding means are arranged in the empty sector, in which otherwise the fugitive one would appear as a pre-mark signal for a carry-over forwarding It is a repetition of those carry-over forwarding means for the next denomination in process ( 2), and is controlled in the same way by the carry-over premark signal released in process ( 4) This pre-mark signal is delivered to its gas discharge tube 147 only during the passing of sector XIII of disc 7 through the zero-position of the stator In Fig 15 b the discharge tube 147 receives ignition signals only in the case of a carry-over forwarding from the last into the first sector, and such ignition effects the switching over of the pentodes as described with reference to Fig 12 c, see pentodes 100 and 101.

* Sitemap * Accessibility * Legal notice * Terms of use * Last updated: 08.04.2015 * Worldwide Database * 5.8.23.4; 93p

* GB786046 (A)

Description: GB786046 (A) ? 1957-11-13

Improvements in record-controlled office machines

Description of GB786046 (A)

PATENT SPECIFICATION 786,046 Date of Application and filing Complete Specification: June 23, 1950. No 37228,154. Application made in Germany on Oct 1, 1948. (Divided out of No 786,021). Complete Specification Published: Nov 13, 1957. Index at acceptance:-Class 106 ( 1), M( 1 A: IG: 4 A: 5 G: 2 IC: 21 D). International Classification:-GO 6 k. COMPLETE SPECIFICATION Improvements in Record-Controlled Office Machines I, GERHARD DIRKS, a German citizen, of 44, Moerfelder Landstrasse, Frankfurt on Main, Germany, do hereby declare the invention, for which I pray that a patent may be granted to me, and the method by which it is to be performed, to be particularly described in and by the following statement:- This invention relates to office machines controlled electrically by information stored as signals on non-continuous record media, such as sheets, strips, cards or the like. The office machine according to the invention makes use of sensing, recording and erasing means arranged in the path of a record medium moving to and from printing devices provided in the machine, such medium controlling the operation of the machine by means of selectable symbolised signals carried on it. The invention therefore provides an apparatus for sensing data-bearing discrete documents, on which documents data can be entered as magnetic recordings in a plurality of denomination areas each made up of digitvalue areas, comprising a sensing station and means for effecting a relative movement between the document and said sensing station in a path over all denomination areas of said plurality successively, wherein during such movement all the data in said path is sensed, and comprising electronic transfer means for the sensed signals, with means controlled by signals derived from recordings on the document, operative for each of at least two denomination areas, for synchronising the transfer of signals sensed from the respective

denomination areas or from groups of denomination areas in which said respective areas are contained. One convenient form of apparatus according to the invention utilises magnetisable sheets (or areas on sheets) with a co-ordinated sensing and recording means, and comprises one or more printing units for paper sheets and cards and a computing means for example according to my co-pending Application No 15773/50 (Serial No 786,021), the sensing and recording means being adapted inter alia to read a previous record on the sheet or the like, pass it to the computing 50 means for computation with other matter, and to record the result on the sheet or the like, either in addition to or in place of the previous record. This invention operates in such a way, that 55 by means of magnetic sensing, voltages or currents are obtained, from the record medium, and such signals may represent for instance new sums and balances of ledger accounts or any other information Such in 60 formation can be recorded by signals of various kinds, as for instance those set forth in my said co-pending Application for Patent and, as is also set forth therein, parts of the signals (e g the beginning or end of a signal) 65 may be effective as controlling signals for synchronising the said synchronised means in the machine Command signals for computing or printing processes may also be recorded on the inserted record medium In addition to 70 erasible magnetic signals, permanent signals of an optically sensible type may be carried on the record medium. For use in the said machines the invention provides a non-continuous record medium for 75 an electrically controlled office machine comprising a sheet, card, slip or the like having a magnetisable record area arranged as a strip along or near one edge for serial sensing and recording of signals in the machine 80 In the accompanying drawing the invention is illustrated more or less diagrammatically: Fig 1 is a rear perspective view of a bookkeeping machine according to the invention, this machine being described in more detail in 85 my co-pending Application for Patent No. 15773/50 (Serial No 786,021). Fig 2 illustrates a start-stop distributor by which a transfer of signals may be effected within the machine; 90 Fig 3 shows associated amplifying means by which signals are distributed according to their position relative to a starting signal; Fig 4 shows a portion of a ledger sheet or like record medium having a magnetisable strip containing start signals and information signals; Fig 5 illustrates one arrangement of setting up a time base as a starting signal; and Fig 6 shows a portion of a tape having correspondingly arranged signals; Fig 7 is a circuit diagram illustrating an electronic distribution of sensed signals to different switching ways. In Fig 1 there is shown in perspective the rear of an electric

typewriter in which is incorpora-Led a computing mechanism There are to be seen the magnetic tapes 1 and 2 as signal carriers and a part of the keyboard 3 which is at the front of the machine Reels or bobbins are provided, to facilitate a simple handling of the magnetic tapes Thus, in operation the tape 1 is uncoiled from reel 4 and recoiled on to reel 5, whereas tape 2 is uncoiled from reel 6 and is recoiled on reel 7. The sensing, erasing and recording operations on the tapes are effected by means of the group of signal heads 8 which lie between the two tapes and which are effective both for the upper tape 1 and for the lower tape 2. The movement or traverse of both tapes is effected by the stepwisely-operating control element 9, by which the two tapes are advanced step-by-step This control element is set forth in detail in my co-pending Application for Patent No 37210/54 (Serial No. 786,029). The machine is provided furthermore with a feeding box 10 for ledger-account sheets or the like, which lie flat one above another and from whence they are led one by one (e g. from the bottom of the pile) to the printing device 11 The movement of the sheets is effected by the roll system 12, the rolls being driven by the motor 13, through shafts 14 and gears 15. Conveniently the printing device is a single line multi-denomination printing unit and incorporates a set of stepwisely-movable type carrying printing elements and operating means therefor such as is set out for example in my co-pending Application for Patent No. 37201/54 (Serial No 786,022) In such a case, the longer edges of the sheets would be the top and bottom edges, the columns for printed matter would be parallel with the shorter edges and the type elements would be disposed horizontally in the drawing. Within the input and output paths of the sheets as they move to or from the printing mechanism are signal heads 16 and 17 respectively Signal head 16 is preferably a sensing head system, whereas signal head 17 is an erasing and recording head system Furthermore there is shown the collecting box 18 for the printed ledger accounts, and also a paper sheet 19, for instance a journal for which a second printing unit would be provided within the machine The signal heads 16-17 are adapted to be traversed up and down the machine so as to pass over the signal carrier area on the sheet adjacent to and parallel with the bottom edge Alternatively, if the signal carrier area is disposed width-wise of the 70 sheets the signal heads could be stationary and the movement of the sheets past them be effective for sensing etc, or the signal heads could be arranged to move over the sheets widthwise Again the signal heads may be stationary 75 and, by sensing the ledger

sheet during its feeding movement, control stop and start means for the motor 13, thus determining which line shall next be brought into position for printing The motor will have magnetic 80 braking means or the like associated with it operating in dependence on sensed signals, to ensure proper register of the sheets in printing position. In any case, the sensing of the magnetic 85 area by the signal head 16 can be effective to read off the old balances (which could then be erased) and feed them for example into the computing unit, or into a store. The magnetisable area (e g strip) of the 90 sheet is either an affixed magnetic tape or the like, or is a magnetic layer spread on the appropriate part of the sheet The signal heads are preferably provided in such a way, that the same signal heads operate for a mul 95 titude of denominations, containing signals of digits, of characters or commands The sensing, recording, or erasing is effected denomination-wise successively By means of this signal head system in the input or output paths of 100 the printing device, magnetically recorded signals for information, comprising digits, characters or commands, can be read from the sheet and can be corrected by erasing and rerecording, for instance within the output path 105 of the sheet. The signals can be arranged in the magnetisable signal carriers in different ways The signals themselves are either single magnetic signals of a certain direction and amplitude 110 or a certain sequence of frequencies or not frequencies, whereby either a frequency or the absence of a frequency can indicate a signal. Such signals can also consist of phase-shifting signals, certain phases or frequencies being 115 altered by certain degrees In any case all these signals are preferably of the so-called " yes-or-no" type, or "black-and-white" type, that is having only two states. The recording of signals in proper juxta 120 position on the carriers and the marking of the zero-position can be effected in various ways For instance, the edge, a perforation or opening in the carrier can serve as a zero position (e g with perforations like those on 125 photo-sensitive films) Instead of such a fixation of the zero-position relatively to mechanical characteristics of the record medium itself, magnetic marks or signals can be recorded on the carrier for the purpose of 130 786,046 simplifications can be achieved by using the sheets, letters or the like as transfer means for automatic computing, storing, sorting procedures etc. By this means e g also the newest sums, 70 balances or the like of ledger accounts can be magnetically recorded on magnetizable strips provided on the sheet for their reception By this means, an automatic sum and balancestransfer can be achieved without an additional 75 selective storage means for an ad libitunz number of ledger accounts

If the signal series are stored twice, or are checkable by the comparing of accounting results, complete zero controls can be achieved in the meantime according 80 to the group control means set forth in my co-pending Application No 37212/54 (Serial No 786,031). A further use can be made of such markings on the sheets, cards or the like on the 85 ledger accounts In this case, for example, the number of the ledger account can be examined in order to state, whether the required ledger account is introduced into the input ways of the printing device or not 90 If the ledger account printer 11 in Fig 1 is used, in co-operation with an automatic feeder such as 12-7 in Fig 1, the numbers on the inserted ledger accounts can be examined automatically in comparison with the number 95 of the account required to have data recorded on it, so that only those accounts are prepared for being printed which have the desired number, whereas the others pass through, without being printed at all 100 Additionally, the position of the new printing line, on to which the printing has to be effected, can be recorded and later on be sensed and erased for a new record For greater outputs self-synchronizing signals for 105 synchronizing saw-toothed discharged circuits can be used in combination with electronic distributing switches, preferably of a cathode ray tube There is then a synchronized movement of the cathode ray of the tube to distri 110 buting fields (see Fig 7). Fig 4 shows a portion of a sheet of paper, e.g a ledger account 80 provided with a magnetizable strip, in the tracks of which are arranged starting signals 85 and digit value 115 signals 861 and 862 Said signals are generated by a tuning generator and during recording are interrupted according to switch-on or off contacts of a start-stop contact distributor, in dependence on input means 120 The reversed process, i e the sensing of such signals and distributing them according to their position relatively to a starting signal is shown by the Figs 2 and 3, in which Fig. 2 shows the mechanical start-stop distributor 125 and Fig 3 shows the required sensing and amplifying means. Fig 2 comprises the starting magnet 65 with its armature normally blocking the lever 91 fixed on the shaft 93 which is driven 130 marking zero-positions, or as controlling signals for synchronisation For machines with a low speed, this can be done in that, similar to the principle applied in the start-stop teletyper, either the breaking of the closed circuit current modulation, or a start impulse will introduce every new symbol The process of signalrecording hereby becomes in its exact statement independent of any mechanical parts or changeable conditions of the record means. This is described in more detail below with reference to Figs 2-6. The signal can be given also by a timing difference, that is to say

the local distance on the record medium between the start signal and the digit signal The two signals, the meaning of which is indicated by their timing difference, otherwise can be replaced by a signal sequence with a characteristic length or characteristic number of signals For instance the beginning of it will be effective as a start signal, while the end of it corresponds to the said digit signal. Alternatively the beginning of the signal sequence can be effective as a digit signal, while the end of it is effective as a stop signal. It can be useful to provide a constant current system, in which case the signals will appear as interruptions of the record. For machines with a higher speed, however, the start-stop signals will be replaced by the control frequency or synchronising signals of an electronic switch or of a motor, electronically synchronised to the phase of the advancing means for the record medium This is described in more detail below with reference to Fig 7. By means of these signals it is possible to control the printing of digits and/or characters, or the effecting of commands or the correct adjustment of the element to be printed relative to a printing unit, in respect of lines or the like. Self-synchronising of transferred signals by means of start-stop devices similar to those used in teletyping means is shown in Figs 26. Hereby the control of column by column processes can be effected The start-stopdevices can be used as well for the recording, sensing and erasing of signals on tapes, as for the same processes in connection with magnetizable strips or the like on letters, bookkeeping bills, ledger sheets and the like The magnetizable material can be either originally within the structure of the paper or the like material of the signal carrier, or applied to it later Magnetized tapes or strips and the like on paper, card and the like, can be sensed at another office from that where recording took place, and be transferred there into the required printed copies, into interval slips, tapes, punched cards or the like for book-keeping, cost accounting etc in such other office If arrangements are standardized, even further 786,046 frictionwise by a motor (not shown) On the said shaft 93 are different cam discs 94 and 951-6 of which, in the blocked position, the tact 900 The armature of the magnet 65 is 94 in a way known from start-stop teleprinters. As soon as the signal sensed e g as a magnetic signal by sensing head 28 (Fig 3) is amplified by pentode 87 and energizes the winding of relay 88, its contact 89 closes a D C way from 44 to 43, and this starting signal excites the starting magnet 65 via a distributor contact 900 The armature of the magnet 65 is now lifted and allows the actuation of the blocked lever 91 according to the friction drive of shaft 93 In consequence of this starting of the distributor 9516 the

following signals 86 etc, sensed by signal head 28 are amplified via pentode 87 energizing the winding of relay 88 and effecting a corresponding actuation of its contact 89 Hereby the D C. circuit 43-44 is connected via those conductors 961 which correspond in their timed position of closing to the timed position of the magnetic signals 85, 86 etc of Fig 4 The distributing of the sensed signals to the different circuits allows of the controlling of switching means in dependence on digits, commands or characters which are represented by the sequence of magnetic signals 86, following after the starting signal 85. Fig 6 shows signals on the tape 4 comprising in track 104 the zero signals 105 within each denomination area and in another track the digit value signals 106 '-n in a local or timed length or distance from the respective signals 105 corresponding e g to the recorded digit value, e g 106 '= 5, 1062 = 3, etc. If instead of the zero marks 105, terminating signals 108 of track 107 are used as a time base for recording and sensing, the digit value signals 106 receive a complementary meaning. Instead of three tracks, one track can be used for the same signals and with the same effect, if signal separation means, e g amplitude, frequency or time separating means are used. By the zero marks 105 the discharge tube 103 of Fig 5 is ignited, via sensing head 98 and amplifier 101, which indicates the time base, as a starting signal for time measurement, of such digit value signals, by e g an electronic distributor. If by this zero mark 105 used as a time base signal the linewise movement of a cathode ray is released with a definite speed, the digit values or the like allow a distribution to different ways in similar manner but with electronic means, as has been described for mechanical start-stop means with reference to Figs 2 and 3. The linewise operating cathode ray distributor can be provided either with a series of parallel operating photocells, of which only those are actuated which correspond as to their time value relatively to their time base to the timed position of the sensed signals, or there may be secondary emitting fields provided on the screen of the cathode ray tube, or otherwise there may be plates which come in direct 70 contact with the cathode ray. The digit value signals 106 are sensed by signal head 97 and amplified by pentode 102. The output of this pentode controls the intensity of the cathode ray distributor not 75 shown in these Figs At the moment of sensing the signal 106, the cathode ray is intensified thus selecting the photo cell, or the secondary emitting field or otherwise the plate which is co-ordinated to the timing instant of the digit 80 value signal.

The device according to Figs 5 and 6 is comparable to the start-stop device of Figs. 2 and 3 Instead of the start signal, the zero signal as a time base signal is sensed and the 85 signals of the combination 86 in Fig 4 correspond to the digit value signal 106 in Fig 6. If complementary digit values are required, e.g in subtraction processes, the actuation of switch 100 (Fig 5) effects a connection of the 90 signal head 97 with the control grid of pentode 1.01, and of signal head 99 to the control grid of pentode 102 By this means the digit value signals 106 are used as time base signals, initiating the movement of the cathode ray, 95 and the terminating signals 108 of track 107 effect the selecting of the photo cells, fields or plates co-ordinated to the complementary digit value of signals 106. Fig 7 shows electronic distributing means 100 for the distributing of sensed signals to different switching ways Said electronic distributing means comprise a cathode ray switch with circular deflection; alternatively horizontal deflection can be provided Both means differ 105 only in the deflection way and the arrangement of the switching fields In other parts, the switching diagram is the same. Referring to Fig 7 signal head 136 senses a synchronization track 104 of the input 110 record medium and supplies the sensed synchronization frequency to the control grid of pentode 137. The amplified control frequency, if a saw tooth frequency, effects horizontal linewise 115 deflections or if, a sinoid-control-frequency as shown in the Fig by the grouping of the signals in track 104 it is a sinusoidal control frequency, it effects a circular deflection of the cathode ray The control frequency is trans 120 ferred to the deflecting plates 129 of the tube 138 and shifted by 900 relatively to the deflecting plates 128, so that the cathode ray rotates in definite position to the phase of the control frequency As a modification, instead 125 of artificially shifting the phase, two separate control frequencies, off-set by 90 , could be recorded By this means the distributor is independent of any mechanical part, and can easily be synchronized by sensing previously 130 786,046 the respective denomination areas or from groups of denomination areas in which said respective areas are contained. 2 Apparatus according to claim 1, adapted for record media in which said controlling signals themselves are magnetically recorded on said record medium. 3 Apparatus according to claim 1, adapted for record media in which said controlling signals are recorded on said media so as to be optically sensible. 4 Apparatus according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the said controlling signals and the data signals are sensed by the same sensing means.

Apparatus according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the said controlling signals and the data signals are sensed by separate sensing means. 6 Apparatus according to any preceding claim, adapted for record media wherein each denomination area has a separate controlling signal or signals. 7 Apparatus according to any of claims 1-6, wherein the said controlling signals are start and/or stop signals. 8 Apparatus according to any of claims 1-7 wherein the recorded data represents digit value or other characters by combinational code signals. 9 Apparatus according to any of claims 1-3, wherein the beginning (or end) of a signal sequence is effective as an information signal, while the end (or beginning) of it is effective as a stop signal (or start signal as the case may be). Apparatus according to any preceding claim, wherein the said relative movement is a movement of signal heads over the said denomination areas. 11 Apparatus according to claim 1, and substantially as herein described with reference to the accompanying drawings. For the Applicant, SYDNEY E M'CAW & CO, Chartered Patent Agents, 17, St Ann's Square, Manchester, 2. recorded signals, or by transmitted or simultaneously symbolized signals The sectors 139 of the sensitive screen will emit secondary electrons, when hit by a cathode ray of sufficient intensity The intensity is controlled by grid 119 of the cathode ray tube 138 Plate 117 is connected to the secondary emitting sectors 139 via high ohmic resistances 140 -9 effecting a voltage drop, if secondary electrons are emitted, i e if the bias of control grid 119 has become less negative, when a signal is sensed by signal head 141 and is amplified by pentode 142. This voltage drop is supplied to the control grid of the co-ordinated discharge tube 143 -9 and ignites it After the ignition of one tube, the others will be blocked, if the resistances are correspondingly dimensioned, and only that one of the switching ways is actuated which corresponds to the timing position of the sensed signal The extinction of the discharge tubes is effected at an exact time instant, e g. by means of a negative impulse to the control grid of a pentode (not shown), cutting off the plate circuit of said pentode and the circuit of the discharge tubes 143. Other means for the transferring of signals from one storage to another with repeated synchronizing effects are described and illustrated in my co-pending Application for Patent No 37210/54 (Serial No 786,029).

* Sitemap * Accessibility * Legal notice * Terms of use * Last updated: 08.04.2015 * Worldwide Database * 5.8.23.4; 93p

* GB786047 (A)

Description: GB786047 (A) ? 1957-11-13

Improvements in or relating to electric calculators

Description of GB786047 (A)

A high quality text as facsimile in your desired language may be available amongst the following family members:

DE1021188 (B) US3403385 (A) US3530285 (A) DE1021188 (B) US3403385 (A) US3530285 (A) less Translate this text into Tooltip

[83][(1)__Select language] Translate this text into

The EPO does not accept any responsibility for the accuracy of data and information originating from other authorities than the EPO; in particular, the EPO does not guarantee that they are complete, up-to-date or fit for specific purposes.

PATENT SPECIFICATION 786,047 Date of Application and filing Complete Specification June 23, 1950. No 37229/54. Application made in Germany on Oct 1, 1948. (Divided out of No 786,021). Complete Specification Published Nov 13, 1957. Index at Acceptance:-Class 106 ( 1), A( 1 X: 2 A: 2 B: 2 C: 2 F 1: 5 A: 5 B: 6 C: 8 B: 10 A: l OB: l OF: 13), International Classification:

-GO 6 f. COMPLETE SPECIFICATION Improvements in or relating to Electric Calculators I, GERHARD DIRK S, of Moerfelder Landstrasse, 44, Frankfurt on Main, Germany, of German Nationality, do hereby declare the invention, for which I pray that a patent may be granted to me, and the method by which it is to be performed, to be particularly described in and by the following statement:- This invention relates to electric calculators. The invention provides an electric calculating arrangement, having a signal storage device or record means in which stored values may be read in a time sequence and a computing arrangement, including a distributor synchronised with the reading of the said storage device and which, in dependence on at least two digit values, at least one of which is stored in said storage device, selects a switching way representing the result of a computation of those digit values together. The storage device will preferably be a magnetisable record means for digital-data signals with means for effecting between such record means and transducing means therefor a relative movement which is synchronised witn the distributor. The invention may be further characterised in that both said digit values are separately effective for selection purposes over a time period but are jointly effective for a computation only at a determined time instant during that period. The digit values will be recorded successively, transferred and processed successively, electing successive result signals Resulting signals may be returned to appropriate localities on the same record means from which one of the operands was received or to a record means synchronised therewith. According to another feature of the invention, the said first digit values are transferred at the respective instant and/or period in respect of a time base of which different instants and/or periods represent different digit values. Also, denominational values may be transferred at the respective periods or a time base of which different periods represent different denominational values The said different localities may be determined with reference to a fixed point on the record means or to synchronizing signals on the record means, and the time base above mentioned may be determined with reference to the control frequency of one or more electronic switches or to one or more synchronizing signals of distributing means. The invention may be further characterised in that digit values are represented in one or other of a plurality of number areas by changes

of state effected at different instants of a time base, and denominational values are represented by different areas of the record means, or vice versa and the transferring of signals between record means and computor arrangements may be operated on a basis of locality and/or time selectively. According to a further feature of the invention, there is relative movement between the record means and sensing means in the computing arrangement and during each cycle of such relative movement any area of the record means can be selected for sensing Also, denomination areas may be sensed in different number areas at the same time In such arrangements said cyclic relative movement will be synchronised with a cyclic operation of said computing distributor. In the description and in the appended claims the term calculator has the following meaning: CALCULATOR A machine incorporating signal-input and signal-output means, control means, and for one or more numbers a record means and a computing arrangement (arithmetic unit) The input and control means may be for example a keyboard, a magnetic tape or otherwise, and the output means may be for example a magnetic tape, disc, or drum, or the indicating screen of a cathode ray tube, a printing unit or other indicator or the like. 1 :7 786,047 The said signal storage device or second means may for example be a magnetisable drum or disc, the screen of a cathode ray tube, or other means capable of recording and storing sensable computing signals (the term computing signals including both value signals for digit values and denomination values, and also control signals) This record means may be made up of number areas or sections each of which can record signals for all the denominations of a number. In the particular embodiments described the computing arrangement or arithmetic unit incorporates digit value processing means (processing means) which are used to carry out algebraic processes (addition, subtraction, etc), and carry-over means. The carry-over means may be defined as a device including signal-separating, valuediminishing, and signal-forwarding means, each of which is defined below: SIGNAL SEPARATING MEANS A device distinguishing between signals below oi equal to and those above a limiting value. In a normal decimal system such limiting value would be " 9 " In a sterling currency system it would for example be " 11 " in a carry-over from pence to shillings and " 19 " in a carry-over from shillings to pounds Other numerical systems would have other limiting values. VALUE DIMINISHING MEANS A device for dividing a value greater than the limiting value into two separate values, one equal to the limiting

value plus one (diminishing value), and the other being the remainder or excess over the first. SIGNAL-Fo Rw ARDING MEANS A device for carrying the diminishing value as a digit value " 1 " into the next higher denomination. The term Pre-Mark Signal used in the following description means:- A signal made effective by a value-diminishing means to cause the signal-forwarding means to carry the digit value " 1 " to the next denomination A pre-mark switch is a switch for effecting the recording of a pre-mark signal. The invention may be provided with input means as set forth in my co-pending Applications Nos 37214/54; 37215/54; 37216/54 and 37217/54 (Serial Nos 786,033, 786,034, 786,035 and 786,036) and/or with output means as set forth in my co-pending Applications Nos 37201/54; 37203/54; 37205/54, and 37206/54 (Serial Nos 786,022, 786,024, 786,026 and 786,027). The calculating apparatus described in this specification is also described wholly or in part in Specifications Nos 15773/50, 37226/54, 37230154 and 37232154 (Serial Nos 786,201, 786,044, 786,048 and 786,050) but the scope of the claims differs in each case. The invention is illustrated by the accom 65 panying drawings, wherein:Fig 1 is a diagrammatic perspective view of a machine incorporating the invention and constructed as a book-keeping machine and embodying a magnetizable disc record means; 70 Fig 2 is a fragmentary sectional elevation, looking to the left of Fig 1; Fig 3 a is a view in the axial direction of an inductive distributor; Fig 3 b is an edge view of the rotor used in 75 the distributor of Fig 3 a; Fig 3 c is a cross section of the stator shown in Fig 3 a, on the line " A "-" B "; Fig 3 d shows a wiring diagram for the control of gas-discharge tubes by an inductive dis 80 tributor according to Figs 3 a-3 c; Fig 3 e shows the combination of an inductive distributor similar to that of Fig 3 a with two contact switches of commutator type; Fig 4 a is a diagram in which the digit value 85 6 is marked by recording A C in sine wave form in the digit value fields 0-6; Fig 4 b is a complementary recording of the digit value, by recording A C in the digit value fields 7-9; 90 Fig 4 c shows how the digit value 6 is marked by recording impulses in all the fields 0-6; Fig 4 d indicates that only the beginning of the row of digit value fields is marked by an 95 impulse as a " start" signal, the digit value field 6 contains the digit value signal and the end is indicated by a " stop" impulse; Fig 4 e is similar to Fig 4 d but with the " start " and " stop " signals being of inverted loc polarity, one side of the impulses being flat because it is effected by the discharge of a condenser; Fig 4 f shows that only the digit value

field 6 " is indicated by an impulse; 10 o Fig 4 g illustrates how " start " and " stop ' signals are given by the sides of an elongated rectangular signal, the digit value fields being indicated by an additional impulse; Fig 4 h is similar to Fig 4 g, but with the 114 "start " and " stop " signals indicated by an impulse in inverted direction; Fig 4 i is also similar to Fig 4 g, wherein the inversion point of the " start " and " stop" signals indicates the digit-value field; 11 ' Fig 4 i is a diagram wherein " start ", stop " and digit value signals are represented by wave periods; Fig 4 k is a diagram wherein " start " and " stop " signals are given at the beginning and 124 the end of the sequence of periods and the digit value signal by the interruption between them; Fig 41 is similar to Fig 4 k, but with the interruption filled by a wave of another 12 frequency; Fig 4 m, is a diagram wherein the digit yalue 186,047 field is marked by a signal formed by using different frequencies; Fig 4 N illustrates how the recording can be effected by a constant A C, the start signal and the digit value signal being represented by short interruptions; Fig 5 a is a diagram indicating how multiplication is effected by repeated addition from a full keyboard or punched card or like selection device, with controlled electronic sector switches; Fig 5 b shows in principle an alternative control device for use in multiplication and division; Fig 6 a is a front view of a register shifting device for factors having up to 8 denominations; Fig 6 b is a side elevation of the device of Fig 6 a; Fig 6 c is a part plan of the machine of Fig. 1, showing the register shifting device and the record means and signal heads; Fig 7 shows the basic principle of the calculator for addition, subtraction, multiplication and division with electronically controlled register shifting device and cycle counter; Fig 8 a shows the main shaft, and the parts rotating therewith, of the calculator illustrated in Fig 7 but without shift register; Fig 8 b is a view in axial direction of a magnetizable disc used as a record means for the signals separated according to whether they are below or equal to or above the limiting value; Fig 8 c is an edge view of the disc in Fig. 8 b; Fig 8 d is a view in axial direction of a toothed disc used in the one case as signal generator for zero signals, and in another case as a distributor rotor; Fig 8 e is an edge of the disc in Fig 8 d; Fig 9 shows diagrammatically one method of computing by distributive means; Fig 10 is a delay means for delaying the pre-mark switch in Fig 9; Fig 11 shows another method of computing by distributive means and including a full keyboard; Fig 12 a shows a magnetizable drum used as input and output means and as selective storage and having a set of signal heads movable along its surface; said drum being motor driven

and geared to the mechanism for moving the heads; Fig 12 b is a perspective view of a feeding mechanism for dealing with two magnetizable tapes; Fig 12 c is a plan view of a disc bearing optically sensable signals; Fig 13 a is a wiring diagram of an electronic switch for distributing computing signals to conductors co-ordinated to digit values, denominations etc; Fig 13 b is an electronic switch for controlling the recording of computing signals; and Fig 13 c shows perspectively the cathode ray tube of Figs 13 a and 13 b. In the drawings only so much of the mechanical parts of the calculator have been included as is necessary for the understanding 70 of the invention, whilst for reasons of clarity the electrical wiring diagrams and the arithmetical problems dealt with have purposely been simplified. In my co-pending application for Patent No 75 15773/50, (Serial No 786,021) an electric calculator is described which includes a signal carrier in the form of a magnetisable disc. There is also described in that application a principle of computing which uses displaced 80 signal heads co-operating with such magnetizable signal carrier and with signal transfer means The displacement could be arranged at the recording as well as the sensing. According to such earlier application also, 85 computing signals can be delivered from modified forms of computing arrangements which will give a result-signal defined relatively to space or time. In the present invention the computing go operation is effected by computing distributors. In the drawing, Fig 1 shows an electric calculator provided with a full keyboard 1 as input means and a printing unit 2 as output 95 means This figure also shows a further keyboard 3 for letters and punctuation marks, and there are still further keys 4 for arithmetical functions, e g plus, minus, multiply and divide, as well as command keys, e g print 100 Printing is effected by the printing unit 2 and the carriage roller 5 which holds the paper 6 and moves it linewise Fig 1 also shows a disc which is contained within the interior of the machine frame as a signal storage device or 105 record means This figure shows only a specific example of a calculator It is evident that there are many other possible ways of combining one or more computers with input and out-put means There can, for instance, 110 be an input means in the form of a tens keyboard, or employing punched cards, tapes, magnetic or optical storages or the like Output means may be printing units, visual indicating means and magnetic or optical storages, 115 or the like, other than the computing record means. The full keyboard 1 contains ten vertical rows 8 '-8 of keys (see Fig

1), these keys also being in ten horizontal rows 9 -99 Of 120 these ten vertical rows the rows 8 W-8 ' represent different denominations, namely from right to left, units to ten millions, while the vertical rows 8 ' and 81 serve for selecting the number areas of the record means within 125 which to operate The horizontal rows 9 -9 ' represent in each denomination digit values from 0 to 9 The keys in this keyboard can be pressed down, and when pressed down are arrested mechanically by means of projections 130 786,047 (see Fig 2) provided on each key and engaging below latches 11 on bars 12, one for each vertical row of keys, these bars being urged longitudinally by springs 13 Each key is urged upwardly by a spring 14 so that when any key in one of the vertical rows is depressed moverment of the latch bar 12 releases any previously depressed key in that row Each key, when depressed, closes contacts 15, 16 arranged below its lower end One of these contacts in each pair is connected horizontally with the corresponding contacts of all the other pairs in the same horizontal row The key at the extreme right hand in Fig 2 and which is in the fifth vertical row 8 ' (Fig 1) is adapted to make contact between spring contacts 15 ' and 160 The contact 16 is, as already stated, connected horizontally to all other keyboard contacts 16 for the keys having the same digit value " O ". The second horizontal line of keys 9 ' represent the digit value " 1 " in all the denominations The contact 161 is therefore connected in parallel horizontally with the contacts 16 ' of all the other keys representing the digit value " 1 ". On the other hand there are vertical connections between the other spring contacts 15 of the several pairs below the keys For 3 Z instance, spring contacts 15 ' shown in Fig 2 are connected to each other vertically in the row 85 (Fig 1). By means of the horizontal digit-wise connection of the respective contacts 16, and the vertical denomination-wise connection of the spring contacts 15, the full keyboard is enabled to indicate, by depressing the appropriate key and closing the corresponding contacts, any digit value in any denomination within the capacity of the machine For any addition or subtraction operation, and comparable with mechanically operating calculators, the keys of the keyboard will be arrested only for one such operation, whereas for multiplying or dividing operations the keys remain arrested until the operation has been completed. The calculator contains within the casing 17 the computing arrangement which perform the operations of adding, subtracting and so on, and the record means The mechanical parts in the example now being described comprise a shaft 18, which is rotated by the motor 19 either intermittently or: continuously as is described below On the said

shaft 18 is mounted the disc 7, comprising the record means The surface of the disc has a magnetizable layer, enabling the recording, sensing and erasing of signals inductively The recording of such signals is effected during a movement of this disc 7 relatively to a stator indicated generally as 20 and comprising a set of signal heads for recording, sensing and erasing respectively The stator parts are mounted on the frame or chassis 21. In my co-pending application for Patent No. 15773/50 (Serial No 786,021) the disc 7 is set forth in more detail see Figs 3 and 5 in that application It will be seen that the disc has a plurality of tracks a-e and f for 70 signals and that the tracks run through successive sectors representing denomination areas. Also within the casing 17 is a sector-switch 22, mounted on the shaft 18 and serving to 75 establish a co-operation between the vertical rows of keys 8 '-8 ' and corresponding sectors on said magnetizable layer, for a purpose described below Also carried by the frame 21 is the stator 23 of a distributor, the rotor 24 of 80 which is mounted on the said shaft 18 The stator 23 includes primary coils 23 a and secondary coils 23 b, whereby certain signals recorded on the disc can, when transmitted to these coils, control output-mechanisms, for 85 instance the printing unit 2, and the carriageroller 5. The printing unit 2 is operable either by signals on the disc 7, or by the contacts 1516 of the keyboard 1 90 The inductive distributor according to Figs. 3 a-3 d comprises in stator 23 a circle of ten primary coils 23 a ' and ten secondary coils 23 b'-', the cores 128 a and 128 b of which are on their one side connected with each other 95 in pairs by the yokes 124 Fig 3 a shows the side-view and Fig 3 c the section on A-B of the stator illustrated in Fig 3 a The rotor 24 (compare also Fig 2) is fixed on shaft 18 by a key 125 in a defined position relative to disc 100 7 It is of starlike form with teeth 126 ' (rotating yokes) and in the example has nine teeth equally spaced so that between the 9 parts of the rotor and between the ten parts of the stator there is a vernier-like displace 105 ment by rotor movement in the direction of the arrow 127, which is used for the purpose of the digit value distribution for the digit value signals 0-9 in the different sectors of the disc 7 110 The rotor 24 is fixed by its key 125 on shaft 18 in such a way that in that timing instant, in which, according to Fig 8 a of my said earlier Application No 15773/50 (Serial No. 786,021) the digit value field " O " in track a 115 is below the slot of a sensing head, the tooth 126 of the starlike rotor 24 is exactly opposite the cores 128 a' and 128 b V of the pair of coils 23 a' and 23 b W connected magnetically by the stationary yoke 124 The magnetic resis 120 tance is very low at that instant, when the tooth 126

connects the primary coil 23 a' magnetically to the secondary coil 23 bl in the way of a transformer; and if a digit value signal has been recorded in the said field " O " it will 125 be sensed at that instant In all other pairs of coils there is no inductive connection and therefore they have a high magnetic resistance. A sensed signal " O " therefore, supplied to all the primary coils 23 a' will generate a 130 plicand for the multiplication process, are recorded in the full keyboard by closing the corresponding contacts between the vertical denomination contact rows 151-15 ' and the horizontal digit value contact rows 16 -, i e 70 corresponding to " 000 000 28 " The separate denominations are made effective denomination by denomination and, beginning from the right hand, by the ignition of the single gas discharge tubes 881 ', which is effected by an 75 inductive sector switch, (not shown), which by successive inductive couplings as it rotates makes effective the electronic denomination switches one after another This sector switch may be the distributor arm 1411 of Fig 6 a 80 This distributor arm 1411 is fixed to shaft 18 in such a way that it couples a first pair of primary and secondary coils when it is in the position for the lowest denomination (sector), a second pair of primary and secondary coils 85 when it is in the second denomination position and so on, compare Figs 17 d-f of my copending application for Patent No 15773/50. By this arrangement, during the passing of sector I the denomination 15 ' (in the shown 90 example switched on digit value " 8 "); at the passing of sector II the denomination 15 ' (digit value " 2 "); at the passing of sector III the denomination 15 ' (digit value " O "); and at the passing of sector IV the denomina 95 tion 154 (digit value " 0 ") etc, is effective. Fig 5 a shows the wiring of the circuit for the electronic denomination or sector switches operated inductively by the signal distributor arm 100 In detail, the pentode 74 amplifies the signals sensed in the signal head 31 ' The amplified signals are led via the coupling capacitor 75 to the discharge tube 73 and effect its ignition to discharge capacitor 86 105 The screen grid voltage of pentode 67 is effected by a voltage drop at resistance 77. The electronic registering is effected by means of permanent signals sensed from the signal carrier by means of sensing heads 76 110 As an alternative, there can also be used a photocell 78 for sensing optically marked permanent signals After the amplification by the pentode 67, the signals effect the ignition of the discharge tube 68 115 The recording heads 32 ' in stator fields I b 9-0 are not directly connected with the discharge circuit of the discharge tube 68 The discharge tube 68 controls only the recording via the pentode 87 and

the discharge distri 120 butor tubes 88 '', of which there is provided one for each denomination of the full keyboard 1 Such discharge distributor tubes 881-8 operate together with the contact rows 151-15 ' Only at the ignition of one of these 125 distributing tubes 88 '-88 ' the full keyboard with be effective in that vertical denomination row, which is co-ordinated with the ignited tube. Therefore, all the discharge tubes 88 W-88 '130 signal only in the magnetically-connected secondary coil 23 bl. In the next instant the field of the digit value field " 1 " is below the sensing head and the connection of the coils 23 al and 23 bl is effected by the tooth 1261 In the timing instant " 2 " the coils 23 a 2 and 23 b Y are connected via the tooth 1262 etc, until, after " 9 ", the inductive distributor begins again with " O ". For a better understanding, in Fig 3 a there was chosen a vernier division with which, in one rotation of the rotor, each coil will be effective nine titnes By reason of using the vernier divisions larger coil intervals can be allowed On the same principle, there could be an arrangement with the teeth in the zeroposition of each sector and ten primary and secondary coils in the stator fields 0, 1, 2, 3 9 of the same or of the following sector. As Fig 3 d shows, the primary coils 23 a' are connected in series At that instant in which a digit value signal is sensed by the said sensing head a current surge is generated which is amplified and given to the primary coils 23 a' A movable magnetic tooth 126 connects one of the secondary coils 23 b' with the corresponding primary coil so that within this secondary coil a voltage surge is generated, which corresponds to the respective digit value signal " 0-9 " Such a voltage surge is used for the ignition or exciting of one or another of the relays connected to each secondary coil, for instance a discharge relay 129 by means of which output or storage means can be connected in accordance with the timed instant of digit value signals. Fig 3 e shows in perspective the practical design of an inductive distributor switch with rotor 117, teeth 1950-9, primary and secondary coils 116 a, 116 b respectively on yokes 197, with a further rotor 118 of a contact switch, pairs of gliding brushes 1191 and 119 ' and contact 120, for another distributing switch, e.g, the sector switch. Multiplication may be effected by a denominational displacement and within each denomination a repeated addition So far as an addition process is concerned, reference is made to the above-mentioned earlier Application No 15773/50 (Serial No 786,021). The fundamental processes of additional means for the denomination displacement, the " counting of the rotations " and the control of the rotations effective at each denomination will be described by means of the Figs 5 a, 5 b and 6 a, 6 b, 6 c Fig 5 a comprises a computing

arrangement connected with electronic denomination switch and full keyboard Figs. 6 a and 6 b show a multiple inductive distributor arm 141 1 of the sector switch which can effect the functions of the denominational displacement. The digits to be added, in this case multi786,047 786,047 have a defined voltage drop between anode and cathode which is below the ignition voltage (it is to be preferred to stabilise the voltage by a stabiliser) The control grids of the discharge tubes 88 W-888 are adjusted negatively compared to the cathode by means of the voltage division between resistance and secondary coil 82 of the respective discharge. This voltage drop (low ohmic coil) has such a dimension that at the ignition of one of the discharge tubes 881 '888 the voltage at all the other discharge tubes is decreasing almost to the arc-voltage, so that ignitions of other discharge tubes 88 W-888 of this circuit is prevented. Before the " zero " position of a denomination sector is reached during the rotation of the signal carrier and indicating disc 7, the discharge tube which corresponds to this particular sector/denomination, must be ignited. If, for instance, for the purpose of a repeated addition (multiplication) controlled by the full keyboard 1, the digit values, being indicated by pressing down the respective keys, are to be effective successively denomination by denomination with great denomination-computing speeds, this is preferably done as follows: The keys of the keyboard 1 remain untouched, after they have been pressed down. The last denomination row of the keyboard (in which in the shown example key " 8 " is pressed down) will be made effective by the ignition of discharge tube 881 of the inductive distributor, so that the recording head 328 in stator fields I b 1 via discharge tube 881 and the contact below the key " 8 " (of the last denomination) is switched on by the ignition with a low current This current is not sufficient to effect the recording of a signal, but it maintains the discharge as an electronic preparation for its effectiveness. Immediately after the sensing head 31 has been excited in stator field I a 9, the capacitor is discharged by the registering signals via the discharge tube 68 and resistance 90. The voltage drop, which is effected at resistance 90 " opens " the pentode 87 and effects a strong current surge in its plate circuit. The discharge tube 88 ', which is ignited, tends to keep its arc-voltage despite the enlarged current of the pentode 87, and therefore a voltage surge in the switched-on recording head 328 in

stator field I b 1 (pressed down key " 8 " of the last denomination of the keyboard) is effected, which in turn effects the recording of the resulting digit value signal. By means of pentode 91 and discharge tube 92, the extinction of the discharge tubes 88 '888 is precisely controlled at the end of the passing of each sector For this purpose, there is sensed either a permanent magnetic signal by a signal head or, as a variation, a permanent optic signal sensed by a photocell is used as an extinguishing signal This signal, which is preferably the permanent "zero" signal in each sector in track it, is sensed by the sensing head 93 and effects an ignition of discharge tube 92 via a coupling capacitor By the resistance 94, the cathode of pentode 87 will be for a short time strongly positive compared with the voltage on the control grid Thus pentode 87 will be closed for a short while and the ignited discharge tube 88 ' will be extinguished by the blocking of the plate current. According to the position of switch 121, an output of figures can be effected by a visual indicating unit stroboscopic flash tube 150, or by a distributor 23 a. At the first rotation of the disc is added, 000 + 028 = 028. During addition the arrangement is effective only for a single rotation (computing cycle) and the blocking of the keys is released after this single rotation, the keys remaining in a rest position during multiplication, so that at the keyboard, " 28 " remains switched on, and during a second rotation is computed:028 + 028 = 056, at a third rotation 056 + 028 = 084, at a fourth rotation 084 + 028 = 112 etc. After nine rotations the signal carrier shows as a result 28 x 9 = 252, provided the process of repeated additions has not been interrupted. The number of cycles effecting additions in this denomination is fixed by the last denomination of the multiplier For example, in the task ( 28 x 69 = 1932 the first step is to find the result of 28 X 9 in the 10 manner described above After terminating the nine cycles with the intermediate result 252, recorded in the signal carrier, the circle 85 of coils Fig 6 c comprising the before-mentioned pairs of coupled primary and secondary coils 11 is mechanically shifted in the axial direction in such a way that the inductive distributor arm 1412, which is displaced by one sector relative to the distributor arm 141 ' (Figs 6 a and 6 b), now couples the primary and secon 11 dary coils as it rotates, instead of the distributor arm 141 '. This may for instance be done in the way shown in Fig 6 c and 7 The multiple distributor arm 141 -' is fixed to shaft 18 The 12 carrier 85 for the said primary and secondary coils is shifted mechanically step

by step after each ten rotations by means of an engagement of the carrier with the cam groove 142 which is intermittently operated by a mechanism 12 143 The springs 144 urge the slide on which the coil carrier 85 is mounted towards the next switching position. Beginning at the right side, the carrier and its slide are moved axially after each ten rota 12 786,047 tions to bring them into register with the next arm of the multiple distributor arm 141 ' The ignition of the denomination switches 88 W is effected after each lateral displacement of the circle The distributor arm 1411 is so positioned that in each adjusted position of the coil carrier 85, such arm effects first an ignition of the denomination switch 881 for the lowest denomination according to the lowest denomination 151 of keyboard 1, at the beginning of the passing of the sector I; then it effects the ignition of the denomination switch 882 at the beginning of the passing of the sector II as is described with the reference to Fig 17 g in the said earlier Application No 15773/50 (Serial No. 786,021) The successive ignition of the denomination switches recurs ten times during the first ten cycles of the computing signal 2 C carrier After these ten cycles the last denomination 15 ' of keyboard 1 becomes effective when the sector II of the rotor becomes operative, and the penultimate denomination 152 is effective at the beginning of the passing of sector III, etc In this way is effected a successive displacement of each of the sectors by one sector length between the sensing of the values from keyboard 1 and the sensing of the values from the computing signal carrier 7, this displacement bringing about a denominational shift. As every distributor arm becomes active ten times before the axial movement of the coil carrier 85 to the next arm of the distributor is effected, there must be provided a device which ensures that only a certain number of cycles of the distributor arm in each position of the coils is effective. A practical example of this cycle-counter and comparison-device for use with contact switching is shown in Fig 5 a, which includes full keyboard 162, with vertical contact rows 138 '-' and horizontal contact rows 134 -. Corresponding to the keys which are pressed down, g, the keys " 69 ", a connection of the vertical and the horizontal contact rows is effected by which digit values of the single denominations of the second factor are represented. The switch 131 is part of the cycle counter which after each rotation switches to the next position During the first rotation of the computing signal carrier, switch 131 effects the connection to switching field 133 , during the second rotation to switching field 133 ', that is to say, the centre contact 132 is connected to the

single contact 1330 before the first rotation; and switches over to 133 ' during the passing of the last denomination sector of the storage during the first rotation, to 133 ' during the passing of that sector during the second rotation and so on. Switch 135 switches to the next contact field after ten rotations of the computing signal carrier, that is to say, once after one rotation of the distributor switch 131 during its switching-over from field 1339 to 1330. In its starting position, switch 135 connects the positive pole, via the central contact 136, the contact arm, and the switching field 70 137 ' to the last vertical contact row 138 '. After ten rotations of the signal carrier, that is after ten cycles, switch 135 switches over to switching field 1372, so that the positive pole is connected via the centre contact 75 of this switch to the vertical contact row 1382, that is to say, the penultimate denomination of the multiplier Afer ten further cycles it moves to contact field 1373 and connects the centre contact 136 to the third contact row 80 138 ' and so on. In connection with the cycle counting, the device has the task of comparing the digit recording in the full keyboard with the number of the rotations of the rotor By this 85 means the computing arrangement will be kept effective until the number of rotations within each denomination of the multiplicand is attained which is required by the digit value of the corresponding denomination of 90 the multiplier For this purpose the windings 139 a and b of a relay are excited each time the central contact 132 is connected with the zero-position contact 133 ' of the cyclecounter 131 The co-ordinated relay con 95 tacts, for instance contact 140, keep effective the computing arrangement in this switching position by closing the circuit of the keyboard. When arranged as a polarised relay, or by means of an additional winding or the like, the 100 relay remains effective until, in the particular denomination, the cycle counter switch 131 closes a circuit through the contact corresponding to the key pressed down in the keyboard 162 and the switched denomination 105 contact field of the switch 135, giving within this comparison device a condition wherein the rotation number which corresponds to the digit value has been reached, and further addition processes are to be kept ineffective 110 The last denomination of the multiplier is represented by the digit value " 9 " which is made effective by means of the switch 135 having switching field 1371 connected thereto and the key contact " 9 " After the switch 115 ing on of relay 139 repeated additions in the contact positions 1331, 133 ', 133 '-1339 are made in all nine times. On the contact arm of switch 131 moving from 1339 to 1330 a circuit consisting of the 120 contact arm of switch 135, contact field 137 ',

vertical contact row 138 ', key-contact " 9 ", horizontal contact row 134 ', connected to contact field 133 ', contact arm of switch 131 and winding 139 b is closed and switch 140 is 125 opened, thereby disconnecting the computing arrangement. On completion of the ten rotations, the coils on carrier 85 are shifted to coincide with the second distributor-arm 141 ', and the switch 130 -7 786,047 switches to the contact field 1372 The relay 139 is again excited via contact 133 ' and winding 139 a The repeated addition is now recommenced in the next denomination during the switching positions 133 ', 1332 of the switch 132, i e, for six rotations After the sixth rotation the relay 139 is again interrupted and further addition processes during the rotations 7, 8, 9 are rendered ineffective. After the second series of ten cycles the third distributor-arm 141 ' is in effective co-operation with the coils 85, displaced axially. This time the relay 139 remains in its resting position at the switching position 133 " of switch 132, as via the resting contact 134 138 ' and switching field 137 ' of switch 135 the operating winding 139 a is short-circuited, In this position no rotation is effective as addition In the same manner the further denominations are multiplied in an automaticmechanical way by a repeated denomination addition. The division process differs from the multiplication process only in that, after the introduction into the machine of the dividend by a single addition, a repeated subtraction, for instance in the form of a complementary addition during nine rotations, is effected in the same way as it is done in the multiplication process, and in that during the tenth rotation an addition is brought about This repeated subtraction is interrupted when the process has passed below the value zero This passing below the zero value is marked by the absence of fugitive " 1 ", and therefore the winding 139 b of the relay 140 of the comparison device is excited, and further complementary additions, viz, the subtraction process, are rendered ineffective Simultaneously the rotation number is recorded on the signal carrier so that the number of effective rotations in each denomination is clearly fixed in a magnetic way and can be read and used as a quotient When dividing, the process always passes below the zero value in consequence of repeated subtraction processes, and a tenth process is always effected for the single addition from which results the " rmainder " of the division in this denomination and which is the starting position for further subtractions in the next lower denomination. Otherwise the processes are completely analogous to the already-described addition/subtraction processes and to the rotation and comparison process used in multiplication. One difference which must be mentioned is that the switching of the

distributor arms must be opposite to that described with reference to Fig 6 c, so that the division process begins at the highest denomination of the dividend and finishes at the last denomination. As already described, the " remainder " remains in storage in the signal carrier together with the quotient which is also fixed in a magnetic way and they can be taken off at any instant The details of a practical example of this arrangement will now be described. The fundamental structure of the mechanical parts of the computor is shown according 70 to the invention, in Fig 7. Fig 7 shows in diagrammatic form an overall picture of a calculator adapted for addition, subtraction, multiplication and division. It includes a disc 7 similar to the disc 7 shown 75 in my co-pending Application for Patent No. 15773/50 (Serial No 786,021), a part of which is a magnetisable signal carrier and another part of which is a character carrier for use with a stroboscopic indicating device 150 80 This disc is figuratively divided into sectors allocated to respective denominations (except that one sector may be left free to allow of operation time) and these are traversed by parallel signal tracks one of which, (referred 85 to as track a) is an input track, another of which (referred to as track b) is an operating track and others of which are used as storage tracks for numbers, for synchronising signals, and for registering signals The sectors are 90 numbered I, II, III and so on. In each sector, each track is divided into digit value fields 0-9 In consequence, any locality on the record may be identified by reference to szctor, track and digit value for 95 example I a 9, X b 3, and so on. In Fig 7, the sensing coil 31 for track a is shown, along with the amplifier pentode 67 and the co-ordinated switching means, registers and capacitors The primary windings 100 of the recording heads for track b are the windings 32 ' The secondary windings of these heads for subtraction (complementary windings) are the windings 166 '-' Use is made of the full keyboard 1 The successive 105 switching the last, penultimate,-etc, denomination of the full keyboard is effected by means of gas discharge tubes 88 ' 8. A carry-over pre-mark switch (compare iny said Application No 15773/50 (Serial No 110 786,021) is represented together with the amplifier by two electronic tubes 100 and 101 of which pentode 100 is the resting contact including amplifier, and pentode 101 the operation contact including amplifier The 115 recording heads within the plate circuits of the latter are accordingly the signal heads 35 and 352 and the recording heads of the " resting contacts " 100 are the hzads 341 and 34 '. The signal head 36 is used as a sensing head 120 and the pentode with

its switching means is used as an amplifier The recording is effected via a secondary winding of the recording head 38. The sensing head' 37 is connected to the 125 grid of the pentode 113 which is used as an amplifier together with its resistors and capacitors The recording head 38 is associated with the transformer 112 The discharge tube which effects the change-over switching 130 R 786,047 of the electronic relay is identified by refer:ence numberal 52. The sensing head 58 of track e is connected to the electronic relay which is formed by the two pentodes 145 and 146, and also effects an amplification It is operated as a switch by the discharge tube 147 Pentode 146 represents the resting contact for the recording head 59 in position XIII a 19, and pentode 145 represents the operation contact for the recording head 60 in position XIII a 18. The switch which provides the pre-mark carry-over signals only at the passing from sector XII to sector XIII can effect an ignition of the gas discharge tube 147 and by it a change-over of the electronic relay in the ring-modulator circle 112, 148, 149 controlled by the gas discharge tube 154 This tube switches the signals from transformer 112 to transformer 149, and therefore to the grid of the discharge tube 147, but only when tube 154 is ignited Provision is made in the main discharge circuits to ensure that the tubes are extinguished at controlled timing instants. Pentode 67 can be switched over in the grid by the switch 152 ', and in the plate circuit by means of switch 1522, so that pentode 67 effects, together with sensing head 151 via the transformer 153, the control of the light flashes of the lighting impulse tube 150. To simplify the description, the discharge control for especially short and intensive light flashes has not been shown. Mechanical parts of the computing arrangement are shown in perspective. On shaft 18 signal distributing arms 1411-8 cut the fields of the coils 155 s which are arranged round these arms and also displaced progressively and can be shifted axially in the direction of the arrow 230 Moreover is represented the coil 156, which is not movable and whose field is also cut by an arm 170. In co-operation with the coils and the discharge tubes 88 '-' the arms effect the automatic denomination displacement for the purpose of the multiplication and division and th.z switching of the single denomination of the full keyboard, for the processing. There is provided a second keyboard 162, which is used for the feeding-in of the multiplier and pre-sets the cycle control respective cycle comparison The second keyboard also effects the necessary switching processes in co-operation with the stepping mechanisms 157

and 158 which operate inductively and without contacts The windings of the coils of these stepping mechanisms are marked 159, 160 and the gas discharge switch which replaces the relay 139 is marked 161. The decision whether the operation process shall be addition, subtraction, multiplication or division is effected by the choice of the key " A-S-M-D " Below these keys are the marked contact sets which initiate the selected function. Multiplication is effected by repeated addition and denomination displacement. In the full keyboard L for instanc, may be 70 tapped " 28 ", and in the second keyboard 162 may be tapped " 69 ", and the task " 28 X 69 = 1932 " is submitted to the calculator on operation of the command key " M ". The discharge tube 881 ignites The arm 75 1411 cuts the field of the coil 1551 and a voltage surge is generated within the coil, and the surge is conveyed to the grid of the tube The ignition of the discharge tube prevents the ignition of any other tube in one cycle 80 The main discharge circuit of the discharge tube is in the plate circuit of pentode 67 whose current is controlled by its grid potential. This pentode is biassed to such an extent that its plate current is just strong enough to keep 85 up the ignition of the gas discharge tube. When the sensing head 31 in track a generates a voltage surge by induction of the magnetic signal, this raises the plate current of tube 67 and effects a signal recording by 90 means of the recording head 328 and records signal " 8 " in track b. On further rotation of the computing signal carrier 7, the discharge tube 881 is extinguished in that the grid of the pentode 67 is 95 tapped negative by the sensing head 171 to such an extent that the current which is nicessary to sustain the discharge of the tube is no longer maintained. On further rotation arm 1411 cuts the next 100 coil 1552 The succeeding discharge tube 882, which renders effective the penultimate denomination of the full keyboard, is thereby ignited as this coil is connected to the ignition electrode of this tube 105 As the penultimate denomination key " 2 " is pressed down, the recording head 322 " 2 " becomes effective (addition) On the passing of the signal " O " below the sensing head 31 of track a, the recording head 322 effects the 110 recording of signal " 2 " in track b. Thus, during the first rotation the denominations of the keyboard are successively rendered effective by igniting the successive discharge tubes 88 at the passing of the arm 115 through the fields of the successive coils.

If no key in any vertical row has been pressed down, more signals are effected electrically by means of the discharge tube 167. If any one of the gas discharge tubes 88 is 120 ignited, the discharge tube 167 " O " cannot also be ignited, as meanwhile the plate voltage has broken down to arc-voltage. If, however, no key is pressed down and the contacts remained open, so that the dis 125 charge tube 88 which is co-ordinated to the denominations could not ignite, then on additional impulses in their place the discharge tube 167 ignites, the main discharge circuit of which leads via a winding of the recording 130 786,047 head 32 " 0 " This process is explained in detail in my co-pending Application No. 15773/50. Similarly, the second cycle is effected, and to the interim sum " 28 " which is on the signal carrier, is now added the number " 28 ", so that at the end of the second cycle the interim sum " 56 " is on the signal carrier at the end of the third cycle " 84 " and so on. In the last denomination of full keyboard 162 is a " 9 " therefore nine rotations, i e nine cycles are effected successively After these nine cycles, the digit value for " 9 x 28 " is recorded on the computing signal carrier. The set of coils 155 8 is now shifted by one denomination to the left (in direction of the arrow 230) always after nine rotations in a manner indicated by reference to Fig 25 c. During the next passing of sector I of the signal carrier 7, no discharge tube is ignited as no denomination of the full keyboard 1 is effective, and only the " O " discharge tube 167 or the like becomes effective so that in the sector I of the new sum " O " is added, and the sum remains unchanged. At the continued rotation, the arm 141 P has reached the field of coil 155 ', has therewith ignited the discharge tube 88 ' and has rendered effective the pressed down key " 8 " in the last denomination of the full keyboard 1, preparatory for the passing of sector II of the signal carrier 7 The displacement of the distributor arm by one denomination effects therewith that without any contact switches and the like in the further course ef the repeated addition of " 28 " the computing signals become effective displaced by one denomination. In the described example, nine rotations ensue mechanically in a similar manner. As in the penultimate denomination of the full keyboard 162, however, the key " 6 " is pressed down; only the first six rotations become effective as additions, whereas during the three further rotations no functions are effective This is brought about by discharge tube 161, which at its ignition biasses the suppressor grid of the pentode 67 and by means of the voltage drop in the resistance 173 the tube is

practically " closed " Thereby, the amplifying function of the pentode for the voltage surges of the passing digit value signals, which are induced in the sensing head 31, becomes ineffective in the same instant Moreover, by the closing of the pentode the discharge tubes 88 of the penultimate denomination of the full keyboard 1 is extinguished By means of a compensation winding 231 of the erasing head 61, in position II a 19, in the discharge circuit of discharge tube 161, the erasing effect in track a is cancelled at the same time, so that the digit value signals for a sum recorded in this track are not changed or erased during the next rotations by the extinction of the discharge tube 161 After terminating the nine rotations the pentode is " opened " again and the effectiveness of the erasing head 61 is restored. The ignition of said discharge tube 161 is 70 controlled by an inductive distributor having a yoke on its discs of the counter as a cycle and by means of which the magnetic flux between the pole-shoes of a pair of coils is preliminarily closed 75 The pairs of coils 59 are arranged around the "units" disc 157 of the cycle counter, and the pairs of coils 160 around the " ten's' disc 158 of the cycle counter The yoke 168 is fixed to the non-magnetic disc 157, and the 80 yoke 169 is fixed to the non-magnetic disc 158 The secondary windings of the coils 159 are connected via the keyboard with the primary windings of the coils 160 The secondary winding of the coil 156 is connected 85 with the primary windings of the coils 159, and the secondary windings of the coils 160 are connected with the cathode and the ignition-electrode of the discharge tube 161. When the arm 170 moves through the mag 90 netic field of the coil 156, built up by direct current of its primary winding, a voltage surge will be generated in the secondary winding at each revolution This surge will be conducted, as described above, via the inductive 95 working distributors 159 and 160, however, only when in this denomination of the keyboard the contact, which corresponds to the revolution, is closed in order to ignite the discharge tube, in this case after the sixth revo 10 lution. Another solution of this problem is in the description of the ten's keyboard in the computing distributing process (cross-coil method) described later In this case the ignition 10 impulse of the discharge tube will be generated in a coil similar to coil 156 The rotation disc 157 is provid-d with a tooth. In another practical form of the calculation arrangement, a recording head is shifted 11 at each revolution along the signal carrier by a gear unit such as is shown in Fig 5 b, or a slowly operating storage unit is connected to it In this case, the digit value signals are kept in the respective fields of the circumfer 1 l ence, for instance, signal " 6 " in the field in which after the sixth revolution the

sensing head and the storage unit are opposite to each other If in a case of multiplication the signal is passing under the sensing head, the dis 1 L charge tube 161 will be ignited. In order to increase the speed of the computor, it is possible to eliminate any ineffective revolutions in any particular denomination For example, if there are only two ldenominations in a number, then they can be recorded immediately the digit in the ten's denomination has been reached Further, when the number in the units denomination has been reached, switching over to the tens 1 786,047 denomination can be effected without delay caused by the completion of the complementary remaining rotations in the units denomination. The switching of the relay 1521, 1522 does not require any further explanation The contacts make effective the computing process in the shown position after switching over they effect the indication and eliminate the effectiveness of the erasing head in track a. The additional equipment for the division consists of a compensatory winding of the coil 155 , by means of which an indication is given that the value " O " has run through and has been evaluated for signal forwarding, and of a set of signal heads 172 by the means of which the resultant (quotient) is recorded in the signal carrier. The cycles at the division are the same as that at the multiplication When the dividend is set in the keyboard 162, and the divisor is set in the keyboard 1, in the course of the first revolution the dividend will be recorded on the signal carrier by addition The slide with the circle 85 of coils 155 8 is in the left-hand position Its starting position when dividing corresponds therefore to the final position at the multiplication At this position of the circle 85 of coils 1550-0 the divisor which is set in keyboard 1 is subtracted during the course of nine revolutions. The subtraction is effected again by the employing of secondary windings 166 9 otthe recording heads 32 '9, the co-ordinated digit value of which is complementary to the primary windings. The change-over switching from " addition " to " subtraction " will be performed by the shifting of switch 55 from switchway 56 to switchway 57. Similar to the procedure of multiplication, the effectiveness of these nine revolutions concerning the computing process is interrupted when the discharge tube 161 is ignited The ignition occurs if, during the passing of distributor arms 141 through the field of the coil 1550, no digit value forwarding signal of the " fugitive one " has been performed. If the coil 155 has a secondary winding, the magnetic flux of this coil can be compensated by the ignition of the discharge tube 147 as the secondary winding is part of the main discharge circuit When there

is no " fugitive one " this discharge tube does not become efective The coil 1550 effects in turn the ignition of the discharge tube 161, which blocks the pentode 67, current to the erasing head 61 of track a is counteracted and the process of repeated subtraction is interrupted. Moreover, the ignition of the discharge tube 161 effects the recording of a digit value signal by recording head ( 172 ') which is effective via the distributor 159/168 at a positior of the change-over switch 2271 corresponding to that at which it is " switched on " at the 1 irespective revolution The quotient of the division process is recorded denomination by denomination on the signal carrier such as described above The correct denominationwise co-ordination in the signal carrier is 70 accomplished by the co-operation of the distributors 160 and 169 in conjunction with the set of coils 1558. Of the nine revolutions, co-ordinated to one denomination, only such a number of cycles 75 will be effective as is necessary to bring the result below " zero " The number of cycles recorded on the signal carrier, however, will be one less, due to a suitable arrangement of the connection of the distributor coils in com ? O bination with the recording heads 1729. As a " tenth revolution" takes place for practical purposes within every denomination displacement, an addition of the divisor recorded in keyboard 1 is effected in a way 85 that, during the course of the tenth or last cycle within one denomination displacement, the contact 55 is switched over from switchway 57 to switchway 58 For the performance of addition, switch 228 is closed; for 90 subtraction, switch 229 is closed For multiplication switches 2261 and 2262 are closed. For division, switches 227 ' and 2273 are closed. Referring now to Fig 8 a, on the main shaft 95 18 are firmly arranged and fixed in their mutual position by keys or the like: toothed wheels 205 and 206, the magnetisable discs 207, the cylindrical computing signal carrier 71 as well as the inductive switches 157 and 100 158 necessary for the multiplication. The Figs 8 b and 8 c show in side view and edge view respectively, one of the magnetisable discs 207 The Figs 8 d and 8 e are similar views of the toothed wheel 205 of Fig 105 8 a such as can be employed for the input of the zero signal in connection with a signal head. Fig 9 shows a computing unit suitable for slow operational speeds 110 In this case, the movable magnetic yoke 1260 (" O " yoke), comparable to a contactarm, moves during the first revolution between the primary coils 215 a, 216 a, 23 a', 217 a and the secondary coils 215 b, 216 b, 115 23 bh-9, 217 b of the instructive distributor. This rotation is co-ordinated to the digit value 0 " of the one number

to be added. After this revolution the yoke is displaced axially, so that at the second revolution the 120 yoke 126 ', angularly backwards displaced by one field, will move through the fields of the pairs of coils On completion of this second revolution, which is co-ordinated to the digit value " 1 ", the yoke 126 , then 126 ', etc, 125 passes between the coils, that is to say, in ten revolutions ten yokes, displaced each time by one digit field pass between the coils. By the switches 540-9, which might be the switches of the full keyboard, the keys of a 130 786,047 typewriter or a boolkkeping machine, etc, one of the primary coils 23 a O '-, representing the digit values 0-9 (at subtraction cycles the complementary values 9-0) will be excited. The switch position remains unchanged during ten revolutions. In the example, the " 2 " has been switched on by the digit value switch 542, which connects primary coil 23 a 2 in the main discharge circuit of the tube 218 If during the first ravolution which is the " O " cycle, the discharge tube 218 has been ignited, a voltage surge will be induced in the secondary coil circuit 23 b-' at the instant of the signal timing position " 2 " ( 0 + 2 = 2) It is in that moment, when the yoke 1260 passes the field between the magnetic poles of the excited coil 23 a 2 and secondary coil 23 b', that the signal will be recorded in the record means (in the example a magnetic layer) by means of one of the recording heads 179-182 at the corresponding field It is evident that in lieu of this a glovr-storage, a contact-storage, etc, can be used. If, instead of the digit value switch 542, the digit value switch 54 ' for the digit value " 8 " had been closed, the voltage surge would have be-en released at the signal-timing position An ignition of the gas discharge tube 218 during the second revolution, efects the addition of " 1 " The digit value switch 54 shown closed, introduces as a first operand the digit value " 2 " At the passing of the yoke 126 ' during this revolution the voltage surge would be excited in the signal timing position " 3 ", etc. The ignition of the discharge tube 218 during the revolution corresponding to the first operand requires a more detailed explanation In this example of the computing arrangement, the ignition of the discharge tub. 218 takes place whenever one of the magnetic yokes 1260-9 nuns through the group of coils 215 a, 215 b and 216 a, 216 b During the passing of the magnetic yoke through the coils, 215 and 216 the discharge tube 219 will be ignited by an impulse from coil 215 b and extinguished afterwards by an impulse from coil 216 b. During the passing by of the yoke 126 ' the ignition takes place at

that moment when the field " O " passes under the sensing head 31. As the discharge tube 219 will switch on the pentode 220, and a voltage surge, generated in the sensing head 31 is amplified by the pentode 220 and transferred, but only if the surge reaches the grid of the pentode during the time of its opening, that is to say, during the first revolution only a " O " signal is transferred, during the second revolution a " 1 " signal is transferred, etc Therefore a comparing verification of the numbers of revolutions with the numbers of the signals being stored will be obtained automatically If there is conformity between these twso cycles the signals will be transferred. The signal sensed by sensing bead 31 will be transmitted to the ignition electrode of the discharge tube 218, via transformer 221, se 70 that this tube will be ignited in the case of conformity before the yoke is entering the pairs of coils 23 a/b O ' and 217 e/b At the passing of the magnetic yoke threugh the pairs of coils 217 a/51 that is, after the revolution 75 has been finished, the discharge tube 218 will be extinguished by a corresponding extingutishing imipulse generated by coil 217 b. The voltage surge, generated in the secondary coils 23 b will be recorded by the 80 recording heads 179, 180, 181 and 182 The selection of the proper recording head from the above set will be Performed by procedures analogous to those described in my said earlier application The signal heads 179, 180 are 85 displaced, as described in that application relative to the heads 181, 182 by ten digit value units This has been done for the purpose of the diminishing of ten from resulting sums above the limiting value The switch 90 ing over is done by a suitable switching mechanism 47/184 The forwarding of the digit value carry-over is effected by means of a polarised relay 47/53 a 53 b which will switch over according to which pair of heads is 95 excited The relay serves as a carry-over pre-marl switch, and is excited by pulses in the secondary windings of the signal heads, after amplification by means not shown 100 A carry-over arrangement of this kind is described in detail with reference to Fig 29 of my said co-pending Application No. 15773/50 (Serial No 786,021) in which the same reference numbers are used for the same 105 parts. Fig 10 shows a means for delaying the operation of the pre-mark switch. The contact switch-over mechanism can be replaced by inertialess switches, such as gas 110 discharge tubes, electronic relays, etc. In the construction above described, ten revolutions are necessary for each of the computing cycles Another practical xample of the computing arrangement requires only one 115 revolution at every computing operation.

II PRACTICAL EXAMPLE OF A CALCULATION ARRANGEMENT ACCORDING TO THE COMPUTING DISTRIBUTING PROCEDURE WITH SIMULTANEOUS ACTUATION OF THE SECOND 120 DIGIT-VALUE. High efficiency is possible with the above described computing distributing method, if each of the magnetic yokes has its own set or circle of coils on the stator according to the 125 Fig 11, and comprising primary coils and secondary coils, the former being marked 240. 241, 242, 243-249, and the latter 250, 2515 252, 253-259 In the secondary coils it 786,047 will be seen that coils 251-259 are subdivided into coils 251 a and 251 b, 252 a and 252 b and so on, the number of coils subdivided progressively increasing in number to effect the carry-over into the next denomination Coils 240 will not be so sub-divided as they only deal with values " 0-9 ". While in the mechanism according to Fig. 9 the magnetic yokes will be shifted laterally opposite to the set of coils, causing the magnetic yoke 260 first to enter the magnetic fields of the coils during the first revolution and by yoke 126 ' at the second revolution and by yoke 1262 at the third revolution etc this lateral movement will be omitted in the mechanism according to Fig 11. In Fig 9 the discharge tube 218, by means of which the coils were excited, was ignited during one revolution only and remained extinguished during the other revolutions, but in Fig 11, one of the discharge tubes 244 will be ignited during every counting revolution These discharge tubes, in the same way as the discharge tube 218 in Fig 9, will excite the energizing of the co-ordinated sets of coils The only difderence is, that for every digit-value, one discharges tube and a set of coils " 0 to 9 " has been co-ordinated. In the case where a " O " should be added to the digit-value " 6 ", set in the last dpnomination of the full keyboard according to Fig. 11, the discharge tube 244 will be ignited By this ignition, the primary coil 2400, co-ordinated to the " 6 " will be excited and if the magnetic yoke 1260 passes, a voltage surge will be induced in the secondary coils 250, connected in series, at the instant at which the respective field of the rotor passes the recording head 179, recording the addition " 6 + O "=" 6 ". If, however, the addition " 6 + 1 = 7 " has to be performed, the discharge tube 244 ' is ignited according to the second digit to be added, viz, 1 As the magnetic yoke 126 ' is displaced angularly relative to the magnetic yoke 1260 by one digit value unit, the " 7 " corresponding to the sum of the digit values will be recorded on the signal carrier by the recording head 179.

The ignition of the discharge tube 2440is effected by the upper set of coils 238/239 by means of the magnetic yoke 1260. If the voltage surge of a digit value signal is imparted to the grid of pentode 67 and amplified, the discharge tube 237 will be ignited via the coupling member 236 The capacitor 233 is biassed just below ignition voltage by a resistance. At the moment of the ignition of discharge tube 237 the capacitor 233 discharges itself via the primary coils 238 -' of the set of coils. A strong current surge will thus be initiated in the coils 238 at that instant at which the digit value signal which corresponds to the one digit passes under the sensing head After discharge of capacitor 233, the tube 237 extinguishes itself This surge will only be imparted, via the magnetic yoke 1260, to that pair of the secondary coils 239 past which the yoke 126 moves, that is, and which is in 70 the case of the digit value " 0 " to the coil 239 , in the case of " 1 " to the co-ordinated coil 239 ', etc co-ordinated to this digit value. One end of the secondary windings is connected to the cathodes of the discharge relays 75 244 -', and the other end of the coil 2390 is connected with the ignition-electrode of the tube 244 , and the coil 2391 with the ignition electrode of the tube 2441 etc; a discharge tube 244 will be ignited each time the co-ordi 80 nated digit value signal passes under the sensing head 32 ' or 32 '. With this cycle the proper addition process (computing process 1) has been terminated. The arrangement of the set of coils allows at 85 the same time the separation of signals depending on whether the result of both digit values is less than or eiqual to the limiting value or exceeds it. The operation of the sub-divided secondary 90 coils is as follows:In the path of the magnetic yoke 1260, which is the " O " track, such a sub-division has not been provided The secondary coils 250 -9 are all connected in series, and a digit 95 value carry-over cannot be effected as the highest of the digit value sums, co-ordinated to this set of coils is less than the limiting value. In the next set of coils of the digit value 100 " 1 " of the magnetic yoke 126 ', the last secondary coil 251 b, however, is separated, as its coordinated signal timing instant " 10 " requires a digit value carryover The two coils 252 '-252 ' on track " 2 " of the mag 105 netic yoke 1262 are separated in order to forward the digit value carry-over of the signal timing instants " 10 " and " 11 " The signals of the coils 250, 251 a, 252 a, 253 a and 259 a exceeding the limiting value ignite the 110 gas discharge tube 234 By means of the displaced recording heads 179 and 181 in the discharge circuits of the tubes 234 and 235, the diminishing is effected in the same process 115 Both discharge tubes are part of a switching circuit and are biassed just

below to the striking voltage. Corresponding to the excited recording heads, (either 179 or 181), that winding 53 a 120 or 53 b of carry-over pre-mark switch which is connected in parallel, will be excited too. Each time the signals are given via the discharge tube 234 to the recording head 179, the armature of this relay will connect the 125 sensing head 311 to the grid of pentode 67. If, however, the recording is effected by the signal head 181, because the sum of the digit values exceeds the limiting value, the sensing head 31 will be connected by the armature 130 ii 47 of the relay with the grid of the pentode 67. When the magnetic yoke 126 passes the coils 238/239 at the beginning of the next digit column, and if the sensing is done via the sensing head 312, that pair of the coils 239, which is "higher" by one unit will be excited, and discharge tube 244 which is "higher" by one digit will be ignited, and thus the digit value carry-over into the next denomination will be accomplished. If higher speeds are required, the polarized relay would have to be replaced by an electronic relay. One of the special adavntages of the electronic means of computing, storing and so on, consists in the possibility of selective storing in combination with the computing-, printing-, indicating-devices and the like These selective storages may contain either changeable recordings of data, which can be sensed, erased and renewed or permanent recordings of data representing constants such as logarithms and the like The principles used for selecting, are mainly the same as those already described as used for coding or converting signals. A magnetic selective storage is shown in Fig 12 a It consists of the magnetizable cylinder 409 with its shaft 410 arranged in bearings in the supports 411 and 412 On shaft 410 also are toothed wheel 413-414 for driving the drum and a wheel 415 independently through clutches, the drive originating in a motor 416. Extending between the supports 411-412 are two guide rods 417 on which slides a carrier 418 for signal heads (recording, sensing and erasing) these being positioned so as to co-operate with the magnetizable layer on the drum 409 The carrier is traversed to and fro to selected positions by means of a cam or screw thread actuated by the said wheel 415 There may be more than one set of signal threads for each drub, and these will be independently traversed to selected positions. Signals stored on the drum may be stored in a longitudinal or in a circumferential direction. The selection of signal recording positions in the lateral direction is effected simply by the lateral movement of the carrier 418 If this movement is done stepwisely, circular tracks may be achieved, lying

(imaginatively) side by side in the lateral direction The stepwise moving is more advantageous than the continuous lateral feeding of the carrier 418, as in this latter case pulses are arranged on a spiral around the drums, crossing on the reverse movement from the left side the lines recorded during the forward movement, whl reas at stepwise feeding of the slide in both directions, the same tracks can be used for sensing, erasing and recording The selecting in different tracks is not only effected by the lateral movement of the carrier, but also by an electric switching in parallel arranged within sets of coils The carrier contains at the same time the sensing, erasing and recording heads, which can be combined 70 to one single head, by the arrangement of different windings The erasing at the selective storage is preferably effected by means of high frequency erasing, as in this way the erasing can be effected easily at definite spots 75 by the transferring of the erasing high frequency only at the desired spot, when the slot of the head is just opposite to the field of the magnetic layer, in which the erasing has to be effected The different tracks or the differ 80 ent slides can be associated with particular numbers. A part of the drum may be used for optical storage if desired. STORING BY MEANS OF TAPES 85 Storing on tapes can be efected as well on optical as on magnetic tapes The digit value of a signal recorded on such a tap-, can either be determined by a definite position relatively to a hole or the like in the tape, or 90 to synchronizing marks on the tape itse-f. These synchronizing marks can either be a control frequency supplying the control frequency for the deflecting system of a cathode ray distributor or they can also be zero puls S 95 synchronizing the discharge circuit of sawtoothed discharge circuits Finally they can consist in the step and stop-pulses as they are used for the control of teletypers. In Fig 12 b there are two tapes shown, 419 10 C and 420, these are advanced step by step by the feeding mechanism which comprises the cranks 421 and connecting rods 422 which latter carry the cross members 423 having upstanding feeds 424 Magnets 425 are 105 arranged below the cross members 423, and there are braking or arresting members 426. If the magnets 425 are energized the feeders 424 are pulled away from the tape and the arresting members 426 are brought down on 11 ( to the tape, so that the reciprocating cross members do not affect the tape If, however, the magnets 425 are not energized the cross members 423 are urged upwards (by springs 426) and at the same time the mem 11 f bers 426 are retracted so that the tape is fed forward step by step by the feeders 424 co-operating with feeding holes in the tape Signals

sensed on the tape 419 in the sequence in which they are recorded may b 2 recorded on 121 tape 420 in the same or another sequence by means of a cross-switching board between the respective sets of sensing devices 427-428, see for example my co-pending Application No 37212/54 (Serial No 786,031) There 12; may be any number of tapes in association with each other so that sorting through any number of cycles can be effected. In Fig 12 c an optical selective storage means is schematically shown, e g as may be 13 786,047 786,047 used in the control and selecting of logarithm charts and the like The same way of selective storing can be used in connection with magnetic selective storages. The control of the selecting of the different pulses is achieved by means of the pulse markings in the concentric rings " a 00-90 " and " b 0-9 " A storage device of this type is set forth in my co-pending application for Patent 37205/54 (Serial No 786,026) For the storing of impulses by optical means four decades can be subdivided in the same way, if impulses at a size of ten are used on microfilms, so that at ten concentric rings the pulses for five columns can be stored With magnetic selective storing ten to hundred subdivisions can be achieved at ten column-figures. The control pulses for the " hundreds " arte arranged in the ten tracks (concentric rings) of portion " a 00-90 ", whereas the control impulses for the " one's " are contained in the ten tracks of portion " b 0-9 " Each of the portions "al F' and " b " is controlled by a photocell, connected with a discharge tube. Only one of the ten concentric rings of the portions a and b can become effective for the selective control on account of the slotted blends " A " and " B ", which can be laterally to one of the concentric rings " 00 "/10 "/ 20 " etc These control markings are contained within each of the sectors of the selective storage -, according to the number of columns required. At each portion " a " and " b " a series of ten, hundred, etc extinguishing pulses is arranged, by means of which the closing of the pentode is effected According to the adjustment of the slotted blends " A" and " B " only at one specific instant in each of the sectors both pentodes will be excited at the same time, so that only one of the pulses " c O to 9 " can become effective within each of the sectors Instead of slotted blends the corresponding deflecting of a light-beam can be used At this arrangement the digit value pulses are provided in concentric rings in portion " c " around the centre point. Fig 13 c shows a cathode ray tube with 12 switch segments, which can suitably be used as an electronic switch Fig 13 a shows such an electronic switch as receiver From the computing signal carrier is taken a synchronizing frequency which is amplified via the amplifier

357, and at the same time this amplifier delivers a second deflecting voltage, which is shifted by 900 relatively to the initial voltage Both the deflecting voltages are led to the pairs of deflecting plates of the electron switch 352, 358, 359 and effect the circular bending of the cathode ray The computing signals which are sensed from the computing signal carriers are led, via the amplifier 41 to the emission grid 360, and control the intensity of the cathode ray The cathode ray passes along the switch segments 3540-% and, being intensified by a sensed computing signal, effects the ignition of the co-ordinated electronic-relays which are not represented in the figure, but the connections thereto are shown and marked 3530-fl 70 Fig 13 b shows the utilisation of a similarly constructed electron switch 352 as signal generator The electronic ray is bent circularly in the same way by the pairs of deflecting plates 358, 359 and passes along the switch 75 segments 3550-fl With the switch segments are co-ordinated switches 540-n, which control the effectiveness of thz switch segments. If the electronic-ray impinges on a switch segment which is xendernd active by its co 80 ordinated switch, a voltage drop is effected by the flowing secondary omission current at resistor 361 The voltage drop is led to the grid of pentode 371, in the anode circuit of which is situated the recording head 366 85 which records the computing signals on the computing signal carrier. Ticansfer or transmission means or carryover means will be arranged for the positioning of commas, decimal points and the like, go and the computation processes may be adapted for different treatments of various parts of a function, for example the characteristic and the mantissa of a logarithm. Signals sensed from a storage may bhe used 95 as a base to control succeeding computation processes and may be combined with halfcarry-overs or off-roundings, and the indications of commas. The calculator may include means for the 100 varying of the speed of computation, for example the speeding up of multiplication processes, and there may be means for supervising, checking, comparing and controlling the operations of the machine, for example by 105 a repeated computation with comparison of the results, and by the use of bridge switchings, compensation windings and the like.

* Sitemap * Accessibility * Legal notice * Terms of use * Last updated: 08.04.2015 * Worldwide Database

* 5.8.23.4; 93p

* GB786048 (A)

Description: GB786048 (A)

ARRANGEMENT FOR PERFORMING ARITHMETIC OPERATIONS USING AN INTERMEDIATESTORAGE

Description of GB786048 (A)

A high quality text as facsimile in your desired language may be available amongst the following family members:

DE1021188 (B) US3403385 (A) US3530285 (A) DE1021188 (B) US3403385 (A) US3530285 (A) less Translate this text into Tooltip

[83][(1)__Select language] Translate this text into

The EPO does not accept any responsibility for the accuracy of data and information originating from other authorities than the EPO; in particular, the EPO does not guarantee that they are complete, up-to-date or fit for specific purposes.

PATENT SPECIFICATION 786,048 Date of Application and filing Complete Specification: June 23, 1950. No 37230/54. Application made in Germany on Oct 1, 1948. (Divided out of No 786,021) Complete Specification Published: Nov 13, 1957. Index at acceptance:-Class 106 ( 1), A( 1 X: 2 A: 2 B: 2 C: 5 A: 6 C: 7 A: 8 B: 9 X: 10 A: OBI: 1 OF). International Classification:-G 06 f. COMPLETE SPECIFICATION Improvements in or relating to Electric Calculators I, GERHARD DIRKS, of Moerfelder Landstrasse 44, Frankfurt on Main, Germany, of German

Nationality, do hereby declare the invention, for which I pray that a patent may be granted to me, and the method by which it is to be performed, to be particularly described in and by the following statement: - The invention relates to automatic calculators, which are controllable by means of electrical or magnetic signals. The invention provides an electric calculator comprising an operating storage having a magnetisable storage surface and a one-denomination arithmetic unit, with input means and output means, wherein said storage has a plurality of number areas for the storing of a plurality of numbers some of which areas are not accessible to the arithmetic unit, and at least one operating area accessible to the arithmetic unit, with means for selectively transferring a number from any of said non-accessible areas to an accessible area, and wherein the arithmetic unit includes computing elements which may be influenced jointly by two or more signals representing digits in the same denomination of two numbers, one of which has been delivered to such elements from an accessible area of the storage, and another of which has been delivered by the input means, said joint influence generating a result signal in the output means representative of a computation of the digits in said common denomination. The term operating storage as used herein denotes a storage of which a part is accessible to the arithmetic unit, as distinct from a memory storage comprising or included in an input means An example of such a storage is shown in my co-pending Application Patent No 15773/50 (Serial No 786,021), in the form of a rotating disc having a plurality of storage tracks for numbers which are made up of denomination areas and these in turn are made up of digit value fields. Said computing elements may be in the nature of 2-entry gates, or may operate in dependence on combinations of current, voltage 1 Price 3 s 6 d l and/or time The computing elements may be excited by two or more conductors energised selectively in dependence on digit values. There may be a computing element for each digit value and signals of values to be computed will be fed to sets of switching ways selectively so as to establish a connection between the selected ways which passes through the computing elements representing the result value of the combination. In some other cases the computing elements are electrostatic storages adapted to be charged in dependence on two or more digit values. They may be cathode ray tubes to the deflecting systems of which control influences representing digit values are applied selectively The digit value signals may be delivered to the computing elements successively. The storage will be such as to record signals by a change of magnetic

state in the storage material Result signals may be returned to appropriate localities on the same storage from which one of the operands was received or to a record means synchronised therewith. The digit values may be transferred at the respective instant and/or period in respect of a time base of which different instants and/or periods represent different digit values Also, denominational values may be transferred at the respective periods of a time base of which different periods represent different denominational values Such time base may be determined with reference to the control frequency of one or more electronic switches or to one or more synchronising signals of distributing means. The invention may be provided with input means as set forth in my co-pending Applications Nos 37214/54 and 37215/54 (Serial Nos 786,033 and 786,034), and/or with output means as set forth in my co-pending Applications Nos 37201/54; 37205/54; 37206/54; and 37222/54 (Serial Nos 786,022, 786,026, 786,027 and 786,041). The calculating apparatus described in this specification is also described wholly or in part in Specifications Nos 15773/50, 37226/54, 37229/54 and 37232/54 (Serial Nos 786,021, 786,044, 786,047 and 786,050), but the scope of the claims differs in each case. The invention is illustrated by the accompanying drawings, wherein:Fig 1 is a diagrammatic perspective view of a machine incorporating the invention and constructed as a book-keeping machine and embodying a magnetisable disc as the operating storage, Fig 2 is a fragmentary sectional elevation, looking to the left of Fig 1, Fig 3 a is a view in the axial direction of an inductive distributor, Fig 3 b is an edge view of the rotor used in the distributor of Fig 3 a, Fig 3 c is a cross section of the stator shown in Fig 3 a, on the line A-B, Fig 3 d shows a wiring diagram for the control of gas discharge tubes by an inductive distributor according to Fig 3 a-c, Fig 3 e shows the combination of an inductive distributor with commutator type switches, Fig 4 a is a diagram in which the digit value 6 is marked by recording A C in sine wave form in digit value fields 0-6, Fig 4 b is a complementary recording of the digit value, by recording A C in digit value fields 7-9, Fig 4 c shows how the digit value 6 is marked by recording impulses in all fields 0-6, Fig 4 d indicates that only the beginning of a row of digit value fields is marked by an impulse as a " start" signal, the digit value field 6 contains the digit value signal and the end is indicated by a " stop " impulse, Fig 4 e is similar to Fig 4 d but with the start " and " stop " signals being of inverted polarity, one side of the impulses being flat because it is effected by the discharge of a condenser, Fig 4 f shows that only the digit value field

6 " is indicated by an impulse, Fig 4 g illustrates how " start " and " stop" signals are given by the sides of an elongated rectangular signal, the digit value fields being indicated by an additional impulse, Fig 4 h 1 is similar to Fig 4 g, but with the " start " and " stop " signals indicated by an impulse in inverted direction, Fig 4 i is also similar to Fig 4 g, wherein the inversion point of the " start " and " stop signals indicates the digit-value fields, Fig 4 j is a diagram wherein " start ", " stop " and digit value signals are represented by wave periods, Fig 4 k is a diagram wherein " start " and " stop " signals are given at the beginning and the end of the sequence of periods and the digit value signal by the interruption between them, Fig 41 is similar to Fig 4 k, but with the interruption filled by a wave of another frequency, Fig 4 m is a diagram wherein the digit value field is marked by a signal formed by using different frequencies, Fig 4 N illustrates how the recording can be effected by a constant A C, the start signal and the digit value signal being represented by short interruptions, Fig 5 a is a diagram indicating how multiplication is effected by repeated addition from a full keyboard or punched card or like selection device, with controlled electronic sector switches, Fig 5 b shows in principle an alternative control device for use in multiplication and division, Fig 6 a is a front view of a register shifting device for factors having up to 8 denominations, Fig 6 b is a side elevation of the device of Fig 6 a, Fig 6 c is a part plan of the machine of Fig. 1, showing the register shifting device and the operating storage and signal heads, Fig 7 shows the basic principle of the calculator for addition, subtraction, inultiplication and division with electronically-controlled register shifting device and cycle counter, Fig 8 a shows the main shaft, and the parts rotating therewith, of the calculator illustrated in Fig 7 but without shift register, Fig 8 b is a view in axial direction of a magnetisable disc used as an operating storage for the signals separated according to whether they are below or equal to or above the limiting value, Fig Sc is an edge view of the disc in Fig 8 b, Fig 8 d is a view in axial direction of a toothed disc used in the one case as signal generator for zero signals, and in another case as a distributor rotor, Fig 8 e is an edge of the disc in Fig 8 d, Fig 9 a is a part of a wiring diagram of an arithmetic unit incorporating an assemblage of magnetisable elements in a cross-wise arrangement, showing how the elements are connected to the signal transmission means and to recording heads, Figs 9 b and 9 c illustrate the wiring of one example of a complete arrangement for computing by an assemblage of magnetisable elements in a cross-wise arrangement, with the simultaneous introduction of the second digitvalue from a magnetic operating storage, and adapted for addition, subtraction,

multiplication and division, Figs 9 d, 9 e, 9 f, and 9 g illustrate diagrammatically methods of computing with the arrangements shown in Figs 9 a-9 c, Fig 9 h shows in part sectional elevation one constructive embodiment of the cross-coil arrangement in combination with the rotatable means for sensing the results, Fig 10 is a diagram illustrating an arithmetic unit for use according to the invention in which two input signals co-operate to select 786,048 of keys, these bars being urged longitudinally by springs 13 Each key is urged upwardly by a spring 14 so that when any key in one of the vertical rows is depressed movement of the latch bar 12 releases any previously depressed 70 key in that row Each key, when depressed, closes contacts 15, 16 arranged below its lower end One of these contacts in each pair is connected horizontally with the corresponding contacts of all the other pairs in the same hori 75 zontal row The key at the extreme right hand in Fig 2 and which is in the fifth vertical row (Fig 1) is adapted to make contact between spring contacts 15; and 160 The contact 160 is, as already stated, connected horizontally to 80 all other keyboard contacts 16 for the keys having the same digit value " 0 ". The second horizontal line of keys 9 ' represents the digit value " 1 " in all the denominations The contact 16 ' is therefore connected 85 in parallel horizontally with the contacts 161 of all the other keys representing the digit value " 1 ". On the other hand there are vertical connections between the other spring contacts 15 90 of the several pairs below the keys For instance, spring contacts 155 shown in Fig 2 are connected to each other vertically in the row 8 ' (Fig 1). By means of the horizontal digit-wise con 95 nection of the respective contacts 16, and the vertical denomination-wise connection of the spring contacts 15, the full keyboard is enabled to indicate, by depressing the appropriate key and closing the corresponding contacts, any 100 digit value in any denomination within the capacity of the machine For any addition or subtraction operation, and comparable with mechanically operating calculators, the keys of the keyboard will be arrested only for one such 105 operation, whereas for multiplying or dividing operations the keys remain arrested until the operation has been completed. The calculator contains within the casing 17 the computing arrangement which performs the 110 operations of adding, subtracting and so on, and the operating storage The mechanical parts in the example now being described comprise a shaft 18, which is rotated by the motor 19 either intermittently or continuously as is 115 described below On the said shaft 18 is mounted the disc 7, comprising the operating storage The surface of the disc has a magnetisable layer, enabling the

recording, sensing and erasing of signals inductively The record 120 ing of such signals is effected during a movement of this disc 7 relatively to a stator indicated generally as 20 and comprising a set of signal heads for recording, sensing and erasing respectively The stator parts are mounted on 125 the frame or chassis 21. In my co-pending Application No 15773/50 (Serial No 786,021), the disc 7 is set forth in more detail, see for example Figs 3 and 5 in that Application It will there be seen that 130 and energise a coil representing the result, Fig 11 is a wiring diagram of a device incorporating a capacitor as a computing element, Fig 12 is a wiring diagram showing the use of a condenser as a computing element, Fig 13 is a wiring diagram of an alternative arrangement using a condenser as a computing element, Fig 14 is the wiring of an arrangement wherein the result is derived by means of deflecting a cathode ray, Fig 15 is a wiring diagram of an electronic switch for distributing computing signals to conductors co-ordinated to digit values, denominations, etc, Fig 16 is an electronic switch for controlling the recording of computing signals, and Fig 17 shows perspectively the cathode ray tube of Figs 15 and 16. In the drawings, only so much of the mechanical parts of the calculator have been included as is necessary for the understanding of the invention, whilst for reason of clarity the electrical wiring diagrams and the arithmetical problems dealt with have purposely been simplified. In the drawing, Fig 1 shows an electric calculator provided with a full keyboard 1 as input means and a printing unit 2 as output means This Figure also shows a further keyboard 3 for letters and punctuation marks, and there are still further keys 4 for arithmetical functions, e g plus, minus, multiply, and divide, as well as command keys, e g print. Printing is effected by the printing unit 2 and the carriage roller 5 which holds the paper 6 and moves it linewise Fig 1 also shows a disc as an operating storage which is contained within the interior of the machine frame This Figure shows only a specific example of a calculator It is evident that there are many other possible ways of combining one or more computors with input and output means There can, for instance, be an input means in the form of a tens keyboard, or employing punched cards, tapes, magnetic or optical storages or the like Output means may be printing units, visual indicating means and magnetic or optical storages, or the like, other than the computing record means. The full keyboard 1 contains ten vertical rows 8 '-8 of keys (see Fig 1), these keys also being in ten horizontal rows 9 -99 Of these ten vertical rows, the rows 8 '-8 C represent different denominations,

namely from right to left, units to ten millions, while the vertical rows 89 and 8 serve for selecting the number areas of the record means within which to operate The horizontal rows 9 -99 represent in each denomination digit values from 0 to 9. The keys in this keyboard can be pressed down, and when pressed down are arrested mechanically by means of projections 10 (see Fig 2) provided on each key and engaging below latches 11 on bars 12, one for each vertical row 786,048 the disc has a plurality of number tracks f for the storage of numbers and has also operating tracks a-e, only the latter being accessible to the arithmetic unit, and the machine included means for the transfer of numbers from either set of tracks to the other. Also within the casing 17 is a sector-switch 22, mounted on the shaft 18 and serving to establish a co-operation between the vertical rows of keys 81 W 80 and corresponding sectors on said magnetisable layer, for a purpose described below Also carried by the frame 21 is the stator 23 of a distributor, the rotor 24 of which is mounted on the said shaft 18 The stator 23 includes primary coils 23 a and secondary coils 23 b, whereby certain signals recorded on the disc can, when transmitted to these coils, control output-mechanisms, for instance the printing unit 2, and the carriageroller 5. The printing unit 2 is operable either by signals on the disc 7, or by the contacts 15-16 of the keyboard 1. The inductive distributor according to Figs. 3 a-3 d comprises in stator 23 a circle of ten primary coils 23 a' and ten secondary coils 23 b'-', the cores 128 a and 128 b of which are on their one side connected with each other in pairs by the yokes 124 Fig 3 a shows the side view and Fig 3 c the section on A-B of the stator illustrated in Fig 3 a The rotor 24 (compare also Fig 2) is fixed on shaft 18 by a key 125 in a defined position relative to disc 7 It is of starlike form with teeth 126 -B (rotating yokes) and in the example has nine teeth equally spaced so that between the 9 parts of the rotor and between the ten parts of the stator there is a vernier-like displacement by rotor movement in the direction of the arrow 127, which is used for the purpose of the digit value distribution for the digit value signals 0-9 in the different sectors of the disc 7. The rotor 24 is fixed by its key 125 on shaft 18 in such a way that in that timing instant, in which, according to Fig 8 a of my said earlier Application No 15773/50 (Serial No. 786,021), the digit value field " O " in track a is below the slot of a sensing head, the tooth 126 of the starlike rotor 24 is exactly opposite the cores 128 a" and 128 b W of the pair of coils 23 a' and 23 b connected magnetically by the stationary yoke 124 The magnetic resistance is very low at that instant, when the tooth 126 connects

the primary coil 23 a' magnetically to the secondary coil 23 bl in the way of a transformer; and if a digit value signal has been recorded in the said field " 0 " it will be sensed at that instant In all other pairs of coils there is no inductive connection and therefore they have a high magnetic resistance A sensed signal " 0 " therefore, supplied to all the primary coils 23 a' will generate a signal only in the magnetically-connected secondary coil 23 b'. In the next instant the field of the digit value field " 1 " is below the sensing head and the connection of the coils 23 ad and 23 bl is effected by the tooth 126 ' In the timing instant " 2 " the coils 23 a 2 and 23 b 2 are connected via the tooth 1262 etc, until, after " 9 ", the inductive distributor begins again with " 0 ". For a better understanding, in Fig 3 a there was chosen a vernier division with which, in one rotation of the rotor, each coil will be effective nine times By reason of using the vernier divisions larger coil intervals can be allowed On the same principle, there could be an arrangement with the teeth in the zero-position of each sector and ten primary and secondary coils in the stator fields 0, 1, 2, 3 9 of the same or of the following sector. As Fig 3 d shows, the primary coils 23 a' 9 are connected in series At that instant in which a digit value signal is sensed by the said sensing head a current surge is generated which is amplified and given to the primary coils 23 a' A movable magnetic tooth 126 connects one of the secondary coils 23 b' with the corresponding primary coil so that within this secondary coil a voltage surge is generated, which corresponds to the respective digit value signal " 0-9 " Such a voltage surge is used for the ignition or exciting of one or another of the relays connected to each secondary coil, for instance a discharge relay 129 -9 by means of which output or storage means can be connected in accordance with the timed instant of digit value signals. Fig 3 e shows in perspective the practical design of an inductive distributor switch with rotor 117, teeth 195 -', primary and secondary coils 116 a, 116 b respectively on yokes 197, with a further rotor 118 of a contact switch, pairs of gliding brushes 119 ' and 1192 and contact 120, for another distributing switch, e g. the sector switch. Multiplication may be effected by a denominational displacement and within each denomination a repeated addition So far as an addition process is concerned, reference is made to the above-mentioned earlier Application No. 15773/50 (Serial No 786,021). The fundamental processes of additional means for the denomination displacement, the " counting of the rotations " and the control of the

rotations effective at each denomination will be described by means of the Figs 5 a, 5 b and 6 a, 6 b, 6 c Fig 5 a comprises a computing arrangement connected with electronic denomination switch and full keyboard Figs 6 a and 6 b show a multiple inductive distributor arm 141 '- of the sector switch which can effect the functions of the denominational displacement. The digits to be added, in this case the multiplicand for the multiplication process, are recorded in the full keyboard by closing the corresponding contacts between the vertical denomination contact rows 15 '-15 ' and the horizontal digit value contact rows 16 ' , i e. 786,048 division between resistance and secondary coil 82 of the respective discharge This voltage drop (low ohmic coil) has such a dimension that at the ignition of one of the discharge tubes 88 '-88 ' the voltage at all the other dis 7 G charge tubes is decreasing almost to the arcvoltage, so that ignitions of other discharge tubes 88 '-88 ' of this circuit is prevented. Before the " zero " position of a denomination sector is reached during the rotation of the 75 signal carrier and indicating disc 7, the discharge tube which corresponds to this particular sector/denomination, must be ignited. If for instance for the purpose of a repeated addition (multiplication) controlled by the full 80 keyboard 1, the digit values, being indicated by pressing down the respective keys, are to be effective successively denomination by denomination with great denomination-computing speeds, this is preferably done as follows: The 85 keys of the keyboard 1 remain untouched, after they have been pressed down The last denomination row of the keyboard (in which in the shown example key " 8 " is pressed down) will be made effective by the ignition of discharge 90 tube 88 ' of the inductive distributor, so that the recording head 32 ' in stator fields I b 1 via discharge tube 88 ' and the contact below the key " 8 " (of the last denomination) is switched on by the ignition with a low current This cur 95 rent is not sufficient to effect the recording of a signal, but it maintains the discharge as an electronic preparation for its effectiveness. Immediately after the sensing head 31 has been excited in stator field I a 9, the capacitor 100 is discharged by the registering signals via the discharge tube 68 and resistance 90. The voltage drop, which is effected at resistance 90 " opens " the pentode 87 and effects a strong current surge in its plate circuit 105 The discharge tube 88 ', which is ignited, tends to keep its arc-voltage despite the enlarged current of the pentode 87, and therefore a voltage surge in the switched-on recording head 32 ' in stator field I b 1 (pressed down 110 key " 8 " of the last

denomination of the keyboard) is effected, which in turn effects the recording of the resulting digit value signal. By means of pentode 91 and discharge tube 92 the extinction of the discharge tubes 88 ' 115 88 ' is precisely controlled at the end of the passing of each sector For this purpose there is sensed either a permanent magnetic signal by a signal head or, as a variation, a permanent optic signal sensed by a photocell is used 120 as an extinguishing signal This signal, which is preferably the permanent " zero " signal in each sector in track n, is sensed by the sensing head 93 and effects an ignition of discharge tube 92 via a coupling capacitor By the re 125 sistance 94, the cathode of pentode 87 will be for a short time strongly positive compared with the voltage on the control grid Thus pentode 87 will be closed for a short while and the ignited discharge tube 88 ' will be extin 130 corresponding to " 000 000 28 " The separate denominations are made effective denomination by denomination and, beginning from the right hand, by the ignition of the single gas discharge tubes 88 '', which is effected by an inductive sector switch, (not shown), which by successive inductive couplings as it rotates makes effective the electronic denomination switches one after another This sector switch may be the distributor arm 1411 of Fig 6 a This distributor arm 141 ' is fixed to shaft 18 in such a way that it couples a first pair of primary and secondary Goils when it is in the position for the lowest denomination (sector), a second pair of primary and secondary coils when it is in the second denomination position and so on, compare Figs 17 d-f of my co-pending Application for Patent No 15773/50 (Serial No. 786,021) By this arrangement, during the passing of sector I the denomination 151 (in the shown example switched on digit value " 8 "); at the passing of sector II the denomination 152 (digit value " 2 "); at the passing of sector III the denomination 15 ' (digit value " 0 "); and at the passing of sector IV the denomination ' (digit value " 0 ") etc, is effective. Fig 5 a shows the wiring of the circuit for the electronic denomination or sector switches operated inductively by the signal distributor arm. In detail, the pentode 74 amplifies the signals sensed in the signal head 31 ' The amplified signals are led via the coupling capacitor 75 to the discharge tube 73 and effect its ignition to discharge capacitor 86 The screen grid voltage of pentode 67 is effected by a voltage drop at resistance 77. The electronic registering is effected by means of permanent signals sensed from the signal carrier by means of sensing heads 76. As an alternative there can also be used a photocell 78 for sensing optically marked permanent signals After the amplification by the

pentode 67, the signals effect the ignition of the discharge tube 68. The recording heads 32 ' in stator fields I b 9-O are not directly connected with the discharge circuit of the discharge tube 68 The discharge tube 68 controls only the recording via the pentode 87 and the discharge distributor tubes 881-', of which there is provided one for each denomination of the full keyboard 1 Such discharge distributor tubes 88 ' operate together with the contact rows 15 '15 ' Only at the ignition of one of these distributing tubes 88-88 ' the full keyboard will be effective in that vertical denomination row, which is co-ordinated with the ignited tube. Therefore all the discharge tubes 88 '-88 ' have a defined voltage drop between anode and cathode, which is below the ignition voltage (it is to be preferred to stabilise the voltage by a stabiliser) The control grids of the discharge tubes 88 '-88 ' are adjusted negatively compared to the cathode by means of the voltage 786,048 guished by the blocking of the plate current. According to the position of switch 121, an output of figures can be effected by a visual indicating unit stroboscopic flash tube 150, or by a distributor 23 a. At the first rotation of the disc is added, 000 + 028 = 028 During addition the arrangement is effective only for a single rotation (computing cycle) and the blocking of the keys is released after this single rotation, the keys remaining in a rest position during multiplication, so that at the keyboard, " 28 " remains switched on, and during a second rotation is computed: 028 + 028 = 056, at a third rotation 056 + 028 = 084, at a fourth rotation 084 + 028 = 112 etc. After nine rotations the signal carrier shows as a result 28 x 9 = 252, provided the process of repeated additions has not been interrupted. The number of cycles effecting additions in this denomination is fixed by the last denomination of the multiplier For example, in the task 28 x 69 = 1932 the first step is to find the result of 28 x 9 in the manner described above After terminating the nine cycles with the intermediate result 252, recorded in the signal carrier, the circle 85 of coils Fig 6 c comprising the before-mentioned pairs of coupled primary and secondary coils is mechanically shifted in the axial direction in such a way that the inductive distri-butor arm 141 ', which is displaced by one sector relative to the distributor arm 141 ' (Figs. 6 a and 6 b), now couples the primary and secondary coils as it rotates, instead of the distributor arm 141 '. This may for instance be done in the way shown in Figs 6 c and 7 The

multiple distributor arm 141 8 is fixed to shaft 18 The carrier 85 for the said primary and secondary coils is shifted mechanically step by step after each ten rotations by means of an engagement of the carrier with the cam groove 142 which is intermittently operated by a mechanism 143. The springs 144 urge the slide on which the coil carrier 85 is mounted towards the next switching position. Beginning at the right side, the carrier and its slide are moved axially after each ten rotations to bring them into register with the next arm of the multiple distributor arm 141 -8. The ignition of the denomination switches 881-8 is effected after each lateral displacement of the circle The distributor arm 141 ' is so positioned that in each adjusted position of the coil carrier 85, such arm effects first an ignition of the denomination switch 881 for the lowest denomination according to the lowest denomination 151 of keyboard 1, at the beginning of the passing of the sector I; then it effects the ignition of the denomination switch 882 at the beginning of the passing of the sector II as is described with reference to Fig 17 g in the said earlier Application No 15773/50 (Serial No. 786,021) The successive ignition of the denomination switches recurs ten times during the first ten cycles of the computing signal carrier After these ten cycles the last denomination 15 ' of keyboard 1 becomes effective when the sector II of the rotor becomes operative, and the penultimate denomination 152 is effective at the beginning of the passing of sector III, etc In this way is effected a successive displacement of each of the sectors by one sector length between the sensing of the values from keyboard 1 and the sensing of the values from the computing signal carrier 7, this displacement bringing about a denominational shift. As every distributor arm becomes active ten times before the axial movement of the coil carrier 85 to the next arm of the distributor is effected, there must be provided a device which ensures that only a certain number of cycles of the distributor arm in each position of the coils is effective. A practical example of this cycle-counter and comparison-device for use with contact switching is shown in Fig 5 a, which includes full keyboard 162, with vertical contact rows 138 and horizontal contact rows 134 -. Corresponding to the keys which are pressed down, e g, the keys " 69 ", a connection of the vertical and the horizontal contact rows is effected by which digit values of the single denominations of the second factor are represented. The switch 131 is part of the cycle counter which after each rotation switches to the next position During the first rotation of the

computing signal carrier, switch 131 effects the connection to switching field 133 ", during the second rotation to switching field 133 ', that is to say, the centre contact 132 is connected to the single contact 133 ' before the first rotation; and switches over to 133 ' during the passing of the last denomination sector of the storage during the first rotation, to 1332 during the passing of that sector during the second rotation and so no. Switch 135 switches to the next contact field after ten rotations of the computing signal carrier, that is to say, once after one rotation 786,048 relay 139 is again excited via contact 133 and winding 139 a The repeated addition is now recommenced in the next denomination during the switching positions 133 ', 1332-6 of the switch 132, i e for six rotations After the sixth 70 rotation the relay 139 is again interrupted and further addition processes during the rotations 7, 8, 9 are rendered ineffective. After the second series of ten cycles, the third distributor arm 141 ' is in effective co 75 operation with the coils 85, displaced axially. This time the relay 139 remains in its resting position at the switching position 133 ' of switch 132, as via the resting contact 134 138 ' and switching field 137 ' of switch 135 80 the operating winding 139 a is short-circuited. In this position no rotation is effective as addition In the same manner the further denominations are multiplied in an automatic-mechanical way by a repeated denomination 85 addition. The division process differs from the multiplication process only in that, after the introduction into the machine of the dividend by a single addition, a repeated subtraction, for 90 instance in the form of a complementary addition during nine rotations, is effected in the same way as it is done in the multiplication process, and in that during the tenth rotation an addition is brought about This repeated 95 subtraction is interrupted when the process has passed below the value zero This passing below the zero value is marked by the absence of fugitive " 1 ", and therefore the winding 139 b of the relay 140 of the comparison device is 100 excited, and further complementary additions, viz, the subtraction process, are rendered ineffective Simultaneously the rotation number is recorded on the signal carrier so that the number of effective rotations in each denomi 105 nation is clearly fixed in a magnetic way and can be read and used as a quotient When dividing, the process always passes below the zero value in consequence of repeated subtraction processes, and a tenth process is 110 always effected for the single addition from which results the " remainder " of the division in this denomination and which is the starting position for further subtractions in the next lower denomination Otherwise the processes 115 are completely analogous to

the alreadydescribed addition/subtraction processes and to the rotation and comparison processes used in multiplication. Fig 7 shows in diagrammatic form an 120 overall picture of a calculator adapted for addition, subtraction, multiplication and division It includes a disc 7 similar to the disc 7 shown in my co-pending Application for Patent No 15773/50 (Serial No 125 786,021), a part of which is a magnetisable signal carrier and another part of which is a character carrier for use with a stroboscopic indicating device 150. This disc is figuratively divided into sectors 130 of the distributor switch 131 during its switching-over from field 1339 to 1330. In its starting position, switch 135 connects the positive pole, via the central contact 136, the contact arm, and the switching field 137 ' to the last vertical contact row 138 '. After ten rotations of the signal carrier, that is after ten cycles, switch 135 switches over to switching field 1372, so that the positive pole is connected via the centre contact of this switch to the vertical contact row 138 ', that is to say, the penultimate denomination of the multiplier After ten further cycles it moves to contact field 137 ' and connects the centre contact 136 to the third contact row 1383 and so on. In connection with the cycle counting, the device has the task of comparing the digit recording in the full keyboard with the number of rotations of the rotor By this means the computing arrangement will be kept effective until the number of rotations within each denomination of the multiplicand is attained which is required by the digit value of the corresponding denomination of the multiplier. For this purpose the windings 139 a and b of a relay are excited each time the central contact 132 is connected with the zero position contact 133 ' of the cycle-counter 131 The co-ordinated relay contacts, for instance contact 140, keep effective the computing arrangement in this switching position by closing the circuit of the keyboard When arranged as a polarised relay, or by means of an additional winding or the like, the relay remains effective, until, in the particular denomination, the cycle-counter switch 131 closes a circuit through the contact corresponding to the key pressed down in the keyboard 162 and the switched denomination contact field of the switch 135, giving within this comparison device a condition wherein the rotation number which corresponds to the digit value has been reached, and further addition processes are to be kept ineffective. The last denomination of the multiplier is represented by the digit value " 9 " which is made effective by means of the switch 135 having switching field 1371 connected thereto and the key contact " 9 " After the switching on of relay 139 repeated additions in the contact

positions 133 ', 1332, 133 '-133 ' are made in all nine times. On the contact arm of switch 131 moving from 1339 to 133 ' a circuit consisting of the contact arm of switch 135, contact field 137 ', vertical contact row 138 ', key-contact " 9 ", horizontal contact row 134 ', connected to contact field 133 ', contact arm of switch 131 and winding 139 b is closed and switch 140 is opened, thereby disconnecting the computing arrangement. In completion of the ten rotations the coils on carrier 85 are shifted to coincide with the second distributor arm 1412, and the switch 135 switches to the contact field 137 ' The 786,048 allocated to respective denominations (except that one sector may be left free to allow of operation time) and these are traversed by parallel signal tracks one of which (referred to as track a) is an input track, another of which (referred to as track b is an operating track) and others of which are used as storage tracks for numbers, for synchronising signals, and for registering signals The sectors are numbered I, II, III and so on. In each sector, each track is divided into digit value fields 0-9 In consequence, any locality on the record may be identified by reference to sector, track and digit value, for example I a 9, X b 3, and so on. In Fig 7, the sensing coil 31 for track a is shown, along with the amplifier pentode 67 and the co-ordinated switching means, registers and capacitors The primary windings of the recording heads for track b are the windings 32 9 The secondary windings of these heads for subtraction (complementary windings) are the windings 166 Use is made of the full keyboard 1 The successive switching of the last, penultimate,-etc, denomination of the full keyboard is effected by means of gas discharge tubes 881-8. A carry-over pre-mark switch (compare my said Application No 15773/50) (Serial No. 786,021) is represented together with the amplifier by two electronic tubes 100 and 101 of which pentode 100 is the resting contact including amplifier, and pentode 101 the operation contact including amplifier The recording heads within the plate circuits of the latter are accordingly the signal heads 351 and 35 and the recording heads of the " resting contacts " 100 are the heads 34 ' and 342. The signal head 36 is used as a sensing head and the pentode with its switching means is used as an amplifier The recording is effected via a secondary winding of the recording head 38. The sensing head 37 is connected to the grid of the pentode 113 which is used as an amplifier together with its resistors and capacitors The recording head 38 is associated with the transformer 112 The discharge tube which effects the change-over switching of the electronic relay is identified by reference numeral 52.

The sensing head 58 of track e is connected to the electronic relay which is formed by the two pentodes 145 and 146, and also effects an amplification It is operated as a switch by the discharge tube 147 Pentode 146 represents the resting contact for the recording head 59 in position XIII a 19, and pentode represents the operation contact for the recording head 60 in position XIII a 18. The switch which provides the pre-mark carry-over signals only at the passing from sector XII to sector XIII can effect an ignition of the gas discharge tube 147 and by it a change-over of the electronic relay in the ringmodulator circle 112, 148, 149 controlled by the gas discharge tube 154 This tube switches the signals from transformer 112 to transformer 149, and therefore to the grid of the discharge tube 147, but only when tube 154 70 is ignited Provision is made in the main discharge circuits to ensure that the tubes are extinguished at controlled timing instants. Pentode 67 can be switched over in the grid circuit by the switch 1521, and in the plate 75 circuit by means of switch 1522, so that pentode 67 effects, together with sensing head 151 via the transformer 153, the control of the light flashes of the lighting impulse tube 150 To simplify the description, the dis 80 charge control for especially short and intensive light flashes has not been shown. Mechanical parts of the computing arrangement are shown in perspective. On shaft 18 signal distributing arms 141 s 85 cut the fields of the coils 155 '- which are arranged round these arms and also displaced progressively and can be shifted axially in the direction of the arrow 230 Moreover is represented the coil 156, which is not movable and 90 whose field is also cut by an arm 170. In co-operation with the coils and the discharge tubes 88 ' the arms effect the automatic denomination displacement for the purpose of the multiplication and division and 95 the switching of the single denominations of the full keyboard, for the processing. There is provided a second keyboard 162, which is used for the feeding-in of the multiplier and pre-sets the cycle control 100 respective cycle comparison The second keyboard also effects the necessary switching processes in co-operation with the stepping mechanisms 157 and 158 which operate inductively and without contacts The wind 105 ings of the coils of these stepping mechanisms are marked 159, 160 and the gas discharge switch which replaces the relay 139 is marked 161. The decision whether the operation process 110 shall be addition, subtraction, multiplication or division is effected by the choice of the key " A-S-M-D " Below these keys are the marked contact sets which initiate the selected function 115 Multiplication is effected by

repeated addition and denomination displacement. In the full keyboard 1, for instance, may be tapped " 28," and in the second keyboard 162 may be tapped " 69," and the task 120 " 28 x 69 = 1932 " is submitted to the calculator on operation of the command key " M. The discharge tube 88 ' ignites The arm 141 ' cuts the field of the coil 155 ' and a voltage surge is generated within the coil, and 125 the surge is conveyed to the grid of the tube. The ignition of the discharge tube prevents the ignition of any other tube in one cycle. The main discharge circuit of the discharge tube is in the plate circuit of pentode 67 130 786,048 the arrow 230) always after nine rotations in a manner indicated by reference to Fig 25 c. During the next passing of sector I of the signal carrier 7 no discharge tube is ignited as no denomination of the full keyboard 1 is 70 effective, and only the " O " discharge tube 167 or the like becomes effective so that in the sector 1 of the new sum " 0 " is added, and the sum remains unchanged. At the continued rotation the arm 141 ' has 75 reached the field of coil 155 ', has therewith ignited the discharge tube 88 ' and has rendered effective the pressed down key " 8 " in the last denomination of the full keyboard 1, preparatory for the passing of sector II of 80 the signal carrier 7 The displacement of the distributor arm by one denomination effects therewith that without any contact switches and the like in the further course of the repeated addition of " 28 " the computing 85 signals become effective displaced by one denomination. In the described example nine rotations ensue mechanically in a similar manner. As in the penultimate denomination of the 90 full keyboard 162, however, the key " 6 " is pressed down; only the first six rotations become effective as additions, whereas during the three further rotations no functions are effective This is brought about by discharge 95 tube 161, which at its ignition biasses the suppressor grid of the pentode 67 and by means of the voltage drop in the resistance 173 the tube is practically " closed " Thereby the amplifying function of the pentode for the 100 voltage surges of the passing digit value signals, which are induced in the sensing head 31, becomes ineffective in the same instant. Moreover, by the closing of the pentode the discharge tubes 88 " of the penultimate de 105 nomination of the full keyboard 1 is extinguished By means of a compensation winding 231 of the erasing head 61, in position II a 19, in the discharge circuit of discharge tube 161, the erasing effect in track a 110 is cancelled at the same time, so that the digit value signals for a sum recorded in this track

are not changed or erased during the next rotations by the extinction of the discharge tube 161 After terminating the nine rotations 115 the pentode is " opened " again and the effectiveness of the erasing head 61 is restored. The ignition of said discharge tube 161 is controlled by an inductive distributor having 120 a yoke on its discs of the counter as a cycle and by means of which the magnetic flux between the pole-shoes of a pair of coils is preliminarily closed. The pairs of coils 59 are arranged around 125 the " units" disc 157 of the cycle counter, and the pairs of coils 160 around the " ten's " disc 158 of the cycle counter The yoke 168 is fixed to the non-magnetic disc 157, and the yoke 169 is fixed to the non-magnetic disc 158 The 130 whose current is controlled by its grid potential This pentode is biassed to such an extent that its plate current is just strong enough to keep up the ignition of the gas discharge tube 3 When the sensing head 31 in track a generates a voltage surge by induction of the magnetic signal, this raises the plate current of tube 67 and effects a signal recording by means of the recording head 32 ' and records signal " 8 " in track b. On further rotation of the computing signal carrier 7, the discharge tube 88 ' is extinguished in that the grid of the pentode 67 is tapped negative by the sensing head 171 to such an extent that the current which is necessary to sustain the discharge of the tube is no longer maintained. On further rotation arm 1411 cuts the next coil 1552 The succeeding discharge tube 882, which renders effective the penultimate denomination of the full keyboard, is thereby ignited as this coil is connected to the ignition electrode of this tube. As the penultimate denomination key " 2 " is pressed down, the recording head 322 " 2 " becomes effective (addition) On the passing of the signal " 0 " below the sensing head 31 of track a, the recording head 322 effects the recording of signal " 2 " in track b. Thus, during the first rotation the denominations of the keyboard are successively rendered effective by igniting the successive discharge tubes 88 at the passing of the arm through the fields of the successive coils. If no key in any vertical row has been pressed down, zero signals are effected electrically by means of the discharge tube 167 If any one of the gas discharge tubes 88 is ignited, the discharge tube 167 " O " cannot also be ignited, as meanwhile the plate voltage has broken down to arc-voltage. If, however, no key is pressed down and the contacts remained open, so that the discharge tube 88 which is co-ordinated to the denomination could not ignite, then on additional impulses in their place the

discharge tube 167 ignites, the main discharge circuit of which leads via a winding of the recording head 32 " O " This process is explained in detail in my co-pending Application No 15773/50 (Serial No 786,021). Similarly, the second cycle is effected, and to the interim sum " 28 " which is on the signal carrier, is now added the number " 28," so that at the end of the second cycle the interim sum " 56 " is on the signal carrier at the end of the third cycle " 84 " and so on. In the last denomination of full keyboard 162 is a " 9 " therefore nine rotations, i e, nine cycles are effected successively After these nine cycles the digit value for " 9 x 28 is recorded on the computing signal carrier. The set of coils 155-' is now shifted by one denomination to the left (in direction of 786,048 secondary windings of the coils 159 are connected via the keyboard with the primary windings of the coils 160 The secondary winding of the coil 156 is connected with the primary windings of the coils 159, and the secondary windings of the coils 160 are connected with the cathode and the ignitionelectrode of the discharge tube 161 When the arm 170 moves through the magnetic field of the coil 156, built up by direct current of its primary winding, a voltage surge will be generated in the secondary winding at each revolution This surge will be conducted, as described above, via the inductive working distributors 159 and 160, however, only when in this denomination of the keyboard the contact, which corresponds to the revolution, is closed in order to ignite the discharge tube, in this case after the sixth revolution. Another solution of this problem is in the description of the ten's keyboard in the computing distributing process (cross-coil method) described later In this case the ignition impulse of the discharge tube will be generated in a coil similar to coil 156 The rotation disc 157 is provided with a tooth. In another practical form of the calculation arrangement, a recording head is shifted at each revolution along the signal carrier by a gear unit such as is shown in Fig 5 b, or a slowly operating storage unit is connected to it In this case the digit value signals are kept in the respective fields of the circumference, for instance, signal " 6 " in the field in which after the sixth revolution the sensing head and the storage unit are opposite to each other If in a case of multiplication the signal is passing under the sensing head, the discharge tube 161 will be ignited. In order to increase the speed of the computor, it is possible to eliminate any ineffective revolutions in any particular denomination For example, if there are only two denominations in a number, then they can be recorded immediately the digit in the ten's denomination

has been reached Further, when the number in the units denomination has been reached, switching over to the tens denomination can be effected without delay caused by the completion of the complementary remaining rotations in the units denomination. The switching of the relay 152 ', 1522 does not require any further explanation The contacts make effective the computing process in the shown position after switching over they effect the indication and eliminate the effectiveness of the erasing head in track a. The additional equipment for the division consists of a compensatory winding of the coil 155 , by means of which an indication is given that the value " O " has run through and has been evaluated for signal forwarding, and of a set of signal heads 172 by means of which the result (quotient) is recorded in the signal carrier. The cycles at the division are the same as that at the multiplication When the dividend is set in the keyboard 162, and the divisor is set in the keyboard 1, in the course of the first revolution the dividend will be recorded on 70 the signal carrier by addition The slide with the circle 85 of coils 155 is in the lefthand position Its starting position when dividing corresponds therefore to the final position at the multiplication At this position 75 of the circle 85 of coils 155 8 the divisor which is set in keyboard 1 is subtracted during the course of nine revolutions. The subtraction is effected again by the employing of secondary windings 1660- of 80 the recording heads 32 -9, the co-ordinated digit value of which is complementary to the primary windings. The change-over switching from addition " to " subtraction " will be per 85 formed by the shifting of switch 55 from switchway 56 to switchway 57. Similar to the procedure of multiplication the effectiveness of these nine revolutions concerning the computing process is interrupted 90 when the discharge tube 161 is ignited The ignition occurs if, during the passing of distributor arms 141 through the field of the coil 1550, no digit value forwarding signal of the " fugitive one " has been performed 95 If the coil 1550 has a secondary winding, the magnetic flux of this coil can be compensated by the ignition of the discharge tube 147 as the secondary winding is part of the main discharge circuit When there is no 100 "fugitive one" this discharge tube does not become effective The coil 155 ' effects in turn the ignition of the discharge tube 161, which blocks the pentode 67, current to the erasing head 61 of track a is counteracted and the 105 process of repeated subtraction is interrupted. Moreover, the ignition of the discharge tube 161 effects the recording of a digit value signal by recording head ( 172 -) which is effective via the distributor 159/168 at a position of 110 the change-over

switch 227 ' corresponding to that at which it is " switched on " at the respective revolution The quotient of the division process is recorded denomination by denomination on the signal carrier such as 115 described above The correct denominationwise co-ordination in the signal carrier is accomplished by the co-operation of the distributors 160 and 169 in conjunction with the set of coils 1558 120 Of the nine revolutions, co-ordinated to one denomination, only such a number of cycles will be effective as is necessary to bring the result below " zero " The number of cycles recorded on the signal carrier, however, will 125 be one less, due to a suitable arrangement of the connection of the distributor coils in combination with the recording heads 172 '. As a "tenth revolution" takes place for practical purposes within every denomination 130 786,048 with one of the digit values which is to control the arrangement The windings of the other sets of primary windings 270 ' , 271 9, etc, are connected together and arranged in horizontal rows in the anode circuits of the discharge tubes 244 -9, these being controlled in accordance with the second digit value. The arrangement of the windings on their cores is such (as will be apparent from the drawing) that the conductors forming the windings are in two sets such that each conductor is linked to a multiplicity of the elements and each element is linked to one and only one conductor of each set, whilst no two of the elements linked to any conductor of one set are linked to the same conductor of the other set. For each element with its primary windings, there is a secondary winding, and these are sub-divided or separated-except the row 280 ' co-ordinated to the result digit value " 0 "-each into two groups, which are identified by the indices a and b By this arrangement, the energising of a coil marked with index a indicates a result without diminishing of the digit value by ten within the same denomination and without forwarding of a carry-over pre-mark signal into the next denomination, whereas the actuation of the coils with the index b effects the diminishing of the digit value and the forwarding of the carry-over pre-mark signal into the next denomination will be effected. All the elements are suitably provided with an additional winding (not shown) by which a magnetic flux will be induced in one direction, and which exceeds by a small amount the magnetic flux generated in the other direction by the current of the discharge circuit of one of the gas discharge tubes 244 ' or 95 -. Thus an effective magnetic flux can only be induced by igniting two gas discharge tubes at the same time to excite the two primary windings on a single element.

Computation according to this system may be carried out as follows In Fig 9 a, a digit representing signal is sensed by sensing head 31 ' from track a which is a magnetisablestorage track as set forth for example in my co-pending Applications for Patent No. 15773/50 and 37214/54 (Serial Nos 786,021 and 786,033) Switch 47 is in position 48 during this sensing and the signal is amplified by amplifier 41 prior to being fed to all the primary coils 304 '' of cores 304 a" of the input distributor The signal will pass to only that secondary coil 305 "-9 which is connected to its primary coil by one of the magnetic yokes 304 b' completing the magnetic circuit between the two parts of the related core 304 a at the instant of sensing, and thereupon ignite the co-ordinated gas discharge tube 95 " 9 As a result of this ignition, a current flows through all the co-ordinated and interconnected primary windings in the corredisplacer Aent, an addition of the divisor, recorded in keyboard 1 is effected in a way that, during the course of the tenth or last cycle within one denomination displacement, the contact 55 is switched over from switchway 57 to switchway 58 For the performance of addition, switch 228 is closed; for subtraction, switch 229 is closed For multiplication switches 2261 and 2262 are closed For division, switches 227 ' and 2273 are closed. Referring now to Fig 8 a, on the main shaft 18 are firmly arranged and fixed in their mutual position by keys or the like: toothed wheels 205 and 206, the magnetisable discs 207, the cylindrical computing signal carrier 71 as well as the inductive switches 157 and 158 necessary for the multiplication. The Figs 8 b and 8 c show in side view and edge view respectively one of the magnetisable discs 207 The Figs 8 d and 8 e are similar views of the toothed wheel 205 of Fig 8 a such as can be employed for the input of the zero signal in connection with a signal head. Figs 9 a-9 c show a practical example of an arithmetic unit with inductive result elements comprising magnetisable elements, for example cores, having one or more conductors forming windings whereby the magnetic saturation of the cores may be varied Instead of the immediate switching of a full keyboard on to the set of elements 260-269 however, an excitation of these groups of elements by the discharge tubes 95 9 has been provided. An assembly of magnetisable elements of this kind forms the subject of my co-pending Application for Patent No 37232/54 (Serial No 786,050). The cores are shown in horizontal rows representing one set of digits 0-9, and in vertical rows representing another set of digits 0-9 Each core is shown in two parts. In the drawing, the cores are designated 260 Wa to 2609 a down the left-hand vertical row and 260 Wa to 269 'a along the topmost

horizontal row In this arrangement, for example, the two parts comprising the core 263 a would lie in the sixth horizontal row from the top and the fourth vertical row from the left. The respective vertical rows of the elements 2600 a to 269 'a may be switched directly by a full keyboard but, in the case shown, control of these groups of elements by the discharge tubes 95 " has been provided. The arrangement illustrated is such that the magnetisable elements have primary coils each having two windings for control purposes, and the windings are insulated from each other. For example, the one part of the core 260 a carries the primary windings 260 and 2700. The windings of each set of primary windings 260 -9, 261 -9, etc are connected together and arranged in vertically-connected rows in the anode circuits of the discharge tubes 95 -9, the latter being operated in accordance 786,048 sponding one of the columns of elements 260 'a-269 'a. A second digit representing signal, say from a keyboard or from another storage track, is now conveyed (by means not shown) to the control grid of the correspondingly valued tube of the series of discharge tubes 244 connected respectively to the rows 270 -9, 271 '-, etc of primary windings, and therefore only in that element in which the two primary windings on a common coil are energised is there sufficient current to induce a voltage surge in the corresponding secondary winding 280-289 on the passage of one of i 5 the sensing yokes 2000-9 The surge is conveyed to the co-ordinated gas tube of the gas discharge tubes 407 or 408 ' dependent on whether the digit value result is below or equal to or in excess of the limiting value of the denomination (namely " 9 " in a decimal notation) and such tube when ignited, effects the recording of a result signal on track e either by recording head 179 or 181 according to its value, that is to say according to whether the result is above or below the limiting value This discrimination of values is explained in detail in my co-pending Application for Patent No 15773/50 (Serial No. 786,021). There are ten yokes co-opere;ng with the distributor cores 304 -a and ten yokes with each of the groups of cores 260 a-2690 a to 2609 a-2699 a The digit values are sensed from the track a and recorded on the track e serially with only a small distance between the recording positions allocated to adjacent digit values of a denomination The physical position of the yokes co-operating with each group of cores is staggered in relation to the position of the cores so that although the yokes are driven in synchronism with the movement of the tape, the separation of the cores is greater than the separation of

corresponding positions on the tracks. The yokes associated with each row of cores are staggered in relation to the other rows, the yokes for three rows being shown in Fig 9 a The relative positions of the yokes is such that all the cores which represent a particular result value will have their magnetic circuits completed at the same time. The spatial relationship between the yokes and the distributor yokes 304 "-9 b is such that the particular tube 95 is ignited under control of the distributor before the yokes complete the magnetic circuits of any of the cores 260 -a to 269 "-9 a. In the secondary coils it will be seen that coils 281-289 are sub-divided into coils a and b, the sub-division being progressively shifted from row to row. The operation of the sub-divided secondary coils is as follows:The secondary coils 280 "-9 are all connected together and to the tube 4070, since a digit value carry-over cannot be effected, as the highest of the digit value sums, coordinated to this set of coils is less than the limiting value. In the next set of coils 281, the right-hand 70 secondary coil 281 b however, is separated, as it represents the result value " 10 " which requires a digit value carry-over In the next set of coils, the last two coils at the righthand end of the row are separated in order to 75 forward the digit value carry-over of the result values " 10 " and " 11 " The secondary coils, suffixed a, at the left-hand side of the sub-division effect an ignition of the gas discharge tube 234, through one or other of the 80 tubes 4070-0, whereas the secondary coils, suffixed b, at the right-hand side of the subdivision effect an ignition of the gas discharge tube 235 through one or other of the tubes 408 -9 By means of the displaced recording 85 heads 179 and 181 in the discharge circuits of the tubes 234 and 235, the diminishing is effected in the same process. Corresponding to the excited recording heads (either 179 or 181), the switch 47 will 90 Fe in one or other of its two positions Each time the signals are given via the discharge tube 234 to the recording head 179, the sensing head 311 will be connected to the amplifier 41 by switch 47 (in its position 48) 95 If, however, the recording is effected by the signal head 181, because the sum of the digit values exceeds the limiting value, the sensing head 312 will be connected to the amplifier 41 by switch 47 in its other position 100 The head 312 is displaced from the head 31 ' by a distance equal to adjacent digit recording positions on the track a, so that a digit representing signal on the track is sensed one digit time later by the head 312 than by 105 the head 31 ' For example, a signal which is sensed by the head 31 ' at such a time that the output from the head represents the

value " 8," is sensed by the head 312 at such a time that the output from that head represents the 110 value " 9 " Thus, ignition of the tube 52 in parallel with the tube 235 by a signal from a secondary coil suffixed b causes shifting of the switch 47 from the position shown, so that the sensing of the next denomination will be 115 effected by the head 312 The value sensed from track a will therefore be increased by unity, so taking account of the carry. The discharge tube 234 will be ignited by exciting the secondary coils 280 a, 281 a, 282 a, 120 283 a, etc The co-ordinated capacitor will be discharged and by means of the recording head 179 will effect a recording of the result in track e of the signal carrier. When one of the secondary coils 281 b 125 289 b is excited, the discharge tube 235 will be ignited, and a recording by the recording head 181, as well as operation of the switch 47 will be effected The recording heads 179 and 181 are displaced against one another by 130 786,048 main discharge circuit of these gas discharge tubes are situated the primary coils 260 9 to 26909. The vertically connected windings in Fig. 9 b (which are shown horizontally in Fig 9 a), 70 are shown in Fig 9 b as long and narrow rectangles ( 270-279) The horizontally connected primary windings (which are shown vertically in Fig 9 a) are represented by small rectangles In each case, for the sake of clear 75 ness only some of these windings are shown. Also represented as long and narrow rectangles are the secondary coils 280-289. This arrangement is the same as that shown in Fig 9 a with the exception that the remain 80 ing details of the switching means according to Figs 9 b and 9 c deal with the means for the processing of the multiplication and the division, the automatic rounding-off operations, the stepping arrangement for automatic 85 tabulating of denominations, and the setting of the decimal point. When a key of the keyboard 54 in Fig 9 c is depressed, a circuit is completed through one of the wires in the cable k (Figs 9 b and 90 9 c) to the ignition electrode of the corresponding tube of the group 95 -959 in Fig 9 b At the same time, through a circuit not shown, the tube 244 is also fired The cross coil arrangement is then effective to add " O " to 95 the digit entered by the keyboard 54, so that the tube 234 will be fired at a time representative of the digit value, in the manner already described in detail in connection with Fig 9 a The firing of the tube 234 produces 100 a pulse which is fed through the switch 245 in the intermediate position, the recording head 311 ' , the contact arm of the switch 320 and the switch 319 in the position shown, so that the appropriate digit value is recorded in 105 the first denominational position of track c.

Each time a key of a keyboard is operated the relay 317 of Fig 9 c is energised, and this operates the stepping switch 320 after the recording of a digit has been completed 110 Consequently, when the next digit is entered on the keyboard, the same addition process in the cross-coil arrangement takes place, but the pulse due to the firing of the tube 234 is now applied to the head 311 ' and so on for subse 115 quent digits so that the multiplicand digits are recorded in successive denominational areas in the track c. The multiplier is recorded in the track d in exactly the same way except that the switch 120 245 is set to the extreme right-hand position (Fig 9 b) so that the pulses from the tube 234 are fed to the heads 313, which are again selected in turn by the stepping switch 320. During multiplication the track a is used for 125 accumulating the partial products and the track b is used as an auxiliary track for dealing with the re-arrangement of the digits in accordance with whether or not there is a carry in the same way as is described in detail in cpn 130 ten digit recording positions in order to effect the diminishing of the digit value if above the limiting value. Referring now to Figs 9 b and 9 c, the discharge of tube 234 performs at the same tine a repositioning of the carry-over pre-mark switch In this arrangement, the carry-over pre-mark switch is shown as an electronic relay 292 which is reset by the transformer 254, the primary winding of which is situated in the discharge circuit of the discharge tube 234 The discharge of tube 235 effects the switching on of the electronic relay 292 of the carry-over pre-mark switch by the resulting signal induced in the secondary winding of the transformer 255 The digits of one of the values which is to be added are taken from track a by means of the sensing heads 31 '-2 (Fig 9 b), displaced progressively by one denomination relatively to each other Via the step-switch 321 and the switch 247, i e, the " multiplication-division " switch, the signals will be conducted to the transformer 296 and the tubes 291/293 of the electronic relay in Fig 9 c Depending on the ignition or extinction of the gas discharge tube 292 effected by the transformers 254/255 which are part of the recording circuit, one or other of the two pentodes 291, 293 is effective The digit value signal is amplified and via the corresponding transformer is led to the gas discharge tubes 297/299 and 298 which will be ignited The main discharge circuit of the discharge tube 297 is led over the windings 302 ", but the current through the discharge tube 298 is led over the windings 302 ' (Fig. 9 b) These windings are arranged in such a way that the windings 302 " correspond to an addition of the digit value " 0," but the windings 3021 correspond to the addition of the digit value " 1 " to perform

the digit value carry-over from the preceding denomination, i.e, they are equivalent in effect to the windings 260 and 261 of Fig 9 a. By the yokes 126 '/" to 126 "/9 is provided a sequential magnetic connection between the cores carrying the windings 3020 and 302 ' and the cores carrying the horizontal connected winding rows 303 ', so that by excitation one of the winding rows will ignite the co-ordinated discharge tube 244 " and so energise a related primary winding 270 to 279. The second digit value to be added is taken from storage track c by means of one of the heads 311 and imparted via the transformer 317 to pentode 295 controlled by the gas discharge tube 294 When the gas discharge tube 294 is ignited, pentode 295 amplifies the computing signal and effects, via the transformer 246, the ignition of the discharge tube 300, which causes a current surge in the windings 304 By means of the co-ordinated row of yokes 323 an impulse will be induced in the co-ordinated coil of the secondary coils 305 to energise one of the gas tubes 95 In the 786,048 nection with addition processes in my co-pending Application No 15773/50 (Serial No. 786,021). At the start of multiplication tracks a and b both contain zero As a first step, the first multiplier digit is sensed from track d to control the ignition of the corresponding one of the tubes 301 to 3019 The stepping switch 320 is in the position shown (Fig 9 b) so that the head 31410 is effective to sense track d and the signals from this head are fed to the primary winding of the transformer 315 The signals from the secondary of this transformer are amplified by the pentode 290 (Fig 9 c) and is produce a corresponding pulse in the secondary of the transformer 316 to fire the gas tube 296. The firing of this tube produces a current in the primary coil 306 of a distributor via the line e, and the associated yokes 126 U&P to 1269/9 will complete the magnetic circuit to one of the secondary coils 307 which corresponds to the particular digit value which was sensed by the head 314 and will fire the corresponding i 5 one of the gas tubes 301 9 to register the first multiplier digit. At the start of each multiplying cycle, the gas tube 295 of Fig 9 c is fired by a pulse applied to the transformer connected to the ignition electrode through circuit not shown. When the tube 294 is fired, screen voltage is applied to pentode 295 to allow it to respond to signals from the transformer 317 Since the stepping switch 320 is in the first position (as shown in Fig 9 b), this transformer will receive signals from the head 311 " and the line m, so that signals will be induced in the transformer 246 corresponding to the multiplicand digits recorded in the track c These signals control firing of the gas tube 300 which is connected through

the line i to the primary coil 304 of another distributor (Fig 9 b) The yokes 323 of this distributor (see Fig 9 b) couple the primary coil 304 to the individual secondary coils 305 which, with the switch 55 in the position 56, are connected to the ignition electrodes of the gas tubes 95 -. Consequently, when the first multiplicand digit is sensed by the head 311 "' the corresponding gas tube 95 will be fired At the same time, the track a is being sensed by the head 312 ' which is connected for operation by the stepping switch 322 The signals sensed from the track a are fed via the line c to the transformer 296, the secondary of which is connected to the control grids of two pentodes 291 and 293 One or other of these pentodes is selected for operation dependent on whether the gas tube 292 is fired or not This tube operates in the usual carry pre-mark manner, to determine whether or not the sensed value is increased by one. Depending on whether the pentode 291 or 293 is effective, the gas tube 297 or 298 is fired These two tubes are connected through lines f and g to primary coils 302 ' and 302 ' (Fig 9 b) These two primary coils may be coupled magnetically to the secondary coils 3 Q 30 to 3039 by the yokes 126 The position of the yokes is such that if the coil 3020 is energised then the secondary coil 303 which is 70 energised corresponds to the digit value sensed from the track a, but if the coil 3021 is energised, then the secondary coil 303 which is energised will have a digit value greater by one than the digit value sensed in track a 75 The secondary coils 303 are connected to the ignition electrodes of the tubes 2440 to 2449 so that one of these tubes is fired in accordance with the digit value sensed from the track a. Hence, at the end of the first step the first 80 multiplier digit is set up on the tubes 301, the first multiplicand digit is set up on tubes and the first digit from the track a is set up on the tubes 244 Since this is the first cycle, the value from the track a will in fact be " O " 85 The switch 245 is set to the left-hand position, shown in Fig 9 b, so that the sum value from the cross coil arrangement is recorded in track b by one or other of the heads 179 or 181 depending on whether there is a carry or 90 not As a second part of the step, the said value is transferred from track b back to track a in exactly the same manner as is described for addition in my co-pending Application No. 15773/50 (Serial No 786,021) The head for 95 sensing track b and the head for recording on track a have been omitted from Fig 9 b. In subsequent stages, the successive digits of the multiplicand will be set up on the tubes and the corresponding successive digits 100 from the track a will be set up on the tubes 244 Thus, at the end of one revolution the multiplicand will have been added to the value

recorded on track a which is in fact " 0 " at this step, and the sum will have been recorded back 105 on track a. The yoke 323 ' moves at 1/10th of the speed of the other distributor yokes so that, at the end of the first revolution, it will have moved from the " O " position to the " 1 " 110 position On the second revolution, the multiplicand digits will again be set up successively on the tubes 95 and the digits from track a, which are now in fact the same as the multiplicand are set up on the tubes 244 Conse 115 quently, at the end of the second revolution the track a will now contain twice the multiplicand value The tube 294 of Fig 9 c energises an erasing head 231 which operates on the track a to erase each digit re 120 cording after it has been sensed, to allow a recording of the new sum value after transfer from the track b. These cycles are repeated until the yoke 323 ' comes opposite one of the coils 308 which is 125 connected to that tube 301 which is energised. When this occurs, a pulse will be induced in the coil 309 which, via line l and transformer 310, will be applied to the tube 294 to extinguish it This cuts off the pentode 295 and so 130 786,048 switches as in the case of multiplication. These switch-on or switch-off cycles can also be performed in a simple manner by providing, according to a modified example of the computing arrangement, that instead of ten 70 discharge tubes only one discharge tube in combination with a mechanical shifting is used. Another solution of this problem is by means of a sensing head continuously or stepwisely moved laterally along a signal carrier, on which 75 is recorded a digit value signal always in the " row " which corresponds to the " revolution ". Fig 9 d is an addition table, containing the resulting sums within cross-fields of the vertical and the horizontal rows of two operands 80 These cross-fields contain in diagonal rows identical amounts The cross-element procedure with such schematically crosswise arranged winding-systems can make use of the ignition of the gas discharge tubes and by the exciting 85 of at least two winding systems for computing purposes in consequence of the intensified magnetic flux of the element which is in the " crossing-point ", the digit value signals for the recording of the result will be induced in the 90 co-ordinated secondary coil. The recording of these digit value signals can be effected either in connecting into series of the secondary coils of cross-fields according to identical results or in connecting these coils 95 progressively to the recording means In Figs. 9 a-c such progressive connecting is effected by the magnetic yokes 1260.

Fig 9 e shows an addition table similar to the diagram of Fig 9 d Result sums were ob 100 tained in the table of Fig 9 d by going through a column and a row in the direction of arrows 430 and 431, and at the crossing points the sum is marked Deviating from this, in the table shown in Fig 9 e, the one operand is 105 introduced in the direction of arrow 430, while the other is read in the diagonal direction of arrow 432, i e the top right-hand corner represents an entry of 1, the next diagonal row an entry of 2, and so on The results are then 110 found at the left-hand side of the diagram, while a cross in the cross-field of the second operand indicates that the result is in the result row 10-18, also marked with a cross, and not in the result row 0-9 The arrangement of this 115 Figure has the advantage of determining the results at a defined position independent of its amount In similar manner, other cross-point elements can be provided in accordance with other tables, by means of which any other com 120 putation can be effected Examples are shown in the arrangement of Figs 9 f and 9 g being multiplication tables, the former of which contains the tens digit of single denomination multiplications, and the latter is provided foi 125 the units digit One of the sectors is given in the direction of arrow 431, the other is contained within the cross-fields in the direction of arrow 433 The result is shown in the horizontal rows under the tables 130 prevents the multiplicand value being read to the cross coil arrangement The erasing head 231 is also de-energised so that the last value recorded on track a remains there This value is equal to the multiplicand multiplied by the first multiplier digit. There are now a number of idle cycles in which no addition takes place until a total of cycles have been performed The stepping switches 320 and 322 are then moved on one position, and the set of 10 cycles is repeated. Because the stepping switches have been shifted, the necessary column shifts will be obtained, to take account of the fact that the second multiplier digit has now been set up on the tubes 301. These groups of 10 cycles occur in succession so that eventually the track a contains the final product. In order to round off a value the relay 324 (Fig 9 b) is energised at the required denominational position under the control of the stepping switch 321 This relay operates the switch 318 in Fig 9 c to energise the gas tube 299. This, through wire h energises the primary coil 302 ' which has the effect of adding 5 to the digit value sensed from the track a in a similar manner to the effect of the primary coil 3021. In Fig 9 b, twenty teeth are provided as magnetic yokes, for instance the teeth 1260/0, 1260/', 1263/1 ' and 126 'P The increased number of

the teeth would have been necessary in consequence of the intention to arrange 20 denomination areas on the circumference of the signal carrier By means of vernier-like arrangement between stator and rotor, a finer or closer spacing of the digit value signals on the signal carrier will be the result, notwithstanding the relatively large space between the stator-coils of the crossing coil arrangement. The division process is generally similar to that for multiplication The dividend is recorded initially in track a and the divisor in track c The track b is again used as an intermediate calculation track and track d is used for recording the quotient The switch 55 is set to the subtraction position so that the divisor value is subtracted from the dividend value in track a The divisor and dividend are initially recorded in the tracks a and c in such positions that the remainder value will go negative within 9 cycles of subtraction. The occurrence of a negative remainder is determined by whether or not there is a negative carry in the last denomination position in track a The occurrence of a negative remainder is used to generate a signal to extinguish the tube 294 to prevent further subtraction taking place. Each group of 9 cycles is followed by a 10th in which the switch 55 is set to the adding position so that the divisor is now added once to the value registered in track a so returning to a positive remainder The necessary column shifting is again effected by the stepping 786,048 A computing arrangement with cross-coils according to these diagrams as multiplication elements will effect a multiplication within one cycle and not ten cycles are needed as in multiplying by repeated addition. For multiplication the separated input tracks c and d are provided in Figs 9 a and 9 b for the two factors By this universal utilisation of the computing device is made possible Instead of the separated tracks c and d a recording for instance can be provided in one track In this case the denominations of both the factors are arranged displaced relatively to each other. If a decimal point key is co-ordinated to a ten's keyboard, say in the denomination which the stepping relay 320 will occupy at the actuation of the key for the decimal point, the recording of a digit value signal for this decimal point will be effected on the signal carrier without a further switching of the stepping relay. If the insertion of the decimal point is necessary at products (corresponding to both its factors) a second stepping relay will suitably be co-ordinated, which by actuation of the keys of the ten's keyboard 54 is switched on, only when the decimal point key is already pressed down Hereby this second steppingrelay receives a position resulting from the sum of the key operations after the actuation of the decimal point key, that is, which results from the number of the

denominations of both factors following the decimal point From the position of the stepping mechanism the recording of the decimal point signal for the result is shunted in the storage. The recording of the position of decimal points of quotients can be effected by the same stepping relay If dividends and divisors are manually or automatically adjusted to the samenumber of denominations after' the decimal points, the switching of the stepping mechanism is released each time after ten revolutions by one denomination backwards When the starting position is attained, the decimal point signal is recorded for that sector determined by the distributor 322. The lead wires of the round off switch are led over the stepping relay which fixes the position of the decimal point, and therefore the switch controls the rounding off. The printing of the result is effected by means of the discharge relay set 244 ', which excites that winding of the adapter of the printing unit, which is co-ordinated to the respective digit The switching of such adaptors is separately described in the section " printing unit " The windings of the adaptor can be locally implicated into the set of coils of a distributor, for instance of the distributor 85. By way of example Fig 9 h shows the local arrangement and accomodation of sets of coils of a computing distributor, such as described above in connection with the Figs 9 a and 9 b. By means of shaft 18 the motor 19 drives the rotors, e g the rotor 24, within the sets of coils e.g stator 23. One of the special advantages of the electronic means of computing, storing and so on consists in the possibility of selective storing in combination with the computing-, printing-, 70 indicating-devices and the like These selective storages may contain either changeable pulses, which can be sensed, erased and renewed or fixed pulse sequences, containing charts and the like Both sorts of selective storages and 75 the transfer of these pulses to computing-, printing-, indicating devices and the like in a fraction of a second Examples of these selective storages are shown in my co-pending Applications for Patent Nos 37214/54 and 80 37215/54 (Serial Nos 786,033 and 786,034). In Fig 10, an arithmetic unit is shown having computing elements in the form of result coils The result of a computing process is taken from the coils 352 '9, the windings of 85 which connect one contact, representing the digit value of the first digit to be introduced, with a second contact, which corresponds to the digit value of the second digit to be introduced 90 As shown, the connection of the contact group 3260 of the one digit value to the contacts 3270, which are co-ordinated to the other digit value, leads over a winding of coils 3250. Both the contact groups are co-ordinated to the 95 digit value " 0 ";

the result coil 3250 likewise corresponds to the " O " as result of the addition task " O + O = O ". Corresponding to the arithmetical task " 1 + 2 = 3 " the connection of contact group 100 326 ' to 327 leads over the coil 3251 The connection of the contact group 3260 to 327 ' leads over a winding of coil 3259 and over a winding of coil 328 which, being excited, effects the digit value carry over into the next 105 denomination. The contact groups 326 '"' and 327 " may either be metallic contacts or electronic contacts, or some may be metallic contacts, and others electronic contacts 110 The results derived from the coils 325 (or alternatively resistances, contact series etc) are recorded on the signal carrier In this type of arithmetic unit, other storage devices can be employed for the derivation of the result, for 115 instance a glow-storage in which for every denomination 10 discharge tubes are co-ordinated one of which is ignited at each operation. The recording on the signal carrier of the stored result occurs either by voltage drop at 120 a resistor, which is arranged as a result-element in the main discharge circuit or the potential difference which is taken-off at a probe at an anode opposite for instance to the cathode. Other computing operations may be per 125 formed in this type of arithmetic unit For example, instead of the connections between the contacts 326 and 327 selecting the result of an addition, the connections of contacts representing two factors, can be led over the wind 130 786,048 sequences of signals, a frequency modulation or the like on the signal carrier. Thus, the unit of measurement " time " is derived by a gas triode, indicating by its ignition when the condenser has been charged to a predetermined voltage. Fig 12 shows another arrangement of computing by using a condenser as result element. The signal head 333 senses digit value signals on the magnetizable tape 404 After being amplified by amplifier 41 the signals ignite the discharge tube 337 and, by means of the voltage drop at the resistor 340, " open " pentode 330 and capacitor 331 is charged. * The terminating signal sensed by sensing head 356 amplified by amplifier 401 ignites the gas discharge tube 373 The voltage drop at the resistance 339 biasses the pentode 330 and closes it, thus terminating the charging of condenser 331 The voltage of said condenser therefore is in accordance with the time difference between sensing the signals. In similar manner a second digit value signal will effect the charging and a second terminating signal will terminate it, thus introducing a second digit value The voltage of the capacitor is now in accordance

with the sum of the two digit values introduced by their digit value signals. The loading of the capacitor need not be effected by one single switching process in opening the pentode, but the capacitor can be loaded by a plurality of switching-on of the pentode It is only necessary, that small timeperiods remain between the each opening of the pentode, so that the capacitor will not be discharged irregularly via irregular ohmic-resistance or the like in a disturbing degree If for instance a pentode is opened within the first switching process for four time period units according to the digit value " 4 ", and in the second switching process for five time period units according to the digit value " 5 ", the capacitor receives a voltage, which is (equal to nine) timing value units which is equal to the sum of the digit values If within the first switching process the " opening" of the pentode has lasted for 9 time period units according to the digit value 9 and in the second switching process period 5 timing units according to the digit value " 5 ", the capacitor receives in this case a voltage corresponding to the digit value " 14 ". A modified arrangement for charging the condenser makes use of the time intervals of the " O " signal and the digit value signal, the first opening the pentode and the latter closing it. When sensing the digit value from say the disc 7, for example as shown in my co-pending Application for Patent No 15773/50 (Serial No 786,021), the " O " signal and the limiting signal can be sensed from track N of such signal carrier By changing the " O " signal and the limiting value signal complementary quantities ings of the coils representing the products of these factors The invention may incorporate arithmetic units operating by transforming digit values into units of measurement, especially according to current, voltage, charge, time and the like These units of measurement can be transformed ad lib into other units, processed together, and from the said units of measurement can be obtained digit value signals or digit values The transformation and processing of the units of measurement is effected by the joint influencing of result elements. One arrangement for the transformation of digit values into voltage, current and time units for processing by result elements is shown with reference to Fig 11 For instance, for the transformation of digit values into voltage, a pentode can be rendered conducting for a certain length of time, and by means of the biassing of the grid a current co-ordinated to digit values can be obtained Fig 11 shows clearly the input of digit values by taking-off defined voltages, which effect a corresponding current flow through the pentode. The digit values are transformed into voltages by means of the keyboard 54 and the resistor 329 On closing of a digit value switch

540-9 the pole of the said switch is connected to its tapping of the resistor 329 The common pole of all the switches is led to the grid of pentode 330, the cathode of which is connected to the positive end of the resistor 329. By this means the voltage between cathode and grid of pentode 330 is in accordance with the tapped resistance and the digit value tapped in at the keyboard. The said voltage controls the plate current of the tube 330, e g a current of one unit on the actuating of key " 1 ", and a current of nine units on actuating the key " 9 ". The transformation of digit values into voltages, currents and resistances is obtained by using the Ohm's law relation between voltage, current and resistance The pentode acts as a resistor, the resistance of which is controlled by digit values. Fig 11 also shows the transformation of current into voltages, as the condenser 331 when charged for a defined period of time has a voltage which is in accordance with the charging current corresponding to the digit value. The computing signal is represented by its time position, which will be the time difference between actuating the digit value switch and the ignition of the gas discharge tube 343, the latter being connected in parallel with the condenser 331, and having a striking voltage defined by constant biassing If the condenser 331 exceeds this striking voltage, the discharge tube ignites and its plate voltage breaks down to its arc voltage The discharge current passing to the recording head 334 effects the recording, or otherwise controls, electronic switches, or the like, which record signals or 786,048 of electricity are obtained, by means of which subtraction is effected. Computing by means of capacitive elements can be effected also according to Fig 13 The computing signals are sensed from track a of the record (e g disc 7) by means of the sensing head 333, and are led to the grid of pentode 335 The amplified voltage surge is led via the transformer 336 to the ignition electrode of gas discharge tube 337 The voltage drop of the resistor 340 in the main discharge circuit of tube 337 provides the screen grid potential of the pentodes 341 and 342 By the ignition of the gas discharge tube 337 both the pentodes are opened, and they charge the co-ordinated condenser 331 and 332 with constant current. The charging is terminated when an extinguishing impulse, induced in coil 338 at a defined time, effects the extinction of tube 337. By a charging process of the same kind the second operand is introduced into the computing device and effects therewith a corresponding further charging of the condenser 331 and 332. By the supply of further charging units, the gas discharge tubes 343

and 344, which are connected in parallel to the condenser 331 and 332 are ignited The striking voltage of these gas discharge tubes is so chosen that the gas discharge tube 343 ignites when ten charging units are led to the co-ordinated condenser 331. The discharge tube 344, however, has a higher striking voltage, and ignites after the supply of charging units Through transformer 345 the recording of the result signal is effected by means of the recording head 334 when at the further charging of both the condensers after the introduction of the second term of the sum (summand), one of the discharge tubes ignites. In the computing arrangement shown in Fig. 13 further charging by 10 charge units is provided The gas discharge tube 343 ignites on receipt of 10 charge units and the other 344 on receipt of 20 charge units The carry-over pre-mark signal is forwarded dependent on the ignition of the discharge tube 344 which has the higher striking voltage, and simultaneously effecting the diminishing. In a modified form, the ignition of the gas discharge tube 343 before the termination of the receipt of the charge corresponding to a second digit value to be operated, can serve as a signal for the necessary forwarding of a digit value carry-over The grid of discharge tube 343 has such a striking voltage that there is an ignition whenever the potential of the condenser corresponds to the quantity of 10 charging units for each digit unit. Means for the transfer of the digit value carry-over from the preceding denomination is not represented The carry-over pre-mark signal is suitably recorded in an area of the record means which is co-ordinated to the next denomination area of the computing signal carrier; or a " blind storage " may be employed. On ascertaining the digit value sum of the next denomination, this carry-over is taken care of for instance by increasing the charge of the condenser 331, 332 of Fig 13 by one digit 70 value, or this is done by increasing the striking voltage of the discharge tubes 343, 344 or of corresponding tubes, or by providing other means which effect the recording of the resulting digit value increased by the digit value 75 carry-over. For the performance of the subtraction either the complementary digit value is introduced by making a corresponding contact or the like, or systematically the digit value as well as its 80 value complementary to " 9 " are recorded at the same time on separate areas on the computing signal carrier, so that in addition tasksthe direct digit value, and in subtraction tasks -the complementary digit value, is taken from 85 the computing signal carrier. Moreover, signals are obtained which are complementary to each other for the working up in a computing arrangement, i e not by taking the "

time-space "" O " up to the com 90 puting signal, but by taking the " time-space " from the computing signal to the signal " 9 " limiting signal as starting-point for the operation of the complementary digit. The number of the computing cycles which 95 have been executed respectively have become active (cycle counting) at the multiplication tasks and at the division tasks can be obtained by the ascertainment of the charge of the condenser which is supplied with one charge unit 100 at each computing cycle. Fig 14 illustrates diagrammatically an arithmetic unit in which a cathode ray is influenced jointly by two digit values to indicate a result. This Figure shows an electronic converter, for 105 transforming result-voltages into signals representing digit values by their timing instant and the like The voltage of a condenser, e g condenser 331 of Fig 12 is supplied to a pair of deflection plates vertically deflecting the 110 cathode ray of a cathode ray tube, while the other pair of deflection plates is connected to a time base generator Therefore the cathode ray is vertically deflected to a level of the screen 378 according to the voltage of said 115 condenser. The cathode ray is displaced horizontally by the time base generator. As the cathode ray passes or sweeps over the layer 380 connected with the grid of the dis 120 charge tube 402, it ignites the tube, thus recording a " O " signal or a start signal by means of recording head 397 on the tape 406, the latter being either a single tape with two tracks or consisting of tape 406 and 405 having a 125 single track. On further movement of the cathode ray, it passes over the stepped layers 382 or 381 and at that timing instant, it ignites the discharge tube 403 by means of either direct connection 130 786,048 generator The electronic ray is deflected circularly in the same way by the pairs of deflecting plates 358, 359 and passes along the switch segments 355 n With the switch segments are co-ordinated switches 54 n, which control the effectiveness of the switch segments. If the electronic-ray impinges on a switch segment which is rendered active by its co-ordinated switch, a voltage drop is effected by the flowing secondary emission current at resistor 361 The voltage drop is led to the grid of pentode 371, in the anode circuit of which is situated the recording head 366 which records the computing signals on the computing signal carrier. Further modifications of arithmetic unit may be obtained when, instead of the magnetizable computing signal carrier, an electronic record means is employed which consists of a storage screen, on which controlled cathode rays are directed Cathode ray storage tubes are known, for example in television, for converting from one line frequency to another On this storage screen computing signals are

recorded. Such an arrangement is shown in Fig 4 b of my said co-pending Application for Patent No. 15773/50 (Serial No 786,021). Instead of a full keyboard or a ten's keyboard, magnetic tapes, punched tapes, punched cards, optical storages and the like can be used as input means The control of the functions can be effected by actuating the function keys e.g " A '', cc S "", c M ' " D " and " Print ", or these functions may be controlled by magnetizable or punched tapes, discs and the like or by means of switch positions of mechanical, electromechanical or electronic storage means, e.g relays. Instead of contact distributors 132, 135 such as are shown in Fig 5 a, inductive distributors may be provided similar to those shown in Fig 7 The cycle counter and the comparison device can also be modified as shown in Fig 5 b The cycle control may be effected by the coupling of a traversing magnetic head to the signals of a signal carrier. In the modification according to Fig. b, the digit values are recorded in different tracks arranged side-by-side on the signal carrier 163, forming part of the magnetizable disc 7 or connected to it At each rotation of the signal carrier, sensing head 164 is traversed in one direction, e g to the left On sensing the signal in the track corresponding to the digit value the signal is sensed, amplified by amplifier 165 and switches over relay 139 or a similar electronic relay to make the computing arrangement ineffective A further modification will include 10 times 13 sectors at the circumference of the signal carrier for processing 10 cycles in one rotation The computing signals controlling the effectiveness of the cycles are so arranged at the circumference of the signal carrier that the digit value signal for interrupting the effectiveness of the proor by secondary emission, and when passing over the layer 383, it will also ignite the discharge tube 52. The ignition of tube 403 will effect the recording on tape 404 of a digit value signal by means of recording head 334 at the timing instant when the cathode ray passes over the layer 381 or 382 The time difference between the " start " signal and the digit value signal depends on the level of the cathode ray and the voltage of its controlling condenser, effecting simultaneously the diminishing of sums exceeding the limiting value. The ignition of tube 52 effects the forwarding of a tens carry-over into the next denomination if the result exceeds the limiting value. Any signals or sequences of signals can be obtained and/or recorded by such electronic converter. One or several electron switches may be suitably co-ordinated with the signal transmission means Two synchronizing frequencies, taken from

the record means 7 or other source and shifted by 900 relatively one to another, effect a circular deflection of a cathode ray. By employing such an electron switch 352 of Fig 15 as a receiver, a positive impulse is led to the grid of the cathode ray tube when the cathode ray is on that one of the segments 3541 n, which is co-ordinated to the signal, so that by the secondary emission current a coordinated discharge tube is ignited. Fig 17 shows a cathode ray tube with 12 switch segments, which can suitably be used as an electronic switch Fig 15 shows such an electronic switch as receiver From the computing signal carrier is taken a synchronising frequency which is amplified via the amplifier 357, and at the same time this amplifier delivers a second deflecting voltage, which is shifted by 90 relatively to the initial voltage. Both the deflecting voltages are led to the pairs of deflecting plates of the electron switch 352, 358, 359 and effect the circular deflection of the cathode ray The computing signals which are sensed from the computing signal carriers are led, via the amplifier 41 to the emission grid 360, and control the intensity of the cathode ray The cathode ray passes along the switch segments 354 ", and, being intensified by a sensed computing signal, effects the ignition of the co-ordinated electronic-relays which are not represented in the Figure, but the connections thereto are shown and marked 353 By employing such an electron switch 352 as a signal generator, the emission grid of the cathode ray tube is biassed equally and the switching on or interrupting of the secondary emission current is effected by means of the switches 190-n, co-ordinated to the segments 345 By the synchronously moving electronic ray the signal making is given at the right moment. Fig 16 shows the utilisation of a similarly constructed electron switch 352 as signal 786,048 cessing is recorded at a position corresponding to the beginning of the cycle. A further modification provides a gearing having a ratio 1:10 or 1:100 between signal carrier 7 for the multiplicand and signal carrier 163 for the multiplicator By this means the digit values can be recorded in one track of the carrier 163 Division is effected in similar manner. By the use of the storage or record means computations with logarithms, nomograms and other mathematical functions or constants can be effected, the signals representing those operands being selected from the storage, computed by additions, subtraction, multiplication or division, and either returned to the storage or released for further use as computation or control signals, and there may be selecting means whereby the result signals from such functional computations are converted again into direct numerical quantities.

Transfer or transmission means or carryover means will be arranged for the positioning of commas, decimal points and the like, and the computation processes may be adapted for different treatments of various parts of a function, for example the characteristic and the mantissa of a logarithm. Signals sensed from a storage may be used as a base to control succeeding computation processes and may be combined with halfcarry-overs or off-roundings, and the indications of commas. The calculator may include means for the varying of the speed of computation, for example the shortening of multiplication processes, and there may be means for supervising, checking, comparing and controlling the operations of the machine, for example by a repeated computation with comparison of the results, and by the use of bridge switchings, compensation windings and the like.

* Sitemap * Accessibility * Legal notice * Terms of use * Last updated: 08.04.2015 * Worldwide Database * 5.8.23.4; 93p